05 Electric

Let’s calculation , positioning and modify Equipment / Device
Equipment
1 Equipment/Device
2 Correct switch
3 Replacement
4 Change Scale and Angle
5 Move Equipment/Device
6 Creating Parts
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Equ
uipmen
nt/Dev
vice
Function
n Overview
Lay
L out Equip
pment/Devicess .
How to L
Launch the Command
d
1. Pull-down m
menu
Electric (Q)] ->
Click [E > [Equipment ((K)] -> [Equipm
ment/Device (H)].
2.
2 Icon menu
Click on
o .
Explanattion of the Command toolbar
1. Command S
Selection Co
ommands related to the layo
out of Equipment/Devices can
c be selecteed.
2.
2 Layout method selection Select the la
ayout method..
[1.] Indepen
ndent
Lay out one Equipmeent/Device inde
ependently.
[2.] Multiple - ratio

Specify a ratio to lay o
out multiple Equipment/Dev
vices within a rectangular frrame
he frame).
(or on th
Ratio
Late
eral (frame-Eq uipment):
n the range 1.0~1.0.0, the layout ratio ffrom the recta
Specify, in angular framee of the
symbol to lay out, to th
he Equipmentt, in the horizzontal directio
on of the recta
angular
frame (red line).
gitudinal (fram
Long me-Equipment)):
Specify, in n the range 1.0~1.0.0, the layout ratio ffrom the recta
angular framee of the
symbol to lay out, to the
e Equipment, in the vertical direction of the rectangula
ar frame
(red line).
Late
eral (Equipmen nt-Equipment)):
Specify, in the range 1.0
0~1.0.0, the laayout ratio from
m the Equipm ment to lay outt, to the
Equipmentt, in the horizo
ontal direction of the rectanggular frame (re
ed line).
電気-2
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
gitudinal (Equ ipment-Equipm

Long ment):
Specify, in the range 1.00~1.0.0, the la
ayout ratio fromm the Equipmment to lay outt, to the
Equipmentt, in the vertica
al direction of the rectangulaar frame (red line).
- Numbeer of units
Late
eral:
Select, in the range 1..~3.0, the number of sym mbols to lay out o in the ho orizontal
direction off the rectangu
ular frame (red
d line).
Longgitudinal:
Select, in tthe range 1.~33.0, the numbber of symbolss to lay out in the vertical direction
of the recta
angular frame (red line).
- Layoutt method
Layo
out method:
Choose fro
om [grid, houndstooth 1., houndstooth 2.]..
The following are examples of each

e layout method.
Ratio (fram atio (frame-Eqquipment) Longitudinal1.:
me-Equipment) Lateral1.: Ra
Ratio
o (Equipment--Equipment) Lateral2.:
L
When the rratio (frame-Equipment) verrtical2. was inpput
If the
e check box fo or “Layout on frame” is chec cked: Start layyout from on the rectangula
ar frame.
In th
his case, the s pecified numb ber of units is laid out from a position on the
t rectangula ar frame,
so thhe input ratio iis disabled.
- Link
e check box fo
If the or “Link” is che
ecked:
Perform linnked layout.
How wever, link pro ocessing canno ot be performed if the basee angle is set in the contextt menu,
or if circle or arc iss specified.
電気-3
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
1. Draw w Equipment frrame

If the
e check box iss checked
When
W using lin
nked layout for Equipment/D
Devices , also draw the Equ
uipment frames.
If the
e check box iss unchecked
Use
U linked layoyout for Equipm
ment/Devices . Don't draw EEquipment frames.
2. Frame dimension
Seleect the methodd for acquiring frame dimens sions.
If the
e dimension 55. of the curreently set Equip
pment frame iss smaller than
n the detection
n range
of thhe symbol (thhe minimum re ectangle of th ange of the currently
he shape), thee detection ra
selected symbol iss initialized.
Equipment dimenssions: If the sy ymbol to lay out t dimensions of the
o has been cchanged, get the
Equipment frame from the chan nged symbol.
The acquired Equ uipment frame dimensions are a processed with a draw scale
s factor ba
ased on
the standard
s dime
ensions, in thee same way as symbols, soo the dimensio ons may not come
c to
tidy round numberrs, depending on the scale at the time of acquisition.
Speecified dimens ions: Use the dimensions of the Equipmeent frame as th hey are curren
ntly set,
even if the symbool to lay out ha
as been chang ged.
3. Recta anguler layoutt

If the
e check box iss checked, the
e layout with Equipment
E fram
me is laid out in a square.
4. Shape selection
Spe ecify the width of the Equipm
ment plate.
If th
he check box ffor drawing Equipment
E fram
mes is uncheccked, the draw
w result is the
e same,
regaardless of whe ether shape 1.. or 2. is selected.
Sha ape 1.: Draw thhe Equipmentt plate at the same width as the selected part.
Sha ape 2.: Draw thhe Equipmentt plate at the same width as the input Equ uipment frame width.
5. Input each dimensiion.

- Eqquipment fram e length: Inpu ut the length off the Equipmeent frame.
(Dimmensions sma aller than the selected
s part cannot
c be inpuut).
- Eqquipment fram e : Input the width
w of the Eqquipment fram
me.
(Dimmensions sma aller than the selected
s part cannot
c be inpuut).
- Plaate length: Inpput the Equipmment plate spa acing.
If 0 is input as tthe plate lengtth, no Equipment plate is drrawn.
The figu ape from 4. and the dimensioons from 5.

ure below illusttrates the sha
6. Linke
ed numbers
Late
eral: Input the number of link
ked units in the lateral direct
ction.
Longgitudinal: Inpu
ut the number of linked units
s in the longituudinal direction
n.
The figu
ure below sho ows examples of drawings that
t can be laaid out when the
t above con
nditions
A~D aree set for each pattern.
電気-4
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Example) A: Number of units: 2. la

ateral, 2. longiitudinal
B. “Draw Equipment
E fra
ame” unchecke ed, D: No of lin
nked units: 2. lateral
Example) A: Number of units: 2. llateral, 2. long

gitudinal
B. “Draw Equipment
E fra me” checked, D: No of linke
ed units: 2. latteral
Example) A: Number of units: 2. la teral, 2. longittudinal

B. “Draw Eq
quipment fram me” checked, C: C “Square layyout” checked,,
D. Number of linked unitts: 2. lateral, 2.
2 longitudinal
e - distance
[3.] Multiple
Specify a distance to lay out multip
ple Equipment//Devices withhin a rectangullar range
(or on the
t frame).
Howeve er, when speccifying a numbber of units to draw, there iss no specifica
ation of a recta
angular
range.
電気-5
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
nce
- Distan
Lateeral (frame-Eq uipment):
nge 0~9.9.,9.9
Spec ify, in the ran 9.9., the distannce from the rectangular frrame of
the ssymbol to lay y out to the Equipment inn the horizon ntal direction of the
rectan
ngular frame (red
( line).
gitudinal (fram
Long me-Equipment)):
Spec ify, in the ran
nge 0~9.9.,9.9
9.9., the distannce from the rectangular frrame of
the syymbol to lay out
o to the Equipment in the vvertical direction of the recta
angular
framee (red line).
Late
eral (Equipmennt-Equipment)):
Spec ify, in the rang
ge 0~9.9.,9.9.9 quipment to lay out to
9., the distancce from the Eq
the ne
ext Equipmen nt in the horizo
ontal direction of the rectang
gular frame (re
ed line).
Long
gitudinal (Equ ipment-Equipm ment):
Spec ify, in the rang
ge 0~9.9.,9.9.9 9., the distancce from the Eqquipment to lay out to
the ne
ext Equipmen nt in the vertica
al direction of tthe rectangula
ar frame (red line).
l
Whe
en the [Coordi nate] button is
s pressed
Get tthe distances frame~Equipment and Equuipment~Equiipment by spe
ecifying
with tthe mouse.
- Numbe er of units
If the
e check box iss checked
Lateral:
L Selectt, in the range
e 1.~3.0, the number of syymbols to lay out in the hoorizontal
direction.
Longitudinal:
L S
Select, in the range 1.~3.0, the number oof symbols to lay out in the vertical
direction.
- Layoutt method
Layo out method: C Choose from [ggrid, houndstooth 1., houndsstooth 2.].
If the
e check box fo or “Layout on frame” is chec cked: Start layyout from on the rectangula
ar frame.
How wever, if the ch
heck box for “N
No. of units” is
s checked, layoyout on the frame is not posssible.
- Base point
p
Base
e point: Selectt from [LU, RU
U, LB, RB, Center].
- Link
If the
e check box fo
or “Link” is che
ecked: Perform
m linked layouut.
[2.] Same
S as mult iple - ratio.
3.
3 Layout position selection
he layout posiition.
Select th
[1.] Free
La
ay out freely in any position.
[2.] Wall-mounted
pecify the wall group to mou
Sp ment/Devices on, or specify
unt the Equipm y a circle or arrc to lay
out the Equipmeent/Devices .
電気-6
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
4.
4 Offset
If the lay
yout position sselection is “w
wall mounted”, lay out in possitions offset frrom the standard line
by the set
s value.
Use this s in situationss such as whe en laying out recessed
r switc
tches above re eceptacles tha
at have
already been laid out..
5.
5 Layout angle specification
Specify the layout ang
gle at which to
o lay out the Equipment/Dev
E vices .
6.
6 Direction sp
pecification
Select whether
w or nott to specify the
e layout direction.
[1.] If the
t check boxx is checked
Wh hen laying ou ut Equipment//Devices , sp pecify the layo
yout point, followed by the
e layout
dirrection, to makke the layout.
Usse the context menu to chan nge the rotatio
on angle of thee layout direction.
[2.] If the
t check boxx is unchecked d
Wh hen laying outt Equipment/D
Devices , specify the layout ppoint, then ma
ake the layoutt.
7 Scale factor specification

7. n
Specify the scale facttor for the Equ
uipment/Device
es to lay out.
8.
8 Elevation
Specify the elevation for the Equipmment/Devices to lay out.
If the added
a ol master collation is “wal l mounted”, the elevation is set
attributte for symbo
automattically from thee master whenn the symbol is selected.
9.
9 Auto-wiring
After lay
ying out Equip pment/Devices s , prepare wirring in a batchh.
Wire command wiring g method: Initiate the command with batcch horizontal/vertical selecte ed.
Refer too the Wire com mmand for the settings of insstallation methhod etc.
Howeve er, this is only enabled if the
e lay out methood is multiple - ratio or multiple - distance
e.
1.0. Detail Setttings button

Make ad dvanced settin
ngs for the Equipment/Devic
ces to lay outt.
[1.] Standard Scale Factor Setup dialog box
Sh
hape type: Witth standard symbols selectted as standaard, set draw scale
s factor fo
or each
dra
awing scale.
電気-7
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
- Drawin
ng scale/ draw
w scale factor: Specify the draw scale facttor for each drawing scale with
w the
dime
ensions on reelease of drawwing for drawing scale 1./11.00 as the sttandard (scale e factor
1.00
00 times).
Value] button:: Reset to the draw scale faactor values fo

- [Resett to Standard V or each drawin
ng scale
baseed on the JECCA CAD symb bol dimension standards (JE ECA scale facttors).
[2.] Text Anggle Setup dial og box

Set the layout angles for symbol text and shape text.
- Remarrk text
Sele
ect the positionn of the symbo
ol text.
Therre are the follo
owing types off symbol text:
- Ge
eneral parts
Se
elect the posittion of the sym
mbol text for pa
arts other thann combined sw
witches.
- Combiined switch
Se
elect the posittion of the sym
mbol text comb
bined switchess.
- Shapee text
Sele
ect the positionn of shape tex
xt.
Therre are the follo
owing types off shape text:
Howwever, in the range in whiich the layout angle wouldd make the text t appear in nverted
(9.0°°<angle<=2.7..0°), the anglee is corrected.
Symmbols for diffeerential relatio
onships betwe een automaticc fire alarms and smoke control
Devices are not ssubject to corrrection.
For symbols whicch have 2. or more
m characte
ers as the shaape character count, the texxt could
protrrude beyond the shape fo or some layou ut angles. Thherefore, they are drawn with
w the
“Folllow the layoutt angle”.
電気-8
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
[3.] Symbol Text Scale Fa actor Processiing dialog box

x
Set wheether or not to
o multiply by the scale facttor symbol texxt on the Commmand toolba ar when
laying out Equipment//Devices withh symbol text.
Can also set whetherr or not to muultiply the sym
mbol characterr of the actuall size symbol by 100
times
[4.] Wiring Connection

C an
nd Hidden Line e Processing Setup
S dialog bbox
Layout method: Make e settings for connection and hidden linee processing if a position over
o an
existing line is specifie
ed when layinng out indepen
ndently.
- Yes
In th
he event of a sspecification on
o top of the drawn
d line, a process selec
ction dialog bo
ox such
as th
he following iss displayed, an
nd the process sion while laying out.
s is selected oon every occas
The connection o r hidden line button in the process selecction dialog bo ox can be selected if
theyy can be proce essed.
電気-9
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
“For independent”” “For batch”

b
No.
No check
c is made e in the even
nt of a specificcation on top of the drawn n line, and layying out
proc ceeds while peerforming the specified
s proccess.
How wever, the speccified processs is only perforrmed if it is poossible.
If it is not possiblle, the proces
ss is the same e as if the hiddden line proc
cess and connection
proc cess were not to be performmed.
The connection prrocess

Equipment/Device es for which no connection n area exists (only the connection point exists),
the process
p only w
works if the co
onnection poin
nt is on the wirre.
If an Eqquipment/Deviice is specifie
ed for which a connection area and an outline
connect ion area existt, such as a lu
uminaire, the pprocess follow
ws the settingss made
for wire connection position
p in the Advanced Settings dialo og box for th he Wire
command.
If it is placed on a Number of Cable Core, it is moved to the longest wiringw element within
one wiring route. T The connectio on process cannnot be perforrmed in the following situatio
ons:
(In thhe figure belo
ow, the colors have been de eliberately chaanged to make e the wiring elements
clearer).
- If an
a Equipment//Device which h has a connection area is pplaced on mulltiple wiring elements
within
w one wiri ng route.
For
F Equipmen nt/Devices forr which no connection areaa exists (only the connectioon point
exists),
e the pro
rocess cannott be performedd even if the connection pooint is placed on the
wire.
w
The same appliess if a turn lump

p symbol is dra
awn.
- If an
a Equipmentt/Device whic ch has a conn nection area iss placed on the
t junction between
b
straight line and a
arc portions of wiring elemen
nts within one wiring route.
- If itt is placed on an arc within one

o wiring rou
ute.
The hidd
den line proceess
The hidden line arrea (the minim
mum rectanglee for the Equippment/Device) is placed on a wire.
The conditions in which the hid cess can be pperformed are the same as for the
dden line proc
hidden line processs method for Equipment unnder the Hiddeen Line commmand.
The hidden line symbol settin ngs are proceessed with thhe setting conntent for hidden line
symbols in the Ad dvanced Settin
ngs dialog box
x of the Hiddenn Line commaand.
Refeer to the Hidde
en Line commmand
When th
here is no proccessing
Equipment/Device es are laid out on the wire with
w no processsing.
電気-10
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Descriptiion of the Command

C dialog box
x
1. Display the shapes of Equ

uipment/Devic
ces to draw.
2.
2 Select Equip
pment/Device attributes.
3.
3 Equipment/D
Device selection
Select th
he parts to layy out out from the Part Selec
ction dialog boox.
The three types of sselected parts s are standarrd symbols (bblue), variable e symbols (re
ed) and
actual-s
size symbols (g gray).
Refer to
o “Terminologyy” under Preca autions for an explanation oof the types of symbol.
4.
4 Layout partts specification
n
Specify laid out Equip
pment/Devices s , and place the
t same part as the specifiied symbol.
This is only
o applicable
e to Equipmennt/Devices laid out using thhis command.
If an acctual-size sym
mbol is specifiied, the dimensions for thee specified Eq
quipment/Devvice are
acquiredd, in the same
e way as for ju
umps.
5.
5 Layout partts search
Search in the drawing
g for placed Eqquipment/Dev
vices , and dispplay them in a list.
Parts ca
an be placed b
by selecting th
hem from the displayed
d list.
Layout Parts
P Search d
dialog box
電気-11
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
6.
6 Placement history Display
y a list of previiously placed Equipment/De evices .
Parts can
c be placed d by selecting them from the e displayed list
st.
Up to 5.0 symbol typ pes can be lis
sted in the history.
7. Dimension se
etting If the
e selected Eq
quipment/Device is a variab
ble symbol, thhe Dimension Setup dialog
g box is
display yed.
It can be used to sppecify dimensio
ons and make
e placements.
The in nput dimension
ns can be saved.
Dimension Setup dia alog box
[1.] Select th
he attributes o
of Equipment/D
Devices to lay
y out.
[2.] Display diagrams sho owing dimensio

on positions.
Red circ
cles are layoutt points
(the bas
se point to use
e when using CG
C display).
[3.] Choose from system d dimensions, user

u dimensionns 1., user dim
mensions 2.
Dimensions set in [4 4.] or [5.] can be saved to user dimensioons 1. or 2. In I that case, choose
whetherr to save to usser dimensions t [Save] button.
s 1. or user dimensions 2., tthen click on the
h dimension.
[5.] Set each
[6.] Specify x-axis inversioon and y-axis inversion.

The follo
owing figure iss an exampless of a panel inverted in eachh way.
電気-12
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
8.
8 Shape orien
ntation Clicck to set the sh
hapes orientattion of Equipmment/Devices to draw.
W
Whichever dis
splay axis is ussed for drawin
ng, draw with the
t shape for tthe set face.
(
(The figure be
elow shows th he relationship between the display axiss and the top p shape when
n top is
s
selected).
9 Text position specification

9. n
Check to chhange the symmbol text position immediate
ely after drawinng independently.
ceptacle units and combined receptacles are excluded .
Switch + rec
10.Wall-mountted slide
The symbol, with the layo out point in the
e center of the
e shape, is draawn in contactt with the wall..
The layout point
p for a sym mbol placed on n a wall-mounted slide is chhanged.
To disable layout point cchanges, use the Property Annotation ccommand to change c “layou
ut point
change” to “None”.
“
Layout points cannot be cchanged for sy ymbols used in linked layouut.
(Figure on lo
ower left) If thee check box iss unchecked
(Figure on lo
ower right) If tthe check box is checked
11.Auto-wiring
Check the check
c box to d
draw wires afte
er layout using
g multiple - rattio and multiple - distance.
12.Horizontallyy enlarge/shrin
nk dialog box.
13.Enlarge/shrrink the dialog box in the lon

ngitudinal direcction when us
sing multiple - ratio and multtiple - distance
e.
This can’t be
b clicked whe en using indeppendent operation.
14.
1 Top base p
point
Check one of the followin
ng.
Layout point Check to laay out using th
he layout pointt registered in the master as
s the standard
d.
電気-13
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
9. base points Check to lay out using g nine base points

p from thhe minimum rectangle
r on the top
shape registered in the m
master as the standard.
s
15.
1 Cross secttion base poin
nt
If “9. based points” is che
ecked in 1.4. above,
a check any
a one of thee nine points.
16.Check
1 to m
mark which one
e is the standaard for the crooss section shaape.
Set 9.x3.= 2.7.
2 base poin nts in combina
ation with 1.5. above.9. basee points, with the top base point at
eft Check to la y out using nine base points from the minnimum rectang
the lower le gle on the top shape,
with the exc
ception of sym mbol text registered in the master.
m
The figure below
b es the examplle of the top base point at thhe lower left and
illustrate a the cross section
base point on
o top.
(The red circcles are base points and the blue circle iss the layout sttandard)
17.Set
1 the floo
or height attrib
bute to collate the lengths off wires connec
cted to Equipm
ment/Devices .
(The Mate erial Count coommand canno ot be used witth the LT prod
duct).
18.
1 Set the ceiling height atttribute to colla nected to Equipment/Devicees .
ate the lengthss of wires conn
erial Count co
(The Mate ommand canno ot be used witth the LT prodduct).
19.Set
1 the mounting location
n attribute to collate
c the leng
gths of wires connected
c to Equipment/Deevices .
(The Mateerial Count co
ommand canno ot be used witth the LT prodduct).
20.Check
2 to draw Equipmen nt dimensions when the secction for 3.
osition in the Command
layout po C toolbar is “wall m
mounted”.
21.Check
2 to sp
pecify the poin
nt or element to e dimension standard
t serve as the s first and
a then draw
w,
when draawing Equipme ent dimensions.
22.Check
2 to sp
pecify the poin
nt or element to
t serve as the
e dimension standard
s after drawing,
when draawing Equipme ent dimensions.
電気-14
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Descriptiion of the Part

P Selecttion dialog box [Selec
ct mode]
Partt Selection dia

alog box [Select mode] (whe
en the selectio
on method is shape
s selectioon)
Parrt Selection dia

alog box [Sele
ect mode] (wh en the selectio
on method is list selection)
1.Parts Selection menu

Select the Parts
P Hierarch
hy menu that was
w edited in [Edit
[ mode].
電気-15
電気／Equipment/Device
2. Saving the selection menu

Use in [Edit mode]. Save the edited Parts Hierarchy menu.
3. Deleting the selection menu

Use in [Edit mode]. Save the saved Parts Hierarchy menu.
4. Switching process mode

Change between [Select mode] and [Edit mode].
5. Selection method
- All Equipment: The hierarchy part changes into the Hierarchy menu for all Equipment.
All symbols are displayed.
- Public facility type search: The hierarchy part changes to search.
2.0. The search covers symbols in the list refined for public facilities.
The input text string is used to search in Name 2. and display hits.
- Name search: The hierarchy part changes to search.
The search covers all symbols.
The input text string is used to search in Name 1. and Name 2. and display hits.
6. Selection method
- Shape selection: Set this in order to select parts by their shape criteria.
- List selection: Set this in order to select parts by their attribute criteria.
7. Input layer change

Check to switch between the input layer and the layer displayed on the right side when the OK
button is clicked.
The layer that is displayed on the right differs according to the setting for [Edit mode].
8. Layer setting
Click to temporarily switch to the layer displayed on the left side.
9. System
- Depress to show symbols provided as system parts.
- Raise to show symbols provided as system parts.
1.0. User
- Depress to show symbols added to the master by the Creating Parts command.
- Raise to hide symbols added to the master by the Creating Parts command.
1.1. Actual size

- Depress (in pink) to show actual-size symbols (in gray).
- Raise (in pale blue) to hide actual-size symbols (in gray).
1.2. Standard
- Depress (in pink) to show standard symbols (in blue).
- Raise (in pale blue) to hide standard symbols (in blue).
1.3. Variable
- Depress (in pink) to show variable symbols (in red).
- Raise (in pale blue) to hide variable symbols (in red).
1.4. Plane view

- Depress to show symbols for which a plan shape is registered in the master.
It is not possible to create a symbol without a registered plan shape, so this cannot be changed.
1.5. Front
- Depress (in pink) to show only symbols for which a front shape is registered in the master.
- Raise (in pale blue) to also show symbols for which no front shape is registered in the master.
1.6. Right side

- Depress (in pink) to show only symbols for which a left side shape is registered in the master.
- Raise (in pale blue) to also show symbols for which no left shape is registered in the master.
1.7. Left side

- Depress (in pink) to show only symbols for which a left side shape is registered in the master.
- Raise (in pale blue) to also show symbols for which no left shape is registered in the master.
1.8. Back
電気-16
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
- Depress (in pink) to shoow only symbo

ols for which a back shape iis registered in
n the master.
- Raise (in pale
p blue) to a
also show sym
mbols for which
h no back shaape is registereed in the mastter.
1.9. CG
ols for which CG
C is registereed.
- Raise (in pale
p blue) to a
also show sym
mbols for which
h no CG is reggistered.
2.0.
2 Public (syystem symbolss only)
ols which are registered
r as ppublic symbols.
- Raise (in pale
p blue) to a
also show sym
mbols for which
h are not regisstered as public symbols.
2.1.
2 JECA (syystem symbolss only)
ols which are registered
r as JJECA symbols.
- Raise (in pale
p blue) to a
also show sym
mbols for which
h are not regisstered as JEC
CA symbols.
Descriptiion of the Edit

E dialog box of the
e Parts Sele
ection men
nu [Edit mo
ode]
Th
he Edit dialog box of the Parts Selection m
menu [Edit mo
ode] (when the
e selection meethod is shape
e selection)
電気-17
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Th
he Edit dialog box of the Parts Selection m
menu [Edit mo
ode] (when the
e selection meethod is list se
election)
1.Parts Selection menu

Select the Parts
P Hierarch
hy menu that was
w edited in [Edit
[ mode].
2.
2 Saving the sselection menu
u
Use in [Editt mode]. Save
e the edited Pa
arts Hierarchy menu.
3.
3 Deleting the selection men
nu
Use in [Editt mode]. Save
e the saved Pa
arts Hierarchy menu.
4.
4 Switching prrocess mode
Change bettween [Select mode] and [E
Edit mode].
5.
5 Selection me
ethod
- Shape selection: Set thiis in order to select
s parts by
y their shape ccriteria.
- List selecttion: Set this in
n order to sele
ect parts by their attribute crriteria.
6.
6 Top hierarch
hical folder
Display the menu name sselected in thee Parts Selection menu.
Display the right-click con
ntext menu.
The top hierarchical folde

er cannot be deleted,
d createed, or renamedd.
Symbols caannot belong to the top hieraarchical folderr.
電気-18
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
- Paste
If an intermediate hiera
archical folder or a bottom hierarchical foldder was copie
ed, it can be pa
asted.
- Create subfolder
Create a folder
f ntermediate hierarchical fold
in the in der or bottom hhierarchical fo
older below.
- Auto-arran
nge
Collate sy
ymbols with th
he same shape
e in each botto
om hierarchicaal folder below
w by attribute lists.
l
b-folder layer
- Reset sub
Make the layer setting sstatus of all hierarchical fold
ders below maatch the status
s of the curren
nt folder.
- Save the Parts

P Selectio
on menu
This is the
e same as 2. ssaving a selec
ction menu.
- Delete thee Parts Selectiion menu

This is the
e same as 3. DDeleting a sele
ection menu.
7. Intermediatte hierarchical folders

- Intermediiate hierarchiccal folders are
a those fold
ders that are under the top folder and
d have
hierarchic
cal folder(s) beelow them.
Display th
he right-click ccontext menu.
Left click to rename the h

hierarchical follder. Left click
k and drag to m
move the folde
er.
- Copy
Copy a hierarchical fold
der. Duplicate the hierarchy that was copiied, by pasting g it.
- Paste
If an intermediate hiera
archical folder or a bottom hierarchical foldder was copie
ed, it can be pa
asted.
Duplicate the hierarchyy that was copied.
- Delete
e hierarchical folder.
Delete the
- Create
Create a hierarchical
h fo
older in paralle
el.
- Create subfolder
Create a hierarchical
h fo
older under the
e current posittion.
- Rename
Change th
he name of a hierarchical fo
older.
- Auto-arran
nge
Collate sy
ymbols with th
he same shape
e in each botto
om hierarchicaal folder below
w by attribute lists.
l
- Reset sub
b-folder layer
Make the layer setting sstatus of all hiierarchical fold
ders below maatch the status
s of the curren
nt folder.
- Save the Parts

P Selectio
on menu
This is the
e same as 2. ssaving a selec
ction menu.
- Delete thee Parts Selectiion menu

This is the
e same as 3. DDeleting a sele
ection menu.
電気-19
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
8.
8 Bottom hierrarchical folde
er
- A bottom hierarchical
h fo
older is one tha
at has symbols below it.
All others are the samee as intermediaate hierarchica
al folders.
9.
9 Shape list
The hierarcchical folder ca
ategory is disp
played in the upper
u left of th e symbols.
Right-click on
o a symbol to o display the context
c menu.
Ctrl + left click to make m

multiple selections.
Shift + left click
c to make m
multiple selecttions in a rang
ge.
Left click annd drag to movve the symbolls.
If symbols are moved beyond the category of hierarchicalh foolder, the folder changes to the
hierarchicall folder the sym
mbols belong to.
When drag gging is releassed on the trree, the symb bols are moveed into the thhe hierarchica
al folder
where they were dropped d.
10. Attribute list
Right-click on
o a symbol to
o display the context
c menu.
Operation is
s the same ass for the shape
e list
11. Set the layyer.
Set the laye
er to use when
n a symbol under each hiera archical folderr is selected.
Check to enable this settting. If the bo ed, follow the settings for th
ox is unchecke he hierarchica
al folder
the symbol belongs to.
12. Reset the sub-folder layyer

Make the la atus of all hierrarchical folders below matcch the status of
ayer setting sta o the current folder.
f
13. Change in
nput layer
1.1. If the box is checked
d, the layer can
n be set.
- If the box is checked
When a symbol is seelected in the Part Selection
n dialog box, tthe layer set in
n 1.4. Layer se
etting is
displayed.
- If the box is unchecked
When a symbol is seelected in the Part Selection
n dialog box, tthe layer set in
n 1.4. Layer se
etting is
not displaye ed.
14. Layer setting

s set for the hi erarchical fold
The layer is der. Click to ch o the left side.
hange the layeer displayed on
n displayed in
[o] The icon the hierarchiccal folder indicates the settinng status of th
he layer.
- There is no check in “1.1. Set the
e layer”
- There is a check in “1.1. Set the layer”,
l and theere is a check in “1.3. Change input layer”
- There is a check in “1.1. Set the layer”,
l but no check in “1.3. Change inputt layer”
15. Copy
This operation is the sam
me as stated fo
or the copying of hierarchicaal folders, shape lists, and attribute
a
lists in 6.~1.0. above.
電気-20
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
16. Paste
me as stated fo
or the pasting of hierarchicaal folders, shape lists, and attribute
a
lists in 6.~1.0. above.
17. Delete
This operation is the sa ed for the deletion of hieraarchical folde
ame as state ers, shape lists, and
attribute listts in 6.~1.0. ab
bove.
18. Array
This operattion is the sam me as stated for the auto-a
aligning of hieerarchical folders, shape lissts, and
attribute listts in 6.~1.0. ab
bove.
19. Get part h

have not prope
erty from mastter
For a symb bol that has b
been added to o the master, but which is not displayed d in the currently set
Parts Hierarchy menu, cllick on it to dis
splay it as a hierarchically
h uundefined part. The followin
ng is an
example of a hierarchicallly undefined part.
p
m part is adde
- If a system ed when multip ple Parts Seleection menus hhave been cre eated and are in use,
the part beccomes a hieraarchically unde
efined part in menus
m other thhan for system
m settings.
- A symbol registered to any one Parts

s Selection menu when muultiple Parts Selection menu
us have
been create
ed and are in u
use, the symb
bol is a hierarc
chically undefinned part.
- If a symbol imported byy the utility is

s used in other than the apppropriate Partts Selection menu,
m it
becomes a hierarchicallyy undefined pa art.
20.
2 Folder Create
This operation is the sam or the creation of hierarchicaal folders in 6..~8. above.
me as stated fo
2 Folder Create sub-fold
21. der
This operattion is the sam
me as stated for the creatio
on of sub-foldders in hierarc chical folders in
i 6.~8.
above.
21.
2 Folder Ed
dit name
me as stated fo
or the renaminng of hierarchiccal folders in 6.~8.
6 above.
Context m
menu explanation
1. Context The displayed content

c of the context menu
u is explained..
[1.] Change rotation angle e

The pitcch set by chan
nging the rotation angle is en
nabled if direcction specification is checkeed.
If the an
ngle is set byy the base angle setting, rootate in units oof the set pitc
ch relative to the set
angle.
Example n units of 4.5.°° from the standard line.

e) When the rrotation angle is 4.5.°, turn in
電気-21
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Also
o, when drawiing with a rota
ation angle of 4.5.°, 4.5.° ccorrection is applied to the draw in
the range 2.2.5.° < mouse position <=6.7.5.°.
* Fo
or the sake o of the explana ation, the aboove diagram iis drawn with h the location of the
re
eceptacle disp placed to be ono the circle, when
w in fact it w
would rotate about
a the layout point.
[2.] Setting the
t base angle e
This cann only be set iff the layout location is set to
o “free”.
- Standaard line speciffication
Speccify the standaard line, then determine the e angle to lay oout.
- Angle input
Speccify the angle to lay out.
- Initializ
zing the base angle
Initia
alize the angle
e that was determined by standard
s line sspecification, and the layou
ut angle
that was specifiedd by angle inpu
ut.
Precautio
ons
1. Standard syymbols
The sizes off symbol shap
pes
The draaw size when the input sca ale factor is 1.00 varies acccording to the
e scale at wh
hich the
drawing is drawn.
Refer to
o the table bellow for drawin
ng scales and scale factors (referred to below
b as JECAA scale
factors).
Symbols are at sizes (standard dimensio

e registered a ons) intendedd for release ofo drawing at 1./1.00
scale.
Sizes (actuaal dimensionss) of symbol shapes
s corresp
ponding to drarawing scales are calculated d using
the following
g formula.
Standarrd dimension x draw scale fa actor x 0.01./d
drawing scale
However, if the input scal e factor was input, the abovve formula is m
multiplied by the input scale
e factor.
The symbol shapes and the sizes of those symbol shape when the display is s refined by pressing
p
the JECA button
b in the Part Selection dialog box follow the “E
Electrical Equiipment CAD Symbol
S
電気-22
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Dimension Standard” (JE ECA CAD Sym mbol Dimensiion Standard, 2.001. editio
on), published by the
Japan Electtrical Construcction Associatiion, Inc.
Sizes on release of drawi ng are largely

y the same as JECA definitioons, but in some cases calcculation
e in the dimen
errors arise nsions in drawing data, so o in some caases the value es may not be
b tidily
rounded.
- Symbols foor luminaires

Regardless of draw sscale factors, the
t dimension in the longituudinal direction n alone is maintained
as a fixe
ed value.
The longgitudinal direcction is always
s drawn with thhe standard diimensions.
Therefore, when the ssymbol shape e size for a lum
minaire is calcuulated, the aspect ratio diffe
ers with
the draww scale factor..
However, iff, as a result of calculating

g the dimensions with the above formula, the shape
e would
clearly be wrong,
w the sym
mbol is automa atically drawn with
w the standdard dimension.
- When the symbol shape e size for a no

on-luminaire sy
ymbol is calcuulated, the asp
pect ratio is co
onstant,
regardles
ss of the draw scale factor.
電気-23
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
2.
2 Variable syymbols
[1.] The symbbols which can n be drawn as s variable symbols are as foollows:
- Large Dev
vices
- Luminaires (fluorescentt lights, emerrgency lights, guide lights, stair and ha
allway lights), except
when wall mounted
In lumin
naires for sin gle lamps (Figure 1.), if a dimension ffor B is input that is large er than
dimension C, it is not possible to drraw the lumina
aire as in Figuure 2.
A warnin
ng message iss displayed.
In lumin
naires for two or more lamp ps (Figure 3.), if a dimensioon for C is inp
put that is larg
ger than
dimension B, it is draw
wn as in Figurre 4.
Note) If the shape coomes out as shown in Figurre 4., and the wire is conne ected to the ouutline of
th
he symbol, it is connected d to the rectaangle. Refer tto the Wire command
c for outline
connection of ssymbols.
[2.] Shape teext is drawn a
at the size set up in the Dimension Setup dialog box.
3.
3 Layout info
ormation Placed sym mbols have the e following infformation as layout informaation, which can
c be used with
w the
Change Sca ale Factor and d Angle comm mand and the Replace
R Equippment/Device command.
- Drawing sc cale when laid d out
- Draw scale factor (the e draw scale factor set un nder Details ((JECA scale factor) Howevver, for
variable symbols
s and aactual-size symmbols, the value is fixed at 11.000)
- Input scalee factor (the sccale factor spe
ecified on the Command tooolbar)
- Whether or not the layou ut point has be
een changed
4.
4 Sub-dialog box Displayed below the Pa art Selection dialog
d box, and the Commaand dialog box Search buttton and
on. The sub-d
History butto dialog box opeens when a specific symbol is selected.
[1.] Concenttrated / combi ned switch
電気-24
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
1. Preview display
d Dissplay the curre
ently set switc
ch combinationn in the previe
ew.
2. Clear Em
mpty the 5. Co
ombination listt.
3. Parts list Usse drag and drrop to set the combination

c pposition in the 5.
C ombination lis
st.
4. Trash bas
sket Usse drag and drrop to the trash
h basket to deelete from the 5.
C ombination lis
st.
5. Combinattion list Se
et combination
n positions.
[2.] Weak cu
urrent symbol
arked with “x”” show the ch

Areas ma haracter countt within whichh the weak cu
urrent symbol can be
input.
[3.] Full 2.-line remote con

ntrol switch, fo
or n pcs.
ndicated by “n”” reflects the text string inpu

The area in ut as a numbeer of pieces.
The inputt range is 1.~9
9.9.
電気-25
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
[4.] One-sided or two-side

ed guide light
Arrow settings: Make arrow

w settings whe
en drawing the
e symbol (arroow) that shows
s the direction
n on the
drawing.
Illustration with angle: Whe

en laying out guide
g lights with angles, ann illustration is used to show
w where
th
he arrow attaches.
Draw the arro

ow in the cente
er of the shap
pe:
C heck to consoolidate arrows into one and ddraw it in the center of the shape.
s
e: Set the sha

Arrow shape ape of the arroow.
Arrow dimen
nsion settings : Set the dime
ensions of the arrow.
5.
5 Terminology
The terms ex
xplained below
w are stated as
s common term
ms for electriccal system wiring.
[1.] Standard symbols (dissplayed in blue in the Part Selection

S dialoog box)
Symbols s for which the draw scale factor (standard
( mension x draw scale fa
dim actor x
0.01./drawing scale) iis applied.
* The sc
cale factor alsoo applies to sy
ymbol remark text.
[2.] Variable
e symbols (dis played in red in the Part Se
election dialog box)
Symbols s which are la
aid out with the
e dimensions as
a set in the D
Dimension Settup dialog boxx.
size symbols (d
[3.] Actual-s displayed in gray
g in the Parrt Selection diaalog box)
電気-26
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Symbolss which are laaid out with the

e dimensions as
a registered.
Symbolss which were registered witth the check box
b uncheckedd for “Register as a part to receive
draw sccale factor proocessing for each drawing g scale” whenn making new
w registrationss in the
Creating
g Parts comm and.
* The sc
cale factor doees not apply to
o symbol remaark text.
[4.] Draw sc
cale factor (or standard scale factor)
The sca
ale factor for e ach drawing scale
s in the Standard Scale Factor Setup dialog box
[5.] Input scale factor

The scaale factor inputt on the Comm
mand toolbar, using the Equuipment/Devic
ce command
cale factor
[6.] JECA sc
The dra
aw scale facctor values fo or each draw
wing scale baased on the JECA CAD symbol
dimension standards (2.001. edition)
[7.] Standard dimensions

Register at sizes inten
nded for relea
ase of drawing at 1./1.00 scaale
6.
6 Hatching
et as a part sttyle sets the hatching
Hatching se h that expresses
e thee generator cirrcuits of luminaires in
symbols pro
ovided by the ssystem.
The symboll registered ass symbols be ecome bounda aries specifiedd as hatching boundaries with
w the
assignment of special eleements.
Angles of lin atterns are se
nes in hatch pa et for variable symbols
s and aactual-size symbols.
7.
7 Jump Lay out the same
s parts, aas with the [Sppecify] button in the commannd dialog box.
Attributes ac
cquired by jummping
- Layer
- Draw sccale factor, ele
evation
- Items that can be set with part stylees (other than parts registereed as symbols
s)
However, hatch pa attern pitch ca
annot be acquired.
- Dimensions, in the ca ase of variable symbols
8. Style settin
ngs Dialog boxx
an be set by sttyle settings vary
Items that ca v ment/Devices .
with the sttatus of the seelected Equipm
Example) If an Equipmennt/Device is se elected for which there is sym

mbol text
Settings
s are possible in all text settting areas.
電気-27
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
Operation example
1. Operation e
example of layying out one Equipment/Dev
E vice in a free position
p (troug
gh-type FL4.0W
Wx1.)
Command
C too
olbar
(1) “Heig
ght setting”
[1] Set elevation. (Floor and ceilingg heights are
e for collatio
on
purposees)
Elevation 2.,5.00
eight 3.,000)
(Floor he
(Ceiling height 2.,5.00
0)
(2) “Layo
out point speccification”
[2] Specify the la
ayout point.
Specify the la
ayout point [1..] for the Equip
pment/Device
e.
電気-28
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
2.
2 Operation eexample of sp
pecifying the range
r for multtiple Equipme
ent/Devices and performingg auto-wiring after laying th
hem out
(trough-type FL2.0Wx2.)
Command
C too
olbar
(1) “Heig
ght setting”
[1] Set elevation. (Floor and ceilingg heights are
e for collatio
on
purposees)
Elevation 2.,5.00
(Floor he
eight 3.,000)
(Ceiling height 2.,5.00
0)
(2) “Spe
ecify diagonall point 1.” -> > “Specify dia
agonal
pointt 2.”
“Spe
ecify No. of units” -> “Simula
ation”
[1] Set the Command toolbar..
n in the figure above.
Set as shown
[2] onal point 1.

Specify diago
Specify diagonal point 1. [1.] for the ro
oom where th
he
Equipment/DDevices are too be laid out.
[3] onal point 2.

Specify diago
Specify diagonal point 2. [2.] for the ro
oom where th
he
Equipment/DDevices are too be laid out.
[4] Run the simu ulation.

[3.] Number of units: Set three lateral, thre
ee
longitudinal.
[4.] Use the mouse onn the screen
n to end th he
simulation.
(3) “Wirring draaw direc

ction se
election
(horrizontal/vertica
al)”
[5] Check direction to draw w
wire.
e horizontal dirrection is disp

Wiring in the played, so
use the Y key
k or the leftft mouse butto on to specify if
correct.
Use the N key
k or the righht mouse butto on to switch to
o
displaying ve
ertical wiring.
電気-29
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
(4) “Wiriing pattern selection”

[6] Specify the wiring
w pattern.
When the mo ouse is movedd between the e two pieces of o
Equipment in n the upper lefft that are a different color,
different wirring patterns aare displayed depending on o
the mouse position, so iindicate when n the intende ed
splayed [5.].
pattern is dis
(5) Speccification of Eq
quipment for trransfer wiring
[7] Specify Equiipment for trannsfer wiring.
Specify the Equipment too start transffer wiring from
m
[6.].
(6) “Wiriing pattern selection”

[8] Specify transsfer wiring pattttern.
When the mo ouse is movedd between the e two pieces of o
Equipment in n the upper lefft that are a different color,
different wirring patterns aare displayed depending on o
the mouse position, so iindicate when n the intende ed
pattern is dis
splayed [7.].
電気-30
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
3.
3 Operation eexample of sp
pecifying the range for multiiple Equipmen
nt/Devices alo
ong an arc waall, and perforrming arc wirin
ng after
laying them out (trough--type FL2.0Wx2.)
(1) “Settting the standa

ard line speciffication”
[1] Specify the standard line.
From th
he context mennu, select “Se et base angle” -
“Specify
y standard linee”, then specify the arc waall
elementt [1.] to use ass the standard
d.
(2) “Spe
ecify diagona al point 1.” -> “Speciffy
diago
onal point 2.”
“Spe
ecify Number of o units” -> “Simulation”
[2] Set the
t Command d toolbar.
Set as
a shown in th
he figure abovve.
[3] cify diagonal point

Spec p 1.
cify diagonal point 1. [22.] of the area where th
Spec he
Equiipment/Devicees are to be laaid out.
[4]
Spec
cify diagonal point
p 2.
Spec
cify diagonal point 2. [33.] of the area where th
he
[5] Equiipment/Devicees are to be laaid out.
Run the simulation

n.
[4.] Number of unnits: Set five lateral and one longitudina
al
unitss.
[5.] Use
U the mouse on the screeen to end the simulation.
s
(3) “Wirring draw patte

ern selection”
[6] Che
eck direction to
o draw wire.
Usee the N key to ween straight wires and arc

t switch betw
es, and use the Y key too confirm when arc wire is
wire
disp
played.
電気-31
電気／Eq
quipment/D
Device
4.
4 Operation e
example of dra
awing indepen
ndent - wall-m
mounted Equipment/Devices and Equipmeent dimensions simultaneou
usly
(1) “Spe
ecify the standard line (wall)”
[1] Addd a check mark k for Equipmeent dimensionss.
Whe en the box is checked,
c “Speecify dimensio
on base before e/
after” is displayed
d.
To specify the dimension
d baase point beffore laying ou ut
Equuipment/Device es , check “Specify dim mension basse
befo
ore”.
To specify the dimension baase point affter laying ou ut
Equuipment/Device es , check “Sppecify dimensiion base after””.
[2] Spe
ecify the standard line (wall))
[3] Spe
ecify the start point
p of the dim
mension leade
er.
(2) Inputt the offset dimension from

m the start poi nt
of the dimension leeader
[4] ut the offset dimension “33.00”, then press
Inpu p Enter to
t
conffirm.
[5] Click on “Complette” in the conttext menu.
[6] ecify the end point

Spe p of the dim
mension leade
er.
(3) ension draw position

Dime p specifiication
[7] Spe
ecify the dimen
nsion draw possition.
電気-32
電気／
／Correct switch
s
Corrrect sw
witch
Function
n Overview
Replace
R combined and conccentrated switc
ches that have
e already been placed.
How to L
Launch the Command
d
1. Pull-down mmenu
Click [Electric (Q))] -> [Equipment (K)] -> [Corrrect switch (S
S)].
2.
2 Icon menu
Click on .
1. Command S
Selection
Commands
s related to sw
witch correctio
on can be selected.
2.
2 Inheritance iitem
[1.] Layer
If the box is checked, th
he Equipment/Device layer from before thhe replacemen nt is inherited..
If the box is uncheckedd, the replacem
ment is in the layer set in thee Layers toolb
bar.
[2.] Color
he Equipment/Device draw color from beffore the replac
If the box is checked, th cement is inhe
erited.
ment is in the draw
d color sett in Style settin
ngs.
pe
[3.] Line typ
If the box x is checked , the Equipm
ment/Device draw line typee from before the replacem ment is
inherited.
If the box is unchecked
d, the replacem
ment is in the draw
d line typee set in Style settings.
[4.] Line wid

dth
If the boxx is checked,, the Equipmeent/Device drraw line widthh from before e the replacem
ment is
inherited.
If the box is unchecked
d, the replacem
ment is in the draw
d line widthh set in Style settings.
[5.] Text color

he Equipment/Device text color from befoore the replace ement is inherrited.
ment is in the draw
d text set iin Style setting
gs.
In some cases,
c depen ding on whether or not the ere is text beffore or after thet replaceme ent, the
replaceme ent may be m made in the text
t color set in Style settiings, regardle ess of the boxx being
checked.
Refer to Precautions
P fo
or details.
[6.] Font
he Equipment/Device font frrom before thee replacementt is inherited.
ment is in the font
f set in Stylle settings.
[7.] Symbol text

If the box
x is checked, the Equipmen nt/Device text height, aspeect ratio and positioning
p rela
ative to
spacing symbol text are
e inherited from before the replacement.
r
If the box
x is uncheckeed, the replaceement uses the text heightt, aspect ratioo and spacing g set in
Style settiings.
電気-33
電気／
／Correct switch
s
[8.] Attribute
es
If the bo ox is checke ed, the Equip pment/Device attributes (pproperty item ms) from befo ore the
replaceme ent are inheritted.
Refer to Precautions2.
P e items etc. th
about attribute hat can be inheerited.
If the checck box is unchhecked, attribuutes are not innherited.
In that casse, the followi ng Height Setttings dialog box
b is displayeed, so set heig
ght information
n. Refer
to the Equ uipment/Devicce command abouta the Heigght Settings diialog box.
The Heigh ht Settings dia

alog box illustrated above iss displayed if the check box x is checked and
a the
following conditions aree satisfied:
However, floor and ce eiling height cannot
c be seet because thhey are inheriited from befo ore the
replaceme ent.
The valuees displayed inn the height se
etting areas duuring processiing are as follo
ows:
If the boxx is checked , the attributees are those of the symbbol that was specified befo ore the
replaceme ent.
If the box is uncheckedd, the ceiling height
h or height are frrom the previo
and floo ous history, while
w the
mounting height and m mounting locattion are the attributes of th e symbol thatt were selecte ed after
the replac
cement.
[9.] Scale fa
actor
If the box is checked, thhe Equipment/Devices cale factor from beefore the replaacement is inhherited.
If the box is unchecked d, the replacem
ment uses the input scale faactor.
If the sym
mbol before orr after the repplacement is a variable sym mbol or an acttual-size symbbol, the
scale factor is inherited
d unconditionally, regardless
s of whether oor not the chec
ck box is checkked.
Refer to Precautions7.
P about the sha
ape calculation
n method.
3.
3 Scale factorr specification
Specify the scale factor fo
or the Equipm
ment/Devices to lay out.
4.
4 Detail Settin
ngs button
Set details for
f the Equipmment/Devices after replacemment.
Refer to the
e Equipment/DDevice commaand
This button is enabled wh
hen a standarrd symbol is selected for thee replaced Equipment/Devicce after
replacemen nt.
電気-34
電気／
／Correct switch
s

C dialog box
x
1. Preview disp
play
nation in the preview.
Display the currently set sswitch combin
2.
2 Clear
Empty the 5.
5 Combinatio n list.
3.
3 Parts list
Use drag an
nd drop to sett the combinattion position in
n the 5. Combiination list.
4.
4 Trash baske
et
Use drag an
nd drop to the
e trash basket to delete from
m the 5. Combbination list.
5.
5 Combination
n list
Set combination positionss.
Precautio
ons
1. Equipment/D
Devices electio
on
The elemen nts subject to
o this process are combined switches annd concentratted switches laid
l out
using the Equipment/Devvice command d.
2.
2 Attribute inheritance
heritance onlyy applies wherre the Equipm
Attribute inh ment/Device haas the same properties
p befoore and
after the rep
placement.
However, floor
f height a nd ceiling he eight always inherit attributtes from befo ore the replaccement,
regardless ofo properties.
Mounting height is inheritted if the properties and mo ounting locatioon are each the
e same as beffore.
Attribute inh
heritance appliies to the item
ms in the follow
wing table.
Attribute inh
heritance itemss include som
me attributes th
hat are alreadyy input by the system or havve fixed
(non-change eable) values.. Some attribuutes can have their inputs chhanged by com mmands.
Refer to the commands a about attribute input.
電気-35
電気／
／Correct switch
s
Drawing Syymbol: Drawin g Symbol com mmand Moun nting height, m

mounting locattion: Mounting
g Height
command
Switching Circuit:
C Switch
hing Circuit co
ommand Ceiling height, flooor height: Chhange Ceiling Height
command
Panel symbbol, circuit No
o., main line No.,
N power su
upply type, loaad type, volta
age type: Circcuit No.
command
3.
3 Text color in
nheritance
Text color in
nheritance can n be broadly divided
d into tw
wo patterns.
Pattern 1.: When
W each iteem of informattion from before the replaceement is inherited after it.
- Replace ement from a ssymbol with sy ymbol text to a symbol with symbol text (FFigure 1.)
- Replace ement from a ssymbol with sh hape text to a symbol with sshape text (Fig
gure 2.)
Pattern 2.: When
W the styl e set in the style settings within the replaacement commmand is used.
- Replace ement from a ssymbol with sy ymbol text to a symbol with shape text (Figure 3.)
- Replace ement from a ssymbol with sh hape text to a symbol with ssymbol text (Figure 4.)
The above are the proce esses that are performed wh hen the parts before replac
cement had a symbol
mbol text or sh
without sym hape text, but the
t parts afterr replacement have symbol text or shape text.
Example) A sample whe ere the text is drawn in mag genta when thhe Equipmentt/Device comm mand is
used, but th
he text color w
within the Replace Equipmen nt/Device commmand is set to ack.
4.
4 Layout pointt change symb
bol
When a syymbol is proce essed that haas been placeed after the laayout point wa
as changed with
w the
Equipment//Device commmand, the result is as shown below.
For a symbol which did n
not have the la
ayout point cha
anged
For a symbo
ol had the layo
out point chan
nged
5.
5 Terminologyy
Refer to Precautions Te
erminology for the Equipm ment/Device coommand for the terms exxplained
below as co
ommon terms for electrical system
s wiring.
6.
6 Shape calcu
ulation method
d
[1.] When in nheriting the sscale factor
- When re eplaced from a standard sym mbol to a standard symbol
Calculatte the input sccale factor by the
t same calc culation methood as that for symbols
s stated in the
Precautions for the C Change Scale e Factor and Angle commaand. Howeverr, the scale fa actor to
multiply by is not used d in the replac
cement command.
The samme applies to e embedding lay yout informatio
on.
- When re eplaced from a standard sym mbol to a varia able symbol,

from a variable
v symbool to a variable
e symbol
or from a variable sym mbol to a standard symbol
Calculatte by the same e method as forf the Equipm ment/Device coommand.
The sam me applies to eembedding lay yout informatioon.
Howeve er, for a standa
ard symbol aftter replaceme ent, the draw sscale factor infformation is th
he draw
scale faactor set underr [Details], wh
hile for a variable symbol aftfter replaceme ent, the fixed value
v of
1.000 iss written.
If the bo
ox is unchecke ed, the scale factor
f is replac
ced by the onee input in the Command
C too
olbar.
[2.] When thhe scale factoor is not inheritted

Calculate by the same method as fo or the Equipmeent/Device coommand, and multiply by the scale
factor inpu
ut in the Comm mand toolbar.
The same e applies to em
mbedding layo out information
n.
電気-36
電気／
／Correct switch
s
However, for a standarrd symbol afte er replacemen nt, the draw sccale factor infformation is th
he draw
scale facttor set under [Details], while for a variab
ble symbol afte
ter replacement, the fixed value
v of
1.000 is written.
w
* Actual-s
size symbols a are processed in the same wayw as variablle symbols.
Refer to th
he Creating P Parts command d for the registration methodd for actual-sizze symbols.
If the sym
mbol before orr after the rep
placement is a variable sym mbol or an acttual-size symb bol, the
scale facttor is inherite
ed uncondition
nally, regardleess of whetheer or not the scale
s factor iss to be
inherited.
7.
7 CG
CG is disp played if the Equipment/De evice after re
eplacement iss replaced by
y a CG displa ay part
(variable sy
ymbol).
(However, CGC display ca annot be used with the LT product)
Also, CG is s not displaye uipment/Device after replaccement is rep
ed if the Equ placed by a non-CG
n
display partt (standard sym
mbol or actual-size symbol)).
To use CG G display with Equipment/Device parts drawn with Evoolution Ver1.1 1.L01. or earliier, use
the following process.
[1.] To use CG display, itt is necessary

y to set the ceiling height annd floor height as attributes, so use
the Change e Ceiling Heighht command to assign the ceiling
c height aand floor heigh
ht to attributess.
[2.] Use this

s command to
o set height infformation for the same partss and replace them.
Refer to the
e Equipment/D
Device comma and for details about CG.
8.
8 Parts Style S
Settings dialog
g box
[1.] Items th
hat can be se
et by style setttings vary with
h the status oof the selected
d Equipment/D
Devices
(after replac
cement).
Example) Iff an Equipmen nt/Device is se elected for which there is syymbol text
Settings are all text setting areas.
e possible in a
[2.] The con ntent of the Pa

art Style Settin
ngs dialog box x that is displaayed when the Command to oolbar is
used for sw witch correction
n is as follows
s:
Shape display area (pictu ure area)
Parts are assigned a prio ority ranking on
o the system m side, and thee parts with high priority ran
nks are
displayed frrom among th e parts before e replacement that are subjeect to process sing.
Also, the co ombination of sshapes to disp play is fixed as 1.P1.5.A x2 ., 3.W1.5.A x2
2., 4.W1.5.A x2.
x
Priority rank
1. Combined switcch
2. Wide
W combined d switch
3. Concentrated sswitch
4. Wide
W concentraated switch
Text setting gs area
電気-37
電気／
／Correct switch
s
If the parts before replaccement that arre subject to processing incllude even onee combined sw witch or
wide combined switch, th hey are put in contact. (Howwever, that is iff the Comman
nd toolbar inhe
eritance
item is Off)
9.
9 Interlock bettween parts an
nd their dimen notation
nsions and ann
When Equip pment/Device ed automatically.
es are moved,, their linked dimensions aree also change
Conversely, when a dim mension is cha nked Equipmeent/Device is automatically moved
anged, the lin
and change ed.
Refer to Inte
erlock betwee n parts and th
heir dimensions and annotattion
Operation example
1. Operation example of replacing

r com
mbined switc
ched (1.P1.5.A
Ax6.) with combined switcches (1.P1.5.A x2., 3.W1.5
5.A x2.,
4.W1.5.A x
x2.)
Command
C to
oolbar
(1) uipment/Deviices
“Equ electtion” ->
“Ran
nge specifica
ation” ->
“Equ
uipment/Deviices pecificattion”
[1] Specifyy the range to o perform repplacement.
Specify diagonally-op pposite points [1.] and [2.] to indicate th
he
range inn which to perfform replacem
ment.
Click the
e [Finish] butto
on [3.].
The Equ uipment/Devic ces to be replaaced are indic
cated in blue.
[2]
Specify
y the symbol
Specify the Equipmen
nt/Devices [4..] to replace.
(2) “Rep
placement”
[3] Seet the num mbers and ttypes of sw witches afte
er
re
eplacement.
Seet 1.P1.5.A x2
2., 3.W1.5.A x22., and 4.W1.5
5.A x2.
(3) “Corrrect switch”

[4] Replace
e the combined
d switch, thenn return to scre
een (1.).
電気-38
電気
気／Replaceement
Rep
placem
ment
Function
n Overview
Replace
R Equip
pment/Devicess that have be
een laid out.
How to L
Launch the Command
d
1. Pull-down mmenu
Click [Electric (Q))] -> [Equipment (K)] -> [Rep
placement (C))].
2.
2 Icon menu
Clicck on .
1. Command S
Selection
Commands
s related to the
e replacementt of Equipment/Devices cann be selected.
2.
2 Inheritance iitem
[1.] Layer
If the bo
ox is checked, the Equipment/Device laye er from before the replacem ment is inherite
ed.
If the bo
ox is unchecke
ed, the replace
ement is in the
e layer set in tthe Layers too
olbar.
[2.] Scale
Carry on
n the scale forr the device orr equipment frrom before repplacement.
[3.] Color
If the bo
ox is checked, the Equipment/Device draw w color from bbefore the replacement is in
nherited.
If the bo
ox is unchecke
ed, the replace
ement is in the
e draw color sset in Style setttings.
[4.] Line typpe

If the box is checked d, the Equipmment/Device draw
d line typee from before e the replacem
ment is
inherited
d.
If the bo
ox is unchecke
ed, the replace
ement is in the
e draw line typpe set in Style settings.
[5.] Line widdth

If the box is checkedd, the Equipmment/Device draw
d line widtth from before e the replacem
ment is
inherited
d.
If the bo
ox is unchecke
ed, the replace
ement is in the
e draw line widdth set in Style
e settings.
[6.] Text color

If the bo
ox is checked, the Equipment/Device text color from beefore the repla acement is inherited.
If the bo
ox is unchecke
ed, the replaceement is in the
e draw text seet in Style settings.
In some e cases, depeending on whe ether or not th
here is text beefore or after the replacemeent, the
replacemment may be made in the text color sett in Style setttings, regardle ess of the boxx being
checked d.
Refer too Precautions ffor details.
[7.] Font
ox is checked, the Equipment/Device fontt from before tthe replaceme
If the bo ent is inherited
d.
If the bo
ox is unchecke
ed, the replace
ement is in the
e font set in Sttyle settings.
[8.] Symbol text

If the bo
ox is checked , the Equipme ent/Device texxt height, aspeect ratio and positioning
p relative to
spacing symbol text aare inherited frrom before the
e replacementt.
電気-39
電気
気／Replaceement
If the bo
ox is uncheckked, the replac
cement uses the text heighht, aspect ratio and spacing
g set in
Style se
ettings.
es
[9.] Attribute
If the box
b is checkked, the Equipment/Device e attributes ((property item
ms) from befo ore the
replacemment are inhe rited.
Refer too Precautions2 2. about attribu
ute items etc. that can be innherited.
If the ch
heck box is un checked, attributes are not inherited.
In that case,
c the follo
owing Height Settings dialo og box is dispplayed, so se
et height inforrmation.
Refer too the Equipme ent/Device com mmand about the Height Seettings dialog box.
b
The Height Settings dialog box illu ustrated above e is displayedd if the check box is checkked and
the folloowing conditionns are satisfie
ed:
Howeve er, floor and cceiling height cannot be se et because thhey are inherrited from beffore the
replacem ment.
- If sy
ymbols with th
he same prope erties have diffferent mountinng locations
- If the symbols havve different prroperties
The valuues displayed in the height setting areas during processsing are as foollows:
If the
e box is checkked, the attrib
butes are thos se of the sym mbol that was specified beffore the
replacement.
If the box is uncheccked, the ceiling height and
d floor height aare from the previous historyy, while
the mounting
m heigh
ht and mountin ng location are
e the attributees of the symb
bol that were selected
s
after the replacemeent.
[10.] Scale factor

If the box
b is checkeed, the Equip pment/Devices s cale factor from before the replacem ment is
inherited
d.
If the bo
ox is unchecke ed, the replaceement uses thhe input scale factor.
If the sy
ymbol before o or after the re
eplacement is a variable symmbol or an ac ctual-size symbol, the
scale factor is inherite
ed unconditionnally, regardless of whetherr or not the che
eck box is che
ecked.
Refer too Precautions7 7. about the shhape calculatio
on method.
3.
3 Detail Settin
ngs button
Set details for
f the Equipm
ment/Devices after replacemment. Refer too the Equipmeent/Device com
mmand
This button is enabled wh
hen a standarrd symbol is se
elected for thee replaced Equipment/Devicce after
replacement.
電気-40
電気
気／Replaceement

C dialog box
x
1. Equipment//Devices electtion
Select Equ es that have been replaced
uipment/Device d. Refer to thee Equipment/D
Device comma
and
2.
2 Layout partts specification
n
d out symbolss, and replac
Specify laid ce the specifie
ed symbols w
with the same
e parts. Referr to the
Equipment//Device comm
mand
3.
3 Layout partts search
Search for placed
p symbo ols, and display them in a lis
st.
Select parts
s from the dispplayed list, and replace them
m. Refer to thee Equipment/D
Device comma
and
4.
4 Placement history
st of previousl y placed symb
Display a lis bols.Select pa
arts from the ddisplayed list, and
a replace th
hem.
Up to 5.0 syymbol types ccan be selected. Refer to the
e Equipment/D Device comma and
5 Dimension setting
5.
If the selectted replaced ssymbol is a va
ariable symbo
ol, the Dimenssion Setup dia
alog box is dissplayed.
Refer to the
e Equipment/D Device comma and
6.
6 Replaceme
ent subjects
The attributtes (names) off replaced sym
mbols are disp
played.
Precautio
ons
The eleme ents subject to this pro
ocess are electrical
e sym
mbol parts laid out usin
ng the
Equipment//Device comm
mand.
2.
2 Attribute inh
heritance
Attribute inh
heritance onlyy applies wherre the Equipm ment/Device haas the same properties
p befoore and
after the rep
placement.
However, floor
f height a nd ceiling he eight always inherit attributtes from befo ore the replaccement,
regardless ofo properties.
Mounting height is inheritted if the properties and mo ounting locatioon are each the
e same as beffore.
heritance appliies to the item
Attribute inh ms in the follow
wing table.
電気-41
電気
気／Replaceement
電気-42
電気
気／Replaceement
heritance itemss include som

Attribute inh me attributes th
hat are alreadyy input by the system or havve fixed
(non-change eable) values.. Some attribu utes can have their inputs chhanged by com mmands.
Refer to the commands a about attribute input.
Drawingg Symbol: Dra awing Symbol command Mounting heeight, mounting location: Mounting
Height command
c
Switchinng Circuit: Swwitching Circu uit command Ceiling heigght, floor height: Change Ceiling
Height command
c
Panel syymbol, circuit No., main line e No., power supply type, looad type, volttage type: Circcuit No.
comman nd
Note 1.) Forr data jacks thhat use the prooperties of rec
ceptacles, onlyy those attribu
utes that are co
ommon
to all properties a
are inherited (e
except for panel symbols).
3.
3 Symbol texxt position
ons are not in
Text positio nherited becau sition coordinaates from beffore replacement are
use if text pos
used for pro
ocessing, andd the symbol shape
s before replacement
r at after it, the symbol
ddiffers from tha
shapes couuld overlap or b
be separated.
ng are example
The followin es:
The pos sition of the “C
C” in the text sttring overlaps with the shappe.
4.
4 Symbol texxt
The information set unde er details for the Equipmentt/Device comm
mand is replac
cement processsed on
the basis off the shape texxt angle.
5.
5 Text color inheritance
Text color in
nheritance can n be broadly divided
d into tw
wo patterns.
Pattern 1.: When
W each ite
em of information from beforre the replace ment is inherited after it.
- Replaceement from a ssymbol with sy ymbol text to a symbol with symbol text (FFigure 1.)
- Replaceement from a ssymbol with sh hape text to a symbol with sshape text (Fig
gure 2.)
Pattern 2.: When
W the style
e set in the sty
yle settings within the replaccement commmand is used.
- Replaceement from a ssymbol with sy ymbol text to a symbol with shape text (Figure 3.)
- Replaceement from a ssymbol with sh hape text to a symbol with ssymbol text (Figure 4.)
The abbove are the p processes tha at are perform med when thee parts before e replacementt had a
symbol without symb bol text or shaape text, but th he parts afterr replacement have symbol text or
shape teext.
Example) A sample wherre the text is drawn in mag genta when thhe Equipmentt/Device comm mand is
used, buut the text colo
or within the Replace
R Equipment/Device ccommand is sets to black.
電気-43
電気
気／Replaceement
6.
6 Layout poin
nt change sym
mbol
When a symbol
s is pro
rocessed thatt has been placed on a wall-mountted slide using the
Equipment//Device comm mand, the result is as shown below.
For a symbo
ol which did noot have the lay
yout point cha
anged
For a symbo
ol had the layo
out point chan
nged
7.
7 Terminology
o Precautions Terminology for the Equipment/Device command for the terms exxplained
Refer to
below as common terrms for electric
cal system wirring.
8.
8 Layout layo
out symbol
ement of unitts is on a one-to-one
Replace o basis for symbbols given linked layout with
w the
Equipment/Device co
ommand.
9 Shape calculation method [1.] When inheriting the scale factor

9.
- When re eplaced from a standard symbol to a stan ndard symbol
Calculatte the input sccale factor by the
t same calc culation methood as that for symbols
s stated in the
Precautions for the C Change Scale e Factor and Angle commaand. Howeverr, the scale fa actor to
multiply by is not used d in the replac
cement command.
The sam me applies to e embedding lay yout informatio on.
- When re eplaced from a standard symbol to a variable symbol,
from a variable
v symbbol to a variablle symbol
or from a variable sym mbol to a stanndard symbol
Calculatte by the same e method as for
f the Equipm ment/Device coommand.
The sam me applies to e embedding lay yout informatio on.
Howeve er, for a standaard symbol aftter replaceme ent, the draw sscale factor infformation is th
he draw
scale faactor set underr [Details], whhile for a variable symbol aftfter replaceme ent, the fixed value
v of
1.000 iss written.
If the bo
ox is unchecke ed, the scale factor
f is replac
ced by the onee input in the Command
C too
olbar.
[2.] When the scale fact ctor is not inherited

Calculatte by the sam me method as for the Equ uipment/Devicce command, and multiply by the
scale factor input in th
he Command toolbar.
The samme applies to e embedding lay yout informatioon.
Howeve er, for a standaard symbol aftter replaceme ent, the draw sscale factor infformation is th
he draw
scale fa
actor set underr [Details], whhile for a variable symbol aftfter replacemeent, the fixed value
v of
1.000 is
s written.
* Actual-size e symbols are e processed in the same way as variable ssymbols.
Refer to the Creating P Parts command d for the registration methodd for actual-siz
ze symbols.
If the symbol before or a after the replaacement is a variable sym mbol or an acttual-size symb bol, the
scale facctor is inheriteed uncondition nally, regardle
ess of whetheer or not the scale factor iss to be
inherited.
1.0. CG
CG is disp played if the Equipment/D Device after reeplacement iss replaced by y a CG display part
(variable syymbol). (Howeever, CG displa ay cannot be used with the LT product)
Also, CG is s not displayeed if the Equ uipment/Device e after replaccement is rep placed by a non-CG
n
display part
(standard sy ymbol or actuaal-size symbol).
To use CG display with E Equipment/Dev vice parts drawwn with Evoluution Ver1.1.L001. or earlier, use the
following pro ocess.
[1.] To use
u CG displa ay, it is necess
sary to set the
e ceiling heighht and floor he
eight as attribu
utes, so
use thhe Change C Ceiling Height command to o assign the cceiling heightt and floor he eight to
attribu
utes.
[2.] Use this comman d to set height information for

f the same pparts and repla
ace them.
Refer to the Equipment/D

Device comma
and for details about CG.
電気-44
電気
気／Replaceement
1.1. Parts Style Settings dia

alog box
hat can be se
[1.] Items th et by style setttings vary withh the status oof the selected
d Equipment/D
Devices
(after replac
cement).
Dialog box
Examplee) If an Equipm
ment/Device is selected for which there iss symbol text
Settings are possiible in all text setting areas.
1.2. Interlock between partss and their dim

mensions and annotation
When Equipment/Dev
E vices are movved, their linke
ed dimensionss are also changed automattically.
Convers sely, when a d dimension is changed,
c the linked Equipm
ment/Device is automatically moved
and cha anged.
Refer too Interlock betw
ween parts annd their dimensions and annnotation
電気-45
電気
気／Replaceement
Operation example
1. Operation example of replacing a tro

ough-type FL
L4.0W x2. with a trough-ty
ype (for generrator circuit) FL4.0W x2.
Command
C to
oolbar
Command
C dialog box
(1) uipment/Deviices
“Equ electtion” ->
“Ran
nge specifica
ation” ->
“Equ
uipment/Deviices pecificattion”
[1] Specifyy the range to o perform rep placement.
Equipme ent/Device aftter replacemeent with the Co ommand dialo og
box
Select (TTrough-type (ffor generator ccircuit) FL4.0W
W x2.).
Specify diagonally-op pposite points [1.] and [2.] to indicate th he
range inn which to perfform replacemment.
Click the
e [Finish] butto
on [3.].
The Equ uipment/Devic ces to be replaaced are indic cated in blue.
[2] Specify
y the symbol
Specify the Equipmen
nt/Devices [4..] to replace.
(2) “Rep
placement”
[3] y the range to
Specify o perform rep placement.
Replace
e the Equipmeent/Device, theen return to sc
creen (1.).
電気-46
電気
気／Change Scale and Angle
Cha
ange Scale
S and
a Anngle
Function
n Overview
Change
C the sccale factor and
d angle of repla
aced Equipme
ent/Devices .
How to L
Launch the Command
d
1. Pull-down mmenu
Click [Electric (Q))] -> [Equipment (K)] -> [Cha
ange Scale an
nd Angle (B)].
2.
2 Icon menu
Click o
on .

C dialog box
x
1. Scale factor standard Select the sc

cale factor proccessing metho
od.
Refer to Pre
ecautions 2. fo
or the symbol calculation
c me
ethod.
2.
2 Detail settin
ngs Settings can be made here e for the stand
dard scale factor and the syymbol text proc
cessing metho
od.
[1.] Settings
s can be made
e here for the standard
s scalee factor.
Refer to the Equipment/DDevice comma and.
電気-47
電気
s can be made
[2.] Settings e here for the symbol text processing meethod.
“Retain relative posit ion of shape and
a symbol tex xt”
When n the box is ch hecked, replac cement retainss relative posiitions between
n shapes and symbol
text.
y text info (textt height, spacing) by the sett scale factor.
Multiply
When n the box is ch hecked, only the scale factoor is replaced, retaining text information.
3.
3 Settings forr subject itemss
Set items subject to proccessing.
[1.] If the check box is che ecked
Parts arre subject to cchanges of sca
ale factor and angle.
[2.] If the check box is uncchecked
Parts arre not subject to changes off scale factor and
a angle.
4.
4 Symbol layo
out Display status
Display the status of sym bols surrounded by the rang
ge.
JECA: This means standa ard symbols which
w aw scale factor.
are placed by multiplyying by the dra
Actual size: This meanss variable sym mbols and ac ctual-size sym
mbols that are e laid out witth their
dimensions a s registered.
5.
5 Symbol nam
me display Display the names of placced symbols.
6.
6 Scale factor setting Specify the scale factor to
o multiply by.
7.
7 Specificatio
on of the Plane
e Add angle
Specify the angle to add to laid out plan angle.
電気-48
電気
8.
8 Side angle 1. specificatio
on
Specify the rotation angle
e about the X axis, relative to
t the standarrd status of the
e part.
9.
9 Side angle 2. specificatio
on
Specify the rotation angle
e about the Y axis, relative to
t the standarrd status of the
e part.
10. Invert sele

ections button
Invert the selection statuss.
11. Equipmen
nt Information
Check the "Drawing sccale", "JECA magnification
n", and "Inpuut magnificatio
on" displayed
d when
creating a part.
p
12. Select all button Change all displayed

d sym
mbols to selectted status (parrts subject to sscale factor an
nd angle chan
nge).
13. Deselect a
all button Change all displayed syymbols to des
selected status (parts not ssubject to sca
ale factor and
d angle
change).
e button
14. Reference
Symbols pla
aced within th
he drawing can
n be looked up
p.
- Equipmment/Device n name
Dispplay the name of the specifie ed symbol.
- Layoutt scale factor
Dispplay the layoutt scale factor of
o the specified symbol.
This layout scale ffactor is the sttandard scale factor (draw sscale factor) multiplied
m by th
he input
scalee factor.
A. If the specified symbol is a sy ymbol for draw
w scale factor processing
The draw sccale factor set in the Standard Scale F Factor Setup dialog box fo or each
drawing scale e is displayed as the standard scale factoor.
B. If the specified symbol is nott a symbol for draw scale facctor processin ng
Standard sca le factor is dissplayed as the
e fixed value 1 .000.
- Layoutt angle
Dispplay the layoutt angle of the specified symmbol.
- Layoutt status
Dispplay the layoutt status of the specified sym
mbol.
JECA: This mean ns standard symbols
s whichh are placed by multiplying g by the draw w scale
factor.
Actuual size: This mmeans variablle symbols and actual-size ssymbols that are laid out with their
dimenssions as registtered.
15. Batch setu

up [Settings] button:
ale factor to m
The sca multiply by, the
e plan addition angle, sectiion angle 1., and section angle
a 2.
can be set
s as a batch h.
電気-49
電気
Precautio
ons
ols laid out w
Only symbo with the Equip
pment/Device command are
re subject to this
t process.[[UP TO
HERE]
2.
2 Symbol calcculation metho
od
An equation n such as thatt below is used to calculate the input scalle factor, and the same calcculation
method as in the Equipm ment/Device co ommand.
- If “Multiply Equipment/D Device to lay out by scale fac ctor stated on right” is selec
cted
Use the e drawing sca ale, draw scale factor, and d input scale factor accord ding to the attributes
before thet change, th he drawing sc cale when the scale factor aangle has bee en changed, and
a the
scale fa actor set in the
e Scale Facto or and Addition Angle Setupp dialog box (referred
( to be
elow as
the scale factor for mu ultiplication).
[1.] If the
e laid out sym
mbols are stand dard symbols (other than luuminaires)
Example e) (Before cha ange) Drawin

ng scale 1./5.0
0, draw scale factor (JECA A scale factor)) 1.3.3.,
inpuut scale factor 2.000
Draawing scale w when the scale
e factor angle d the scale factor for
e is changed iis 1./1.00 and
multiplic
cation is 3.0.
Substitu
uting these figu
ures into the above
a calculattion method,
[2.] If the
e laid out sym
mbols are stand
dard symbols (luminaires)
alculated new input scale fac

owever, the ca
* Ho ctor is roundedd to four decim
mal places.
Example
e) (Before cha ange) Drawinng scale 1./5.00, draw scale factor (JECA
A scale factor)) 1.3.3.,
inpu
ut scale factor 2.000
Dra
awing scale wh hen the scale factor angle is
s changed is 11./1.00
Substitu
uting these figu
ures into the above
電気-50
電気
The layo
out scale facto
or is
ut scale factorr is
The inpu
[2.] If th
he laid out Equuipment/Devicces are variab
ble symbols orr actual-size symbols
Thee part correspo onding to the draw scale factor in the aboove explanatio
on is a fixed value
v of
1.0000.
(Tak king actual size dard).
e as the stand
Example e) Attributes bbefore modifica

ation
Drawwing scale 1./5 5.0, draw scale factor (fixed
d) 1.00, input sscale factor 2.0
Drawwing scale wh hen the scalee factor angle is changed iss 1./1.00 and d the scale factor for
multtiplication is 3..0.
uting these figu

Substitu ures into the above
ng “Multiply sta
- When usin andard scale factor
f for draw
wing scale by tthe scale facto
or below”
Whatever the attribute es were for th
he layout before the changee, calculate thee shape by the same
method as for the Equ uipment/Devicce command.
Howeve er, if variable
e symbols an nd actual-sizee symbols arre switched to t this setting
g, they
automattically become e inapplicable symbols.
The layout information iss the same as s in Precautions 3. Layout Information fo or Equipment//Device
command.
3.
3 Linked layyout symbol Scale facttor processingg is on a on ne-to-one bas sis for symbools given linked layout withw the
Equipment/DDevice comma and.
Scale factorr processing by the Equipmment/Device command
c is aalso on a one e-to-one basiss when
variable sym
mbols and actuual-size symbols are both present within tthe linked layo
out.
4.
4 Symbols for which Equipment/Devices
s are drawn
The Equip pment framess of symbols
s drawn with mes are not processed by the
h such fram
Equipment//Device commmand.
5.
5 Terminology
e command ffor the terms explained be
Refer to 6. Terminologyy for the Equipment/Device elow as
common terms for electriical system wiring.
6.
6 Interlock be
etween parts and
a their dime ensions and annnotation
When Equip pment/Devicees are moved,, their linked dimensions aree also change
ed automatically.
Conversely, when a dim mension is cha anged, the lin
nked Equipmeent/Device is automatically moved
and change ed.
Refer to Inte
電気-51
電気
Operation example
1. Operation example of changing

c the layout angle for an Equip
pment/Device (trough-typee, FL4.0Wx1.)) to 9.0°.
Command
C too
olbar
Command diialog box
(6) “Spe
ecify range”
(6) Specifyy range to mo odify.
Specify the range [1.] [2.] of Equipm
ment/Devices to change.
The seleected Equipme ent/Device is ddisplayed in re
ed.
Click the
e [Finish] butto
on [3.].
(6) “Spe
ecify angle”
- The Scaale Factor an
nd Addition A Angle Setup dialog box isi
(6) displayed.
y scale factor//angle.
Specify
Added angle:
a Specify 9.0°, then clicck the [OK] bu
utton [5.].
(6) ange angle”

“Cha
(6) y range to mo
Specify odify.
Change the Equipme ent/Device anngle, then return to scree
en
(1.).
電気-52
電気
気／Move Eq
quipment/D
Device
Mov
ve Equ
uipmen
nt/Dev
vice
Function
n Overview
Move the Equ

uipment/Device
e.
How to L
Launch the Command
d
1. Pull-down mmenu
Click [E
Electric (Q)] -
> [Equuipment (K)] -> > [Move Equipment/Device ((I)].
2.
2 Icon menu
Click on .
1.Command Se
election
Select commands related
d to Equipmen
nt/Devices .
2.
2 Movement ssource selectio
on
Select the movement
m souurce.
However, iff multiple piecces of Equipmment have bee en selected too move, the operation
o meth
hod [1.]
below is use
ed, regardlesss of the setting
g.
[1.] Speciffication
Use th
he mouse to sspecify the origgin of the movement sourcee.
[2.] Layou
ut origin
Make the layout orig
gin of the Equipment/Device
e the movemeent source orig
gin.
3.
3 Wiring pattern change
The pattern
n of wiring to u
use for connec
cting moved Equipment/Devvices can be changed.
c
However, the wiring patttern between Equipment items cannot be changed if multiple items are
selected.
4.
4 Rotation ang
gle setting
When moving Equipmen nt/Devices , itt is possible to set a rotatioon angle thatt changes thee layout
angle.
The coordin
nate specified as the movemment source co oordinate is ussed as the cen
nter of the rota
ation.
電気-53
電気
気／Move Eq
quipment/D
Device
Context m
menu explanation
1. Context
The display
yed content of the context menu
m is explain
ned.
(Before Finish) (After Finish)
[1.] Finis
sh
Finish selecting th
he Equipment//Devices to be me as “Finish” on the
b moved. Thhis is the sam
Command toolbar..
ain all connecttion positions

[2.] Reta
Retain
n all connectio
on positions when
w an Equipment/Device iis moved.
[2.] Settting the base aangle

This can only be se et if the layoutt location is se
et to “free”.
- Staandard line sp
pecification
Specify the sttandard line, then determine e the angle to lay out.
- An
ngle input
Specify the angle to lay oout.
- In
nitializing the b
base angle
Initialize the aangle that waas determined d by standard line specifica
ation, and the
e layout
angle that wa as specified by
y angle input.
Precautio
ons
1. For wires
- All wires linked to the m
moved Equipment/Device are e restored from
m hiding.
- If an Equippment/Device e that is conne
ected to wires with attachedd End Covers or Elision Sym mbols is
moved, the wires are moved so tha at the position
ns of the Endd Covers and Elision Symb bols are
retained. If Equipment//Device goes beyond the End Cover or E Elision Symboll, the cover orr Elision
Symbol is s deleted.
The movem ment of wires iss based on the processing ofo the Move W Wire command d.
2. CG wires
- Route wiring status is reetained by streetching.
- The shape e of a route th
hat requires twwo or more chaanges to the aangles of CG wiring
w (elbowss) is not
retained.
- The shape e of a route th at requires inv
version of CG wiring (elbow
ws) is not retain
ned.
- Pattern ch
hanges are no ot subject to prrocessing.
電気-54
電気
気／Move Eq
quipment/D
Device
- If the Equ
uipment/Devicce has a secttion shape, th
he section connnection statu
us is checkedd in the
detection range.
- If the Equipment/Devicce does not have
h a sectio
on shape, thee section connnection statuss is not
checked.
- The moveement of CG w
wire portions is
s based on the
e processing oof the Move Route command.
3.
3 Interlock be
etween parts and
a their dime ensions and annnotation
When Equip pment/Devicees are moved,, their linked dimensions aree also change
ed automatically.
Conversely, when a dim mension is cha nked Equipmeent/Device is automatically moved
anged, the lin
and change ed.
Refer to Inte
Operation example
1. Operation example of moving

m a rece
eptacle that h
has been plac
ced in a wall-mounted locaation
Command
C too
olbar
(6) “Equ
uipment/Deviices election”
”
(6) Select Equipment/De
E evice.
Use the
e rectangular frame
f [1.] [2.] to specify the
e receptacle to
t
move.
play color of th
The disp he selected reeceptacle chan nges.
Use the Finish button on the Comm mand toolbar, or Finish in th
he
context menu.
Command
C too
olbar
(6) “Mov
ve destinatio
on specificatio
on”
(6) Specifyy coordinates of move desstination.
The seleected receptac cle is rubber ddisplayed.
At this stage,
s if the Command
C tooolbar is set as
s shown at [4..],
the rece
eptacle can be e moved alongg the wall.
Specify the move des stination [5.].
The receeptacle moves s to the speciffied point.
Then, reeturn to (1.).
電気-55
電気／
／Creating Parts
Crea
ating Parts
P
Functio
on Overvie
ew
Create
C the sha
ape and attrib
butes of a part and register i t as a new part. Also, modiffy shapes andd attributes of existing parts..
Newly registeered or chang ged parts can be used w when selecting parts for the Equipmennt/Device com mmand, the Replace
R
Equipment/De evice comman nd, and the Ele
ectric Equipme ents List commmand.
How to L
Launch the Command
d
1. Pull-down mmenu
Click [E
Electric (Q)] ->
> [Equipment (K)]
( -> [Creatin
ng Parts (T)].
2.
2 Icon menu
Click o
on .
Comman
nd dialog box explana
ation and o
operation examples
e
d attributes of a new part

1. Creating tthe shape and
Create the new part sha pe and attribuutes and registter it as a new
w part.
Click on the
e [Create Neww Part Shape and
a Attributes]] button to dispplay the Part Selection
S dialo
og box.
Select the part
p and folde
er for new reg
gistration and click on the [OK] button in i the Part Se election
dialog box.
Refer to the Equipment/D Device commaand about the Part Selectionn dialog box.
The New Part Shape Settup dialog box x is displayed.
電気-56
電気／
／Creating Parts
(1.) The New w Part Shape Setup dialog box

1. The shape imported d with the [Impport Shape] bu utton is displayyed on each face.
f
If no im
mport is perforrmed immedia ately after the dialog box oppens, the shappe that was dissplayed
with a yellow frame e when the lev vel on which tot perform neew registrationn was selected d in the
Part Selection
S dialogg box is displa
ayed.
2. Register the part on n which to pro

ocess the draw
w scale factor (JECA standa ard) for each drawing
d
scale when
w placed.
- If the check box iss checked
Reegister the parrt on which to perform the draw scale facttor process for each drawin ng scale
whhen placed. (S Standard symb bols)
To register symb bols for which
h the draw sca
ale factor proccess is perform
med, draw the e shape
witth the dimensi ons at the 1./1
1.00 standard drawing scalee.
- If the check box iss unchecked
Reegister parts wwhich are to beb laid out with their dimeensions as reg gistered. (Actu ual-size
symmbol)
The checked/un nchecked statu us of the chec
ck boxes in thhis dialog boxx immediately after it
ope ens changes a as described below, with the default beinng the state off the shape dissplayed
witth a yellow fra
ame when the new registration level is seelected in the Part Selection n dialog
box x.
For a standard ssymbol: Check box checke ed
For an actual-sizze symbol or variable
v symbool: Check boox unchecked
3. [Import Shape] buttoon:

Import shapes to o each specified face.
If multiple
m layou
ut points are drawn,
d ot possible to import shapes, so use the Delete
it is no
Insside Frame coommand or the e Delete 1. Element commaand (which ha as the [Delete] key as
its hotkey) to de
elete (blue) poiint elements, sos that only onne layout poin
nt is assigned.
If not
n even one layout point has been draw wn, then when a shape is im mported, the ce enter of
thee minimum recctangle for thee shape is made the layout point for the shape,
s on the system
sid
de.
Noow import a shhape that was drawn at a diffferent active sscale.
Shhapes cannot b be imported frrom poly-line elements
e and spline elemen nts.
ete Shape] buttton:

[Dele
De e of each specified face.
elete the shape
電気-57
電気／
／Creating Parts
4. Make CG settings.
- Usee import CG (th his can be che
ecked if CG is imported)
3. [Import CG] b utton:
Ussing the Equip pment/Device command in advance to pplace an Equip pment/Device on the
pla
an for which a CG shape exists,
e in order to specify thhe range around the shapee on the
pla
an, and capturre as CG.
Wiith CG it is p possible to immport CG for parts drawn in CADEWA A, and 3.DDX XF data
doownloaded from m manufacturers.
(CG for spheress, hemisphere es, quarter sppheres, metall ducts and bus
b ducts can
nnot be
imported from p parts). Insteadd, save the DXXF of the orig inal diagram as
a DWG, and d import
om there).
fro
t use the command to oppen DXF or DWG data, con
In that case, it iis necessary to ntaining
3.D
D data, in advvance.
Foor the settings when opening g such data, be
b sure to seleect “Create ba
asic conversion items
in Evolution grouups [1.]”, and have “Load thhree-dimensionnal elements [2.]” checked.
(Thhe figure belo
ow shows the dialog box forr DXF, but theere is the sam me setting con
ntent for
DWWG, so make the same setttings).
The
T CG registtration position n changes withh the placemeent position on
n the plan, so be
b sure
to place elemeents with assig
gned CG with reference to tthe center of th
he drawing (0,0).
Now
N import a sshape that wa
as drawn at a different
d activee scale.
- Usee created CG ((this can be chhecked if CG is

i created)
[Crreate CG] buttton: Create CG.
C
The creeated CG can be checked bby opening a CG
C window.
Use thee Open/Close 3.D Window command to open
o the CG window.
w
The Create CG d dialog box is displayed.
d
The Create CG d dialog box
電気-58
電気／
／Creating Parts
- Ba
ase shape: S Select the base
e shape from which to creatte CG.
- ↓ : Add the sel ected base shhape from which to create C
CG.
- 1.sst parameter: Specify the parameters for
f the width, depth, heightt, and divisionn of the
selected base
b shape. (The parameteers to input are
a controlled by the
selected base shape).
- 2.n
nd parameter:: Specify the e parameters for the width, depth, height, and division
n of the
selected base
b a controlled by the
shape. (The parameteers to input are
selected base shape).
- Se
et base shapess: Added CG G shapes are displayed.
d
- DEEL: Shapes displayed un nder the set base
b shapes can be deletted from thosse base
shapees.
Lis
st of input para
ameters corres
sponding to ba
ase shapes
電気-59
電気／
／Creating Parts
- Ro
otation angle ((°): Specify rotation
r angless about the X,, Y and Z axe
es. (Use the ce
enter of
the CG shape as the stan ndard).
- Offfset (mm): SSpecify offset values from the X, Y and Z axes. (Use the center of the CG
shape as the standard)).
(X axis -> blue, Y axis -> Red, Z axis ->
> green)
- Do not
n use CG (th
his can be che
ecked if CG im
mport or creatiion are perform
med)
5. Draw
w Auxiliary Ele
ement button: For created d shapes, reggister the layo out point, connection
point, direction line, hatching booundary, hatching island, section
boundarry, fill bounda ary, filled islannd, and outlin
ne section booundary
(collectiv
vely referred to
o below as “auuxiliary elemeents”).
The Auxiliary
A Elem
ment Assignme ent dialog box is displayed.
電気-60
電気／
／Creating Parts
- Lay
yout point: Asssign one layo
out point to ea
ach face.
If noot even one la
ayout point haas been drawnn, then when a shape is im mported,
the center of the minimum recttangle for the shape is made the layout point
p for
the shape, on the e system side.
Alsoo, if multiple layout points have been ddrawn, an errror will be dissplayed
whe en any attemp pt is made to import
i shapess, so use the Delete Inside Frame
commmand or the Delete 1. Element commannd (which has s the [Delete] key as
its hhotkey) to delete (blue) pooint elements,, so that onlyy one layout point
p is
assiigned.
- Con
nnection pointt: Assign con nnection function points (thee points where wires are lin
nked, in
the case of electrricity).
The e assignment ofo connection points is recom mmended.
If noo connection point is assiggned, it may, in some case es, be imposssible to
creaate wiring norm
mally.
The e Connection Function
F Selecction dialog boox
etting No.: Specify numbers

Se s if multiple iidentical connnection functioons are
assig
gned to one pa art.
Thesse set numberrs express thee relationship between connection
pointts assigned inn the plan view w and those assigned
a in th
he front
and side elevations when botth front and side elevatio ons are
regis
stered.
Pleasse note that the
t numbers are not a priority ranking for use
with batch wiring.
- Direection line: T
The direction liine determines s the directionn to lay out.
- Hatching bounda ary: Specify the t hatching boundary in thee Closed Figure dialog box.
- Hattching island: Use the Clo osed Figure dialog
d box to specify hatch hing islands. (Specify
areas th hat should remain unhattched within specified hatching
boundarie es).
- Sec ction boundaryy: Specify bo oundaries that cross wires inn the Closed Figure
F dialog box.
b
- Fill boundary: S Specify fill boundaries in the Closed Figuree dialog box.
- Fill island: Speccify fill islandss in the Closed Figure dialoog box. (Spec cify areas that should
remain unfilled within spe ecified fill bounndaries).
- Outtline section bboundary: To o specify two types of bouundary that cro oss wires withhin one
shape, spe ecify an outline section bouundary in the Closed Figure e dialog
box.
Preca autions
For both section n boundaries and outline sections bounddaries, specifyy not more than one
boundary within each shape.
if multiple
m bound
daries are spe ecified within a shape, theey will be reco ognized as a symbol
witth abnormal innformation.
As a result, wiress cannot be sectioned norm mally.
The following
f dialo
og box opens when
w each boundary is speecified:
電気-61
電気／
／Creating Parts
The Closed Figure

e Selection diialog box Closed figure bboundaries can be specified
d using
circle
es, ellipses, polygons,
p andd poly-curves (shapes mad
de from
lines and arcs).
- Select
S the sha
ape of the clos
sed figure boun
ndary.
The following
f dialo
og box is displayed if a polyg
gon and a polyy-curve are se
elected.
Polyg
gon Layout D Draw Specifica ation Method dialog box: This can be used to speccify the
numbe er of polygonn vertices an nd the speciification
points
s.
- No.
N of vertices:: Specify the
e number of ve
ertices in the ppolygon.
- Specified
S poin ts: Choose the first specification point for drawing, between center and
op.
to
Poly
y-curve Draw Specification Method dialog
g box: Elemeents can be sp
pecified to dra
aw poly-
curves and to end theem.
- Draw
D element: Select the shape
s of the element to draww, between lin
ne and arc.
- Closing
C methodd: Select the
e shape of the closing methood, between liine and arc.
Preca autions
[1.] Iff the cross bou
undary and ou
utline section boundary
b are specified
If the cross bounndary and the outline sectioon boundary a re specified, itt is possible to
o select
whhich boundaryy to make th he wire connnection to, u nder advanced settings - “Wire
con nnection posittion” for the Wire
W command.
Reefer to the Wiree command fo or details.
[2.] TheT relationsship between connection point, sectionn boundary and outline section
boundary
- Iff one connectiion point is as
ssigned and no section bouundary or outliine section bo
oundary
is assigned, tthe minimum rectangle for the
t shape is m
made into the section
s bounddary.
Therefore, if the shape inn which the wires
w should bbe broken is notn the same as the
minimum recctangle, the break element must
m be speciffied in the Clo
osed Figure Se
election
dialog box.
- If the section
n boundary is not
n specified
電気-62
電気／
／Creating Parts
- If the section
n boundary is specified
s as a circle
- Iff multiple con

nnection pointts are assigneed and no seection bounda ary or outline section
boundary is a
assigned
Use the Wiree command to o connect a wire to the connnection point of
o the closest symbol
when making g the symbol specification.
s
The following
g are examplees of wire links
s from each coonnection poin
nt.
- The connectio on point must always be as ssigned within the assigned section bounndary or
outline sectio
on boundary (iincluding on th
he boundary).
- If one connecction point is assigned
a outside the sectionn boundary
The wire co onnects to thhe connectionn point, but itt is cut at the section bou
undary,
according too the mouse position.
p
- If multiple coonnection poinnts are assigne

ed outside thee section boundary
The wire co onnects to the connection pooint that is cloosest when the
e symbol is sp
pecified,
but it is cut a
at the section boundary, depending on thhe mouse posiition.
- If the connectio on point is nott assigned, the boundary iss determined automaticallyy by the
system, as sshown below, so care is req quired becausee the wire cou uld be drawn with an
abnormal forrm.
- If no connecttion point is as
ssigned, and non section bouundary or outline section bo
oundary
is assigned
- The minim mum rectangle e for the shape is made innto the sectio on boundary, and its
center pointt is the connecction point.
- If no connecttion point is as
ssigned, but an
a outline secttion boundary is assigned
The center p ection boundary is made thee connection point.
point of the se p
Therefore, o one connectio on point is ge enerated in eeach boundary y, depending on the
status of th e assigned se ection bounda ary and outlinne section bouundary, and in
n some
cases a totaal of two conne ection points may
m be generaated.
In that state
e, if the wire connection
c po
osition is switcched from the section boun
ndary to
the outline section boundary (or back k) during wiree drawing, thee connection point
p is
changed, an nd may devia ate from the connection
c coondition betwe
een the wire and
a the
Equipment/D Device that “tthe end point of the wiring group and the e symbol connection
point must mmatch”.
電気-63
電気／
／Creating Parts
[3.] To
T make a dirrect wiring link when wiring g to a registeered symbol, without
w perforrming a
pro
ocess to cut tthe wire from one connectio on point (Figuure 1.), assign
n connection point
p 1.
and connection point 2. at the same co oordinates whhen assigning g connection points.
(Fiigure 2.)
In this
t case, therre is no need to
t assign a seection boundarry or outline section boundaary.
(Th
he process is the same as s for the case in [2.] in whiich multiple connection poiints are
asssigned, but noo section bounndary or outline section bounndary).
Fig
gure 1. Figure e 2.
[4.] Hatching
H island
d, fill island
Isla
and specifica ation specifiess areas that should remaain unhatche ed or unfilled within
speecified hatcheed or filled bou
undaries.
Example) To dissplay hatching as shown in thet figure on tthe left, with th
he Equipment//Device
commmand
As shown in the e figure on the right, assign a hatching boundary (the e green area)) and a
hattching island ((the magenta area).
ort CG Check button:

6. The Impo This
s can be used to check impported CG. It cannot
c check created
c
CG.
電気-64
電気／
／Creating Parts
Operatio
on example off creating and d registering the shape annd attributes of a new partt
1. C
Create a new part on the baasis of a stand
dard symbol, using
u the part name 1. “receessed recepta
acle”, symbol name
n 2.
d symbol text string “A”.
“Special”, and
Create a new CG shape
2. C
1.-(1.) Draw the shape to regisster.

Open a new
n drawing wwith the scale 1./1.00, use the
t Circle com
mmand to draw w a circle of 1.5.0mm
n the drawing,, followed by the
radius on t Line comm mand to draw tthe element illlustrated below
w.
1.-(2.) When thee Creating Pa rts command starts, the Main Menu for Creating Partts opens, so click
c on
the [Creatte New Part S
Shape and Attrributes] button
n.
1.-(3.) The Part Selection

S dialo
og box is displayed.
Refer to the Part Selecttion dialog box
x, Equipment//Device comm
mand, Part Selection dialog box.
b
- Choose the hierarchyy layer [1.] on which to regis

ster the new ppart, and the part
p [2.] to use
e as the
base.
- Click on the [OK] butto
on.
at when regisstering new pa

* Note tha arts, if a part with
w the shapee type: variab ble is selected
d as the
base paart, the Part S
Selection dialog box after reg gistration dispplays the part when the shape type
is selec
cted as “standaard” or “all”.
1.-(4.) The New Part Shape S Setup dialog bo ox is displayed d.

Click on the [Draw auxiiliary elements
s] button [3.].
電気-65
電気／
／Creating Parts
The Auxxiliary Elemennt Assignment dialog box op pens.

- Assign
n a layout poin
nt.
Cheeck the layout point item [4.]].
Speecify the layoutt point [5.] of the
t shape draw
wn in the draw
wing.
n a wire conne
- Assign ection point.
Cheeck the connecction point item
m [6.].
Thee Connection F
Function Selec ction dialog bo
ox opens, so m
make the following settings.
Spe
ecify the conne
ection point [7.] of the shape
e drawn in thee drawing. (Ce
enter of circle)
電気-66
電気／
／Creating Parts
- Assign
n a wire sectio
on boundary.
Cheeck the Cross boundary itemm [8.].
Thee Closed Figurre Selection diialog box open
ns, so check C
Circle [9.].
Speecify the cente

er point [1.0] and
a diameter [1.1.] of the cirrcle that is the
e section boun
ndary of
the shape drawn in the drawing g.
n a fill boundarry to the area that represents the wall moounting.

- Assign
Che undary item [1.2.].
eck the Fill bou
Thee Closed Figurre Selection diialog box open ns, so check PPoly-curve [1.3
3.].
Poly
y-curve Draw S Specification Method Selec ction dialog boox opens.
Speecify the arc pa
art.
- Draw element: Arc, closing method:
m Che
eck Line.
- As
ssign the poly--curve start po d point [1.5.] aand curve pass-through poin
oint [1.4.], end nt [1.6.]
of the arc draw
wn in the drawiing.
Nexxt, specify the line part.

- Draw element: Check Line.
- Sp
pecify point [1..7.], which is the
t same as th he poly-curve end point [1.55.] of the straight line
drawn in the drrawing.
When
W the sam
me point is spe ecified, the final end point oof the poly-currve, to form a closed
figure, is searcched for autommatically.
- End th
he process by clicking on th
he [Cancel] bu nt Assignment dialog
utton in the Auuxiliary Elemen
box.
電気-67
電気／
／Creating Parts
1.-(5.) The New Part Sha ape Setup diallog box is disp played.
Click on the [Import 2..D Shape] buttton [1.8.] afterr specifying th e face to impo
ort.
(The Neew Part Setup dialog box clooses temporarrily).
- Move the mouse on th he screen to specify

s the ran
nge [1.9.] [2.0]] around the new
n shape cre eated in
1.-(1.) ~ 1.-(4.).
You will
w be asked fo or confirmatio
on, so click on “Yes” if the eelement colore
ed red is corre
ect. (To
specifyy the range ag
gain, click on “No”
“ and speccify the range again).
Importt a newly-regisstered shape to
t each speciffied face.
電気-68
電気／
／Creating Parts
1.-(6.) The New Part Shape S

Setup dialog bo
ox is displayed
d.
- The shape specified by range in 1.-(5.) is displayed.
電気-69
電気／
／Creating Parts
2.-(1.)
2 Create CG.
- Click on the [Create CG] button [1.].
The Crea ate CG dialogg box is display
yed.
- Base shape selection ’ Select rectanngle [2.].

e parameters [3.].
- Input the
Width:: 7.0
Depth: 1.0
Heightt: 1.2.0
- Click on the [↓ (Add)] button [4.].
To cheeck the CG c reated here, start
s the Open
n/Close 3.D W mand to open the CG
Window comm
windoww.
- Click on the [OK] buttton of the Cre

eate CG dialog
g box, to closee the dialog bo
ox.
電気-70
電気／
／Creating Parts
2.-(2.) The New Part Shape S Setup dialog bo ox is displayed

d.
- Click on
o the [OK] bu utton [5.].
The Atttribute Setup ddialog box is displayed.
d
The atttributes displaayed in this dialog
d box aree the default attributes for the shape thhat was
displayeed with a yello
ow frame whe en the level on which to perfform new regisstration was selected
s
in the Part
P Selection dialog box.
電気-71
電気／
／Creating Parts
Set name and attribute

es of the Part Selection button.
- Move the mouse cu ursor to the seetup area [6.] for the Part S
Selection buttoon name and use u key
inpu
ut to input “wa ll-mounted do ouble special”.
Thee button name e displays thee default attribbutes for the shape that wasw displayed with a
yello
ow frame whe en the level on n which to perform new reggistration was s selected in the Part
Seleection dialog bbox.
Buttton names sp pecified here are displayed as button naames in the Part P Selection n dialog
boxees displayed w with the Equip
pment/Device command, annd Replaceme ent command as well
w the Creatiing Parts command.
as with
Up to
t 1.6. single-b byte (8. double-byte) charac cters can be sspecified.
- Move the mouse cu ursor to the atttribute part na
ame setup areea [6.] for the Part Selection n button
namme and use ke ey input to inpu
ut “special”.
- Next, scroll the scre
een and move e the mouse cu ursor to the syymbol text string area [8.], and
a use
key input to input “A”.
Use thee other attributtes as they weere.
電気-72
電気／
／Creating Parts
2.-(3.) - Click on the [Register]] button [9.].
2.-(4.) Go back to
t the Main me
enu for Creating Parts.
The above operation e example desc cribed creating g a new shaape, registeriing CG and setting
attributes.
When making a new reg gistration of a part for whichh an auxiliary element has already been drawn,
process 1.-((4.) is not requ
uired. Process s 2.-(1.) may also
a be omittedd if CG registration is not required.
Perform the e processes fo or auxiliary ele
ement drawing, attribute chhanges and CG C setup as re equired
by the conditions necessa ary for the reg
gistered part.
2. Creating shapes and aattributes of coombined partss Create the e part shape anda attributes as new, then n register it ass a new
combined pa art.
Click on
n the [Create combined
c part
rt shape and attributes]
a butto
on to display tthe Part Selec
ction dialog boox.
The levels that can be reg gistered as co
ombined parts are as followss:
- Wiring Equipment
E (sw
witches) - Switch + receptacle
- Wiring Equipment
E (recceptacle) - Re
eceptacle (wall mounted) - R Residential data jack
- Wiring Equipment
eceptacle (flooor mounted) - R Residential da
ata jack
Refer to “Precautions 5. C Combined parrts” for a detailed explanatioon of combined d parts.
Select the part
p and foldeer for new reg gistration and click on the [OK] button in i the Part Se election
dialog box.
Refer to “Paart Selection d
dialog box” und der the Equipm ment/Device ccommand for information
i ab
bout the
Part Selectioon dialog box..
The Combin ned Part Shap

pe Setup dialog box is displa
ayed.
(1.) The Com
mbined Part S
Shape Setup dialog
d box
電気-73
電気／
／Creating Parts
1. The shape
s ed with the [Import 2.D Shap
importe pe] button is d isplayed on ea
ach side.
If no import is pe erformed imm mediately after the dialog box opens, the shape th hat was
ayed with a yyellow frame when the lev
displa vel on which to perform new n registratio
on was
selec
cted in the Parrt Selection dia
alog box is dis
splayed.
2. Regis
ster the part on which to process
p the draw
d scale facctor for each drawing scale
e when
plac
ced.
Refer to “Create ne
ew part shape
e and attributes” for details.
3. [Import 2.D Shape] button: Impo ort shapes to each specifiedd face.
Child partts must be parrts placed by tthe Equipmen nt/Device comm mand.
(Howeverr, parts which h are placed w with their sha
ape type as variable
v
(variable symbols), parrts drawn with Equipment frames, and combined
part are not
n covered).
For child parts the cheeck status of ““Register parts s to perform drawing
d
scale facttor process for drawing scaale” and the tw wo check statu uses as
combined d parts must all be the samee.
The numb ber of child pa
arts must be inn the range 2.< <=No. of partss<=6.
It does no
ot matter whetther or not theere is an externnal frame.
Refer to “Create
“ new part shape andd attributes” fo or other detailss.
ete Shape] buttton: Delete the shape of each
[Dele e specifiedd face.
Refer to “Create new
w part shape and attributes” for details.
5. Draw Auxiliary Elem

ment button: For created combined
c part
rt shapes, regiister the layou
ut point,
connectio on point, direction line, hattching boundary, hatching island,
section boundary,
b fill boundary, ffilled island, and outline section
boundary y (collectively referred to beelow as “auxilia
ary elements”)).
Assign au uxiliary elemen nts as requiredd.
However,, connection pointsp and coonnection bou undaries are ignored
i
even if they are assigne ed.
Refer to “Create
“ new part shape andd attributes” fo or details.
mport CG Che
6. The Im eck button: This
T can be us
sed to check im
mported CG.
電気-74
電気／Creating Parts
Precautions
- Parts used as child parts must be as placed by the Equipment/Device command.
Therefore, to use shapes other than those provided by the system, it is necessary to register
and change the shapes first under “Create New Part Shape and Attributes” and “Modify
Existing Part Shape and Attributes”.
Also, to edit symbol text strings or their positions, it is still necessary to change the attributes
“Create New Part Shape and Attributes” and “Modify Existing Part Shape and Attributes”.
* If a symbol text string has been edited with the Change Text Position command, the Change
Text command, or other means, editing does not extend to attributes. Therefore, if this
shape is imported, it is displayed with the shape that was imported, but that is not the
same as the placement result.
- When linking wires, if the wire is to be connected directly from the child part, a connection point
or section boundary must be assigned to the child part.
If no connection point or section boundary is assigned, the minimum rectangle around the
child part is calculated by the system and the wire is connected to that minimum rectangle. In
some cases this may result in the link not being at the intended position.
- If there is symbol text present with a child part that was placed with the Equipment/Device
command, and “Import Shape” is performed on the shape and the symbol text, the shape
and text will be displayed as they were imported together. (It will be handled as shape text)
In that case, use the Delete 1. Element command (the Delete key on the keyboard) to delete
only the symbol text of the child part that was placed with the Equipment/Device command
from the screen.
If the part is registered as a combined part with its text deleted, the symbol text will be
acquired from the attributes of the child part when it is placed, so it will be placed together with
the symbol text.
- If a general text string is present (other than symbol text or shape text), it will not be displayed.
It cannot be placed with the Equipment/Device command.
電気-75
電気／
／Creating Parts
Operatio
on example off creating andd registering the shape an
nd attributes of a combineed part
Example of newly creating
c the pa
art name Co ombined outlett - Receptacle + receptacle + standard sy
ymbol for telep
phone
(1.) Open a new drawing g with the scale 1./1.00, use e the Equipm ent/Device co
ommand to pla ace the
Equipmeent/Device thaat will become a child part on
o the drawingg, and then us
se the Line com
mmand
to draw an
a outer frame e element, as illustrated below.
The child
d part was pre
eviously registtered on the la
ayer stated bellow.
Rece
eptacle: Wirinng Equipmentt (receptacle) - Receptacle ((wall mounted d) - Receptacle
e
Communications j ack: Data communication

c ns device - T
Telephone device - Modula
ar jack,
rotation
(2.) When thhe Creating P

Parts commandd starts, the Main
M Menu forr Creating Parrts opens, so click
c on
the [Crea
ate Combinedd Part Shape and
a Attributes]] button.
(3.) The Parrt Selection dia

alog box is dis
splayed.
ox, Equipment/Device comm
Refer to the Part Selecction dialog bo mand, Part Se
election dialog
g box.
- Choose e the hierarch y layer [1.] on

n which to register the new ppart, and the part
p [2.] to use
e as the
base.
- Click on the [OK] buttton.
電気-76
電気／
／Creating Parts
(4.) The Commbined Part SShape Setup dialog

d box is displayed.
Click on the [Draw auxxiliary element] button [3.].
The Auxxiliary Elemennt Assignment dialog box op pens.

- Assign
n a layout poin
nt.
Cheeck the layout point item [4.]].
Speecify the layoutt point [5.] of the
t shape draw
wn in the draw
wing.
- End th
he process by clicking on th
he [Cancel] bu
utton in the Auuxiliary Elemen
nt Assignment dialog
box.
電気-77
電気／
／Creating Parts
(5.) The Com mbined Part SShape Setup dialog

d box is displayed.
- Click on the [Import S
Shape] button
n [6.]. (The New w Part Setup ddialog box clo
oses temporarrily).
- Move the mouse on n the screen tot specify the range [7.] [8.]] around the new
n shape creeated in
(1.) ~ (4.).
You will
w be asked for confirmatio on, so click on
n “Yes” if the eelement colore
ed red is corre
ect. (To
specify the range a again, click onn “No” and spe ecify the rangee again).
(For electrical
e partss, import is on
nly possible onn plan)
電気-78
電気／
／Creating Parts
(6.) The Com

mbined Part S
Shape Setup dialog
d box is displayed.
by range in (5..) is displayed.

- The shape specified b
電気-79
電気／
／Creating Parts
(7.) The Commbined Part S Shape Setup dialog

d box is displayed.
Click on the [OK] buttoon [9.].
The Attriibute Setup di alog box is dis
splayed.
The attributes displayyed in this dialog box are the default aattributes for the shape th hat was
displayed with a yelloww frame when n the level on which to perfoorm new regis
stration was selected
s
in the Pa
art Selection d
dialog box.
e and attributess of the Part Selection

Set name S butto
on.
電気-80
電気／
／Creating Parts
- Move th
he mouse curssor to the setu up area [1.0] for
f the Part Seelection button name and use u key
input to
t input “Comb bined outlet A”.
The buutton name diisplays the de efault attributes
s for the shappe that was dis
splayed with a yellow
frame when the leve el on which too perform new w registration wwas selected in the Part Seelection
dialog box.
Buttonn names speciified here are displayed as button namess in the Part Se election dialog
g boxes
displayyed with the e Equipment/D Device comm mand, Creatinng Parts com mmand, and Electric
Equipmments List Dissplay comman nd, as well as with
w the Creatting Parts com mmand.
Up to 1.6. single-bytte (8. double-bbyte) characte ers can be speecified.
- Move the mouse curssor to the attrib bute part name 1. setup areea [1.1.] and use
u key input tot input
“(receptacle + recep ptacle + teleph
hone)”.
Use thhe other attribu
utes as they were.
w
n the [Registerr] button [1.2.].

(8.) Click on
(9.) Go back
k to the Main m
menu for Crea
ating Parts.
電気-81
電気／
／Creating Parts
hapes and attrributes of exis

3. Modify sh sting parts
U Modify Ex
Use xisting Part Sh
hape and Attribbutes
C
Click on the [M
Modify Existing
g Part Shape and
a Attributes] button to dissplay the Part Selection dialo
og box.
In
n the Part Sele ection dialog box, select the folder conta
aining the partt to modify, an
nd the part, an
nd click
on the [OK] buttton.
R
Refer to “Part Selection diallog box” undeer the Equipmment/Device coommand for in nformation abbout the
P Selection dialog
Part d box.
The [Modify Ex
T xisting Part Sh
hape and Attrib
butes] button is displayed.
(1
1.) The Modify
y Existing Partt Shape and Attributes
A dialo
og box
1. The shape
s ed with the [Import Shape] button is displaayed on each face.
importe
If no import is pe erformed imm mediately after the dialog box opens, the shape th hat was
displa
ayed with a yyellow frame when the lev vel on which to perform new
n registratio
on was
selec
cted in the Parrt Selection dia
alog box is dis
splayed.
2. Regis
ster the part oon which to process
p the draw scale facctor for each drawing scale
e when
plac
ced.
Referr to “Create ne
ew part shape
e and attributes
s” for details.
3. [Import Shape] butto

on: Import shapes to each
h specified facce.
Refer to “Create
“ new part shape andd attributes” fo
or details.
[Dele
ete Shape] buttton: Delete the shape of each
e specifiedd face.
Refer to “Create ne
ew part shape
e and attributes” for details.
5. Draw Auxiliary Ele

ement button: For created d shapes, reggister the layo out point, connection
point, direction line, hatching booundary, hatching island, section
boundarry, fill bounda ary, filled islannd, and outlin
ne section bo
oundary
(collectiv
vely referred to
o below as “auuxiliary elemeents”).
Refer to “Create
“ new part shape andd attributes” foor details.
6. The Import CG Che

eck button: This
T can be us
sed to check i mported CG.
電気-82
電気／
／Creating Parts
Operatio
on example off changing th
he shape and attributes off a part prepared by the syystem
Wiring
g Equipment (receptacle)
( - Receptacle ((wall mounted
d) - Receptacle, Button nam
me: Recessed
d receptacle within
w a
wall-m
mounted single
e
Operaation example of changing the shape of a 2.P1.5.Ax1. with
w mounting height 3.00 too 2.5.0
gister.
(1.) Draw the shape to reg
Open a new drawing with the scale 1./1.00, use e the Circle coommand to draw two circle
es, with
radii of 1.5.0mm and 3
3.0mm, on the
e drawing, follo
owed by the LLine command
d to draw the element
e
illustrated below.
he Creating P
(2.) When th Parts commandd starts, the Main
M Menu forr Creating Parrts opens, so click
c on
the [Mod
dify Existing Pa
art Shape and
d Attributes] button.

alog box is dis
splayed.
Refer to the Part Se g box, Equipment/Device coommand, Part Selection dialog box.
election dialog
- Select the
t level [1.] a nd part [2.] to change the attributes and sshape of.
- Click on
n the [OK] buttton.
電気-83
電気／
／Creating Parts
(4.) The [Mo

odify Existing P
Part Shape annd Attributes] button is displlayed.
Click on the [Draw auxiiliary element] button [3.].
uxiliary elemen
- Draw au nts as necessaary.
w part shape and attributes” for details.
Refer to “Create new
e process by cclicking on the
- End the e [Cancel] buttton in the Auxxiliary Elemen
nt Assignmentt dialog
box.
電気-84
電気／
／Creating Parts
(5.) The [Moodify Existing P

Part Shape an
nd Attributes] button is displlayed.
Click on the [Import SShape] button [4.] after spec
cifying the facce to import. (The
( New Parrt Setup
ox closes tem porarily).
dialog bo
- Move th he mouse on the screen to specify the range [5.] [6.] around the new shape cre eated in
(1.) ~ (4.).
You will
w be asked ffor confirmatioon, so click on
n “Yes” if the eelement colore
ed red is correect. (To
specify the range a
again, click on
n “No” and speecify the rangee again).
Imporrt a shape to change and register
r to eacch specified faace. (For elec
ctrical parts, im
mport is
only possible on pllan)
電気-85
電気／
／Creating Parts
(6.) The [Mo

odify Existing P
Part Shape an
nd Attributes] button is displlayed.
- The sha by range in (5.) is displayed.

ape specified b
電気-86
電気／
／Creating Parts
(7.) Click on the [OK] butto

on of the Modify Existing Pa
art Shape and Attributes dia
alog box.
The [Modify Existing P
Part Shape and Attributes] button
b is displaayed.
Make atttribute settingss.
- Move th
he mouse curssor to the mo ounting height attribute areaa [8.] for the Part
P Selection
n button
name and use key i nput to input “2.5.0”.
“
Use the other
o attributess as they were
e.
電気-87
電気／
／Creating Parts
Click on the [Change] buttton [9.].
(9.) Go back
k to the Main m
menu for Crea
ating Parts.
Precautions s
If a part supplied
s by the
e system is selected and changed as ann existing partt, the selected
d part is
not actually changed, aand a new partt is created that reflects thee change.
The above op peration exammple described d changing a shape

s and attrributes.
When making a new regisstration of a partp for which an auxiliary eelement has already been drawn,
process (4.) is
i not required
d.
Perform the processes forr auxiliary elemment drawing, attribute channges and CG setup as requ uired by
the conditions necessary foor the registerred part.
電気-88
電気／
／Creating Parts
4. Deleting new parts De

elete a registe
ered part.
Click on the [Delete New Part] button to o display the Part
In the Part Selection
S dialo
og box, select the folder and
d the part to ddelete, and clic
ck on the [OK]] button.
Refer to the Equipment/D Device comma and about the Part Selectionn dialog box.
Only parts registered as n new parts, and
d parts modifieed from existinng parts, can be
b deleted.
The Delete Newly Create ed Parts dialog

g box is displayed.
(1.) The Dellete Newly Cre
eated Parts diialog box
1. Currently registered
d shapes are displayed.
d
2. The Check
C CG buttton: If CG ha
as been create
ed, it is checkeed.
mport CG Che
3. The Im eck display: If CG has bee
en imported, it is checked.
4. The Check
C Attribute
e button: Attrributes are checked.
電気-89
電気／
／Creating Parts
Operatio
on example off deleting reg gistered parts
s
Opera ation example of deleting thhe “Recessed receptacle - special”
s create
ed and registeered as a new
w part with sha
ape and
attribu
utes
(1.) - Click on
o the [Delete New Part] button.

alog box is dis
splayed.
Refer to the Part Selecttion dialog boxx, Equipment//Device comm
b
- Choose e the layer [1.] on which to th

he part to dele
ete is registereed, and the pa
art itself [2.].
- Click on
n the [OK] buttton.
電気-90
電気／
／Creating Parts
(3.) The Dellete Newly Cre

eated Parts dialog box is dis
splayed.
- Cheeck attributes e
etc. as necess
sary.
- Click on the [Dele
ete] button.
The shape is de eleted.
(4.) Go back
k to the Main m
menu for Crea
ating Parts.
電気-91
電気／
／Creating Parts
5.
5 Layout Ref Shape
When registering and editing
W g parts, a prev
viously-registe
ered part can be used as a reference sh hape, in
order to registe
er the same shhape.
C
Click on the [L
Layout Ref Sha ape] button to
o display the Part
I the Part Se
In election dialog
g box, select the part to use
e as the refereence shape, and
a click on th he [OK]
b
button.
T
This method is
s not applicabble to combined parts. (Refeer to Precautioons about com
mbined parts).
The Layout Re
T ef Shape dialo
og box is displlayed.
(1.) The Layo
out Ref Shapee dialog box
1.Auxiiliary element laid out simultaneously with

h a shape:
Auxiliary elemennts have already been assiggned to registeered parts.
When n this item iss checked, thee shape and the auxiliary elements can n be laid out on the
scree
en simultaneo usly.
(The auxiliary elem
ments can be checked
c on the screen at thhe time).
If a shape is pla aced on the screen with all auxiliary eelement items s checked, auxiliary
a
elements other tha an those that were
w actually assigned
a are nnot registered.
電気-92
電気／
／Creating Parts
Operatio
on example off creating a shape to regis ster as a new
w part -1.
Opera ation example of repurposin
ng a part prepa
ared by the sy
ystem and registering it as a new part
(1.) Click on
n the [Layout R
Ref Shape] bu
utton.

alog box is dis
splayed.
Refer to the Part Selecttion dialog boxx, Equipment//Device comm
b
- Select the
t shape to rerefer to.
n the [OK] buttton.
- Click on
(3.) The Lay

yout Ref Shap
pe dialog box is displayed.
電気-93
電気／
／Creating Parts
- Select all
a items [2.] ass auxiliary ele
ements to lay out
o simultaneoously with the shape.
(In th
his case, che ecks may be removed fro om unnecessaary hatching and outline section
boundary).
- Place th
he reference sshape on the screen
s [3.].
The laid out shapee and auxiliary e displayed in tthe following colors:
y elements are c
n the [Cancel] button and go

- Click on o back to the Main
M menu forr Creating Parrts.
- Use [Crreate new partt shape and attributes] to re
egister the shaape created ab
bove.
6. Utility
Use “Envirronment Backkup” under th he CAD environment settiing function to
t use a baccked-up
environmennt and add a ssymbol masterr.
The Process s Selection dia
alog box is dis
splayed.
(1.) The Pro
ocess Selectioon dialog box
1. Add a symbol mastter registered with CADEWAA Real Enlish Edition Versio
on 2.0
Use “Environmentt Backup” un nder the CAD
DEWA Real Enlish Edition Version 2.0 CAD
onment setting
enviro g function to use
u and add a backed-up syymbol master..
2. Add a symbol mastter registered with CADEWAA Real Enlish Edition Versio
on 1.0
Use “Environmentt Backup” un nder the CAD
DEWA Real Enlish Edition Version 1.0 CAD
onment setting
enviro g function to use
u and add a backed-up syymbol master..
(2.) When any

a of the ab bove is selectted and the [O
OK] button iss clicked, the Refer to Reg gistered
Master dialog
d box ope
ens.
Specify the folder coontaining an environment
e backed
b up unnder CADEWA A Real or CA ADEWA
Evolution
n.
Examplee) Use “Envirronment Back kup” under the
e CAD environnment setting g function to back
b up
the environment tto the folder name “CADEW WA Real user 11.” on drive C..
Speecify “CADEWA A Real user 1.”.
電気-94
電気／
／Creating Parts
(3.) When the master add

dition process
s ends, a conffirmation dialoog box opens, to click on th
he [OK]
button.
Precautionss
[1.] Whenn running this p process. always use an env vironment bacckup that was made using th he CAD
environ
nment settingss function of th he software.
[2.] Whenn a symbol is rregistered on computer
c A an nd this processs is performed on computer B, the
symbol that was cre eated on computer A is ad dded to the syymbol masterr that was added on
computter B. (It is nott overwritten).
Similarlly, note that w
when the same e symbol is registered on coomputer A and d on computer B, the
same part
p is added. IIn that case, use u [Delete Ne ew Part] to dellete the duplic
cated symbol.
[3.] Symbbols added wit h the Creating g Parts Utility are imported tto the Parts Selection menu
u by the
“Get Hierarchically
H UUndefined Lay m the Symbol Master” functtion in “Edit mode”
yer Parts from m in
the Part Selection diialog box.
7. Quit Qu
uit this command.
Precautions
P
1. Registered line color, line type,

t line width
If th
he line color, line width andd line type weere specified when creatingg a shape, it can be drawn n in the
i the Part Styyle Settings dialog box of th
statte registered in he Equipment/t/Device comm
mand if the line
e color,
type, and width are
a specified.
2. Create CG
Whenn CG is drawn n, the layout p
point prepared by the system
m for the CG sshape is at the
e center of the
e shape.
Take
e note of that when
w creating CG, and when inputting offfsets.
Example) A cylinnder
* CG
G display (and
d checks) cann
not be used with
w the LT product.
電気-95
電気／
／Creating Parts
3. Using symb
bol masters
When a symbo
W ol registered fo
or an Equipmeent/Device is used as it staands on anothe
er computer, use the
“B
Backup enviro
onment” and “R onment” CAD environment ssetting functio
Restore enviro ons.
Refer too the CAD En nvironment Se

etting function for informatioon about its “B
Backup enviro
onment”
nd “Restore environment” fu
an unctions.
Note that the master
m in which
h symbols are
e registered will be overwrittten on the othe
er computer to
o which
he backup is re
th estored.
4.
4 Text Chara
acters which can
c become shape text
U the Text command
Use c to d
draw on the drawing, in the same way ass for other ele ements (lines, circles,
e
etc.)
C
Characters aree not included d when shapes s are importedd.
(
(The area of th
he dotted line in the figure below
b indicates the boundarry of the import).
- Symbol text
I the Attributte Setup dialo
In og box, input the text heig ght (on releasse of drawing g), text string, text X
c
coordinate (ac
ctual dimensioon) and Y coorrdinate (actuall dimension).
W
When laying out
o the registe ered symbol textt string, the
e layout is bassed on values s such as textt height
s in the symbol text settin gs in the Part Style Settings
set s dialog box oof the Equipme ent/Device com mmand,
b if a text sttring is input a
but as a rule when making the registration, aalways input a value betwe een 0.1.
a 9.9.9.9. If the text heigh
and ht is 0.0, it may not be possible to place thhe text correcttly on the scre
een.
I
Input text cooordinates as d distances from m the layout point assigneed for Layoutt Ref Shape - Draw
A
Auxiliary Elem
ment.
R
Refer to the Equipment/Devvice command d about shape text and symbbol text.
5.
5 Combined p
parts
A combined pa
art is a part ma
ade by combining individual symbols intoo one symbol.
Exxample)
The combined part name is “residential data jack”

eceptacle sym
[1.] is a re mbol (called a child
c part)
[2.] is a co
ommunicationns outlet symbol (called a ch
hild part)
Combined parts
p are displaayed and regiistered in the following
f levells.
Wiring Eqquipment (swittch) - Combineed switch
- Wiring Equipment
E (sw
witches) - Switch + receptacle
- Wiring Equipment
eceptacle (wall mounted) - R Residential data jack
- Wiring Equipment
eceptacle (floo
or mounted) - RResidential da
ata jack
Of the abovve, the levels on which reggistration as a combined paart is possible

e are all levells other
than “Wiring
g Equipment (sswitch) - Com
mbined switch”.
“Modify Exis
sting Part Shaape and Attrib
butes”, “Creatte new part shhape and attrributes”, and “Layout
“
Ref Shape” are not appliccable to combined parts.
- No
ote that when the child partts of combined d parts are re
egistered, therre may be con
nstraints on th
he parts
th
hat can be handled by the S Switching Circ
cuit command d, the Circuit NNo. commandd, etc., dependding on
th
he level on which parts are rregistered.
Too make parts handleable b by a command, register it in the same leevel as other applicable pa arts, as
sttated in the He
elp content forr each commaand.
- If, when parts are

a being reg gistered as co
ombined parts he child parts that is
s, there is a ppart among th
re
egistered on the
t level for luminaires, th
he draw results from layinng out with co ommands related to
Equipment/Dev vice placemen nt may be ab bnormal. (Refe er to the Preccautions to th
he Equipment//Device
coommand for special processses related to luminaires).
電気-96
6. Handling the Equipment/Device Legend Table

- Symbols that have been registered from the Symbol Registration command - Create New Part Shape
And Attributes cannot be selected from the Legend Creation Table dialog box - Edit - Add/Modify button.
- Symbols that have been registered from the Symbol Registration command - Modify Shapes And
Attributes of Existing Parts can be selected from the Legend Creation Table dialog box - Edit -
Add/Modify button.
7. Miscellaneous Parts for which the user registered symbols cannot be laid out with dimensions specified in the Dimension
Setup dialog box (refer to Equipment/Device command).
The same applies even if the shape type is set as variable in the Part Selection dialog box.
If a part with the shape type: variable is selected as the base part, the Part Selection dialog box after
registration displays the part when the shape type is selected as “standard” or “all”.
Operation example
1. Operation example of importing user-registered symbols added in the Utility into the Parts Selection menu.
(1) “Layout Reference Shape”
[1] (1.) Click on [Layout Ref Shape]
(2) “To edit mode”

[1] Press the [Edit Mode] button.
電気-97
(3) “Get hierarchically undefined part on layer from symbol

master”
[1] Press the “Get a hierarchically undefined
part on the layer from the symbol master”
button
[2] Press the [Yes] button.
[3] Press the [OK] button.
(4) Check for hierarchically undefined parts

[1] Select the “Hierarchically undefined parts”
folder and check the acquired symbols.
電気-98
(5) Create a parts folder to store the acquired symbols

[1] Specify the “[1.9.] Miscellaneous” folder.
[2] Press the Create Child button and input

“Sensors” as the new folder name.
(6) Moving symbols

[1] Select a symbol in the the “Hierarchically
undefined parts” folder.
[2] Drag and drop the part into the “[1.9.]

Miscellaneous - Sensors” folder.
電気-99
(7) Saving the Parts Selection menu

[1] Press the [OK] button to save the Parts
Selection menu.
[2] Press the [OK] button.
[3] Press the [Yes] button to overwrite the

existing Parts Selection menu.
To avoid overwriting, press the [No] button,
then change the Parts Selection menu
name in the “Save Parts Selection Menu”
screen, and press the [OK] button.
[4] Press the [Cancel] button.
[5] Press the [End] button to end.
電気-100
Let’s drawing system
Drawing Systems
1 Wiring
2 Up/Down
3 Cable tray
4 Raceway
5 Bus Duct
6 Metal Duct
7 Ventilation Pipe
8 Floor Duct
Electricity/Wiring
Wiring
Function Overview
Draw wiring.
How to Launch the Command
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Wiring (H)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
Explanation of the Command toolbar
If Single Wiring, Consecutive Wiring, or Concentrate Wiring
If Batch to horizontal/vertical Wiring or Batch Concentrate Wiring
If Continue Wiring
If using Draw CG Wiring
If using Edit CG wiring
1. Command Selection
Commands related to route creation can be selected.
2. Selecting the wiring method between equipment

Select the drawing method for wires to the equipment.
If the method is independent, continuous, or concentrated, the following dialog box
opens, so that the connection pattern can be set.
The short dialog box uses a 3-click mode, allowing drawing with the procedure [start
point] - [end point] - [pattern selection], as is described later.
The long dialog box uses a 2-click mode, so drawing follows the set pattern, with the
procedure [start point1] - [start point 2].
[1] Single Wiring

Specify equipment one unit at a time, and connect with wiring between equipment.
Electricity -102
Electricity/Wiring
The drawing procedure is start point 1 -> end point 2 -> pattern selection 3 -> start point 4 -> end
point 5 -> pattern selection 6.
[2] Consecutive Wiring

Use this method for continuous wiring connections between multiple equipment.
The drawing procedure is start point 1 -> end point 2 -> pattern selection 3 -> start point 4 ->
pattern selection 5.
Double clicking on the equipment when specifying an end point draws the wire with the wiring
pattern used for the previous draw operation.
[3] Concentrate Wiring

Use this method for wiring connections to one piece of equipment from multiple other pieces of
equipment.
The drawing procedure is start point 1 -> end point 2 -> pattern selection 3 -> end point 4 ->
pattern selection 5.
[4] Batch to H/V Wiring

Perform batch wiring to multiple pieces of equipment that are horizontally or vertically aligned.
This method cannot wire to equipment that is not horizontally or vertically aligned.
[5] Batch Concentrate Wiring

Use this method for batch wiring connections to once piece of equipment from multiple other
pieces of equipment.
Wiring patterns cannot be selected.
Electricity -103
Electricity/Wiring
[6] Continue Wiring

Specify a previously drawn wiring element and redraw wires beyond the specified point.
[7] Draw CG Wiring

(In the LT product, the draw command for drawing CG wiring is not displayed)
It is possible to draw wires with CG. They are expressed in 2-line form in cross sectional and plan
views.
(In the LT product, CG and cross sectional views are not displayed)
The widths and bend radius of CG wires, CG cables, and CG conduits are automatically acquired
according to the selections of the types and sizes of cables and conduits.
[8] Edit CG wiring

CG wires, CG cables, and CG conduits can be edited.
(In the LT product, the edit command for drawing CG wiring is not displayed)
3. Installation method selection

Select the installation method for the wire.
When changing the line type, line color or line width for an installation method, select Advanced
Settings.
Settings can also be made by specifying the Fig style.
[1] Installation method

Select the installation method to change the style of.
Electricity -104
Electricity/Wiring
[2] Drawing color

Select line color for the installation method.
[3] Line type
Select the line type for the installation method
[4] Line width
Select the line width for the installation method
[5] Temporary settings
The setting is only retained while this command is in effect. The setting is discarded when the
command terminates.
[6] Initialize
Initialize all settings and reset settings to installed defaults.
[7] Draw Color, Draw Line Type and Draw Line Width buttons
When multiple installation methods are selected, the Draw Color, Draw Line Type and Draw Line
Width items are presented as buttons, as shown below. Click on the items to change, and their
style can be changed as a batch.
[8] Hatching style setting

If ribbed hard polyethylene conduit, plastic flexible tube, or bimetal flexible tube is set as the pipe
part for CG displayed wires, they can be drawn as flex forms.
The style of hatched areas can be set.
4. Connection position
Select the leader point for the wire on the equipment.
[1] Automatic
If Wiring Outline Connection is set to “Yes”, the point at which the equipment was specified is
made the wiring leader point.
If Wiring Outline Connection is set to “No”, the point at which the equipment was specified and the
equipment connection point are joined, and the point at which the joining line intersects with the
cross section area (in the case of this equipment, the inner circular part) is made the wiring leader
point.
Electricity -105
Electricity/Wiring
[2] Specified
The equipment connection point is made the wiring leader point.
If Wiring Outline Connection is set to “Yes”, the point at which the equipment was specified is
made the wiring leader point.
If Wiring Outline Connection is set to “No”, the point at which the equipment was specified and the
equipment connection point are joined, and the point at which the joining line intersects with the
cross section area (in the case of this equipment, the inner circular part) is made the wiring leader
point.
5. Cable bundles and Elision Symbols Simultaneous End Cover drawing

Draw cable bundles, Elision Symbols, and End Covers at the same time as wiring.
When the buttons for cable bundles, Elision Symbols and End Covers are depressed when wiring is
drawn, the drawing follows the setting.
[1] Cable bundle
Electricity -106
Electricity/Wiring
When wiring drawing is completed while this button is depressed, the cable bundle is drawn at the
midpoint of the longest linear element in one wiring route.
The number of cable bundles drawn is as set in the dialog box. The style and size are drawn
according to the settings for the cable bundle command.
The dialog box can be displayed or hidden using the Operation panel on the right end of the
Command toolbar.
[2] Elision Symbol

When wiring drawing is completed while this button is depressed, the Elision Symbol is drawn
according to the settings on the [Other] tab under advanced settings.
The form and scale factor of the Elision Symbol are as set in the dialog box. The style and size
are drawn according to the settings for the Elision Symbol command.
Command toolbar.
[3] End Covers

When wiring drawing is completed while this button is depressed, the End Cover is drawn at the
specified draw position after wiring is drawn.
Multiple End Covers can be drawn for one route wire, so if you have finished drawing them, use
“Specification Complete” in the Context menu.
The form and Auto-set for End Covers are as set in the dialog box. The style and size are drawn
according to the settings for the End Cover command.
Command toolbar.
Electricity -107
Electricity/Wiring
6. Wiring information
Set wiring information at the same time as drawing the wiring.
Assign wiring information at the same time as drawing the set wire text strings.
The dialog box can be switched between Show and Hide using the Operation Panel on the right end
of the Command Toolbar.
The wiring information assigned here is subject to searching using the Wiring Note Table command
and the Wire Info Check command.
7. Set number of wires

Set the number of wires to draw.
The set number of wires is drawn in one draw operation. The number of wires setting is only valid for
“Independent” drawing.
The range for this setting is 1~20. The following dialog box opens if the setting is 2 or more.
[1] Pitch
Set the line pitch when drawing multiple wires.
[2] Draw base on

Set the draw standard to use when drawing multiple wires.
Center: Draw at the center point calculated from the number of drawn wires and the draw pitch.
Face: Draw with the outer wire as the standard.
[3] Draw with concentric arcs

Checked: Draw at the radius set for the innermost arc wire, then draw concentric arcs based on
the draw pitch.
Unchecked: Draw all arc wires at the set radius.
8. Elevation input
Use numerical input or list selection for the elevation.
9. Elevation reference
Get elevations from drawn parts.
When a cable tray is specified, the level of the top wiring in the cable tray is automatically calculated,
according to the currently selected CG wiring, and set as the level value.
If CG wiring is specified, the draw elevation value is set to the same elevation as the specified CG
wiring.
10. Elevation specification

Use the mouse to specify elevation
[1] If the check box is checked
The elevation can be specified with the mouse on the cross sectional view.
[2] If the check box is unchecked

The elevation cannot be specified with the mouse on the cross sectional view.
The value from elevation input is enabled.
11. Reference position setting

Set the draw reference position for the elevation.
[1] Top: Draw with the top of the CG display wire as the reference.
[2] Center: Draw with the center of the CG display wire as the reference.
[3] Bottom: Draw with the bottom of the CG display wire as the reference.
Electricity -108
Electricity/Wiring
12. Advanced settings

Open the Details dialog box to make settings for wire correction angle, arc radius, draw layer, and wire
connection position
13. Add curvature

Curvature can be added to straight sections of CG wires, CG cables, and CG conduits.
If the straight section is short, it may not be possible to add curvature.
14. Change curvature

The curvature position can be changed for curved sections of CG wires, CG cables, and CG conduits.
This does not apply to expansion joints, U-shaped connections, and S-shaped connections.
15. Delete curvature

Curvature can be deleted from straight sections of CG wires, CG cables, and CG conduits.
This does not apply to expansion joints, U-shaped connections, and S-shaped connections.
Description of the Command dialog box
This can be displayed or hidden using the Operation panel on the right end of the Command toolbar.
The settable items 1~4 are the same as the “Angle and radius” settings in the Detailed Settings dialog box.
Refer to “Explanation of the Advanced Settings Dialog Box” for details of the settable items 1~4.
1.Display of draw status

Displays the status of the selected command.
2.Cable/ conduit
The name of the cable, conduit or accessory set by the Draw or Auto-connect button is displayed.
Accessory name display Selection from history is also possible. History is saved separately for Draw
and Auto-connect.
3. Outside diameter
Electricity -109
Electricity/Wiring
The Outside diameter can be displayed and changed. The Outside diameter that was acquired
automatically from the master, according to the size and type selections for cables and conduits, is
displayed.
Changes can also be input manually.
Changes can’t be made during drawing.
4.Bend radius
The bend radius can be displayed and changed. The bend radius that was acquired automatically
from the master, according to the size and type selections for cables and conduits, is displayed.
Changes can also be input manually, and can be made during drawing.
5.Dropper button
If the Dropper button is depressed during Draw or Auto-connect operation, the types are acquired for
CG cables, conduits and accessories specified as previously drawn, and their basic sizes are
acquired from the master.
Accessories cannot be selected when in Auto-connect mode.
6.Draw button
This can draw CG wires, cables, pipes and accessories.
When the Draw button is depressed, the name of history remaining in the command is displayed at
“D”.
To change the draw type, press the Select button, then select the type and size to draw.
For accessories, the angle can be acquired automatically if a CG cable or conduit drawn earlier is
specified.
1) Example of operation when placing accessories

When the first specification position point is specified as the end of a CG cable or conduit, the
specified route is extended or shortened to the accessory.
If you want to position the coupling on the conduit, it can be drawn as shown below if the first
specification position is placed on the conduit.
7. Auto-connect button
Electricity -110
Electricity/Wiring
If the previously drawn CG cable, conduit or accessory to be connected is specified, it is possible to

draw and automatic connection with the selected type of CG cable or conduit.
1) The drawable connection type patterns are as follows:

１．CG cable <- -> CG cable
２．CG cable <- -> CG conduit
３．CG cable <- -> CG conduit
４．CG conduit <- -> CG conduit
５．CG conduit <- -> CG accessory
６．CG accessory <- -> CG accessory
2) The drawable connection patterns are as follows:
(1) “Pattern 1” expansion For routes facing each other on the same elevation, using Auto-
connect between the facing ends can draw an expansion
connection.
The draw orientation is fixed to downward.
Drawing is possible regardless of whether “Draw the pipes to

Auto-connect at the set rate of curvature” is checked.
If the drawn bend radius rate of curvature is below the regulation

value, a balloon message is displayed.
(2) “Pattern 2” U-shaped connection For parallel routes, using Auto-connect between ends facing in
the same direction can draw a U-shaped connection.
Drawing is possible regardless of whether “Draw the pipes to

Auto-connect at the set rate of curvature” is checked.
If the drawn bend radius rate of curvature is below the

regulation value, a balloon message is displayed.
Drawing is possible even if there is an elevation difference.
Electricity -111
Electricity/Wiring
(3) “Pattern 3” S-shaped connection For parallel routes, using Auto-connect between ends
facing each other can draw an S-shaped connection.
If “Draw the pipes to Auto-connect at the set rate of

curvature” is unchecked, the connection takes an S shape,
as illustrated in the upper diagram on the left.
If the drawn bend radius rate of curvature is below the

regulation value, a balloon message is displayed.

curvature” is checked, the connection takes an S shape, as
illustrated in the lower diagram on the left.
The curved portion is always drawn with the regulation
bend radius value, so the drawing is not possible if the
distance between the routes of CG cables or pipes is less
than double the bend radius value.
Drawing is possible at the position where routes join in a

straight line, even if there is an elevation difference.
(4) “Pattern 4” L- and LL-shaped connections If routes are drawn at different elevations with ends as shown
on the left, an LL-shaped connection can be drawn when Auto-
connect is used.

curvature” is unchecked, the rate of curvature changes with
the distance between the routes, but the connection is drawn
from the selected end at the maximum bend radius.
If the drawn bend radius bending rate is below the regulation

value, a balloon message is displayed.

curvature” is checked, a normal connection can be drawn by
extending the straight line portion of the route.
The connection is always drawn with the regulation bend

radius value, so the drawing is not possible if the distance
between the routes of CG cables or pipes is less than double
the bend radius value.
A balloon message is displayed if the connection cannot be

drawn.
If the angle between pipes is 0 when they face each other, the
range of drawable angles is 1°~ less than 180 degree.
Electricity -112
Electricity/Wiring
8. Select button
This is the button to select the parts to draw when in Draw mode or Auto-connect mode.
Accessories cannot be selected in Auto-connect mode.
9. “Normal Bend” Button

The Normal Bend button is enabled when a metal pipe is set as the part to draw.
When drawing with the Normal Bend button depressed, a normal bend is only drawn if the bend
angle is 90 degree.
The Normal Bend button is enabled for the following pipe parts:
- Thin steel conduit - Unthreaded conduit
- Thick steel conduit - Steel pipe with polyethylene lining
10.Angle ratio setting

Set the angle ratio for pipe and wiring parts to use automatic connection on.
Set whether or not to connect at the setting value in Advanced Settings - Bend Radius.
11.Outside diameter
Set the Outside diameter for the cable or conduit selected in B.
If the setting value is changed by manual input, the part can be drawn at the specified size.
12.Bend radius
Set the bend radius for the cable or conduit selected in B.
If the setting value is changed by manual input, the part can be drawn at the bend radius.
13.Trace on Tray
Specify the start point and end point of the cable tray to automatically run CG wiring along the cable
tray.
Check-mark “Trace on Tray”, then specify the straight tray start point and end point.
14.Displace from Ref line

If a displacement from the reference line is set, drawing can be displaced away from the reference
line of the cable tray axis towards the main beam.
Electricity -113
Electricity/Wiring
Description of the Advanced Settings dialog box
1. Correction angle specification

Specify the correction angle for the wiring.
The diagram below shows the corrected point [2]’ in the case in which the correction angle is set to
45 degree, and the start point [1] and end point [2] are specified.
2. Arc radius specification

Specify the arc radius of the curved section of the wire.
3. Height specification
Specify the distance from the line between pieces of equipment to the wire when using pattern wiring.
Electricity -114
Electricity/Wiring
4. Adopt settings for each drawing scale

Adopt the arc radius and height specifications from the settings for each scale when using pattern
wiring.
1. Layer settings Set drawing layers.

[1] Input layer: Draw on the operation layer of the Layers toolbar.
[2] Specified layer: Draw in the specified layer.
Make separate settings for the equipment/device start layer and the wiring start layer, and
determine the draw layer according to the equipment/devices specified by that difference.
Electricity -115
Electricity/Wiring
1. Wiring outline connection position specification

Specify the connecting position for wiring to the equipment/device.
Of the symbols provided by the system, this setting is only valid for luminaires.
[1] Set
The wiring connection position is on the outline of the equipment shape.
For symbols registered by the customer, use the Creating Parts command to connect wiring to the
element registered as an outline section area.
[2] don’t
The wiring connection position is the inner outline of the equipment shape.
For symbols registered by the customer, use the Creating Parts command to connect wiring to the
element registered as a section area.
2. Sets when Equipment/Device is specified

When an equipment/device part is specified, it is possible to set whether or not to connect wiring
unconditionally.
[1] Connect wires unconditionally when Equipment/Device parts are specified

Connect wiring unconditionally when equipment/device parts are specified.
[2] Display [Y/N] when Equipment/Device is specified
This can display [Y/N] when equipment/device parts are specified, to select whether or not to use
it.
Electricity -116
Electricity/Wiring
1. Set for each drawing scale

When using pattern wiring, specify the radius and height of the arc for each drawing scale.
1. Bend radius setting for expansion part

The lowered margin for expansion drawn for CG wires and conduits in Auto-connect mode can be set
[1]Set the Z-axis lowered margin from the pitch between wires and cables.
[2] Set the Z-axis lowered margin from the pitch between conduits.
The maximum value is input as the system default value, and reducing the value produces a more
gradual curve
2. Setting bend radius of cables and conduits

Set the draw mode bend radius for CG wires and conduits.
[1] Bend radius of wire/cable
The bend radius scale factor can be set, relative to the external diameter of the wire/cable.
In the case of cable bending as stated in the regulation for internal wiring regulation JEAC8001-
2005, volume 3, chapter 1, section 3165, 3165-4 “Bend radius of wire/cable”, following the
stipulation that “when bending cable, the radius of the inner side must be at least six times the
Outside diameter of the cable (eight times for single-core cables) to avoid damaging the coating”,
the regulation allows radius to be set in three categories for “single-core electrical wires and
cables”, “wires and cables other than single core”, and “cables with lead or aluminum covering”.
The system default value is the value stated in the regulation for internal wiring.
[2] Bend radius of conduit

The bend radius scale factor can be set, relative to the external diameter of the conduit.
The internal wiring regulation JEAC8001-2005, volume 3, chapter 1, section 3110, 3110-8 “Pipe
bending” and section 3120, 3120-6, “Plumbing” state “In the case of metal pipes, bend so as to
avoid extreme deformation between metals, such that the bending radius of the inner side must
be at least six times the internal diameter of the pipe” and “in exposed locations, in concealed but
inspectable locations where the pipe cannot be removed, and in non-inspectable concealed
locations, the bending radius of the inner side must be at least six times the bimetal flexible
conduit”, and accordingly, two categories can be set, for “precast tube” and “other than precast
tube”.
The system default value is the value stated in the regulation for internal wiring.
Electricity -117
Electricity/Wiring
1. Hatching
Set the hatching pitch for CG displayed wires drawn with a flex form.
If ribbed hard polyethylene conduit, plastic flexible tube, or bimetal flexible tube is set as the pipe part
for CG displayed wires, they can be drawn as flex forms.
The hatching pitch can be set for each drawing scale on release of drawing dimensions.
1. Processing frame shape

Set the process form to use when drawing wires and Elision Symbols at the same time.
2. Offset
Set the offset from the specified part to use when drawing wires and Elision Symbols at the same
time.
The only equipment/device parts affected are distribution panels.
Electricity -118
Electricity/Wiring
3. Connection to equipment/devices draw settings

Set whether or not to draw Elision Symbols for wires that are not connected to equipment/devices
when drawing Elision Symbols at the same time as wires.
4. Batch to set H/V

For equipment arranged in horizontal or vertical lines when batch H/V wiring is selected, set the pitch
for making forced connections to devices that are out of line.
Context explanation
1. Context
The displayed content of the context menu is explained.
[1] Set base angle

- Standard line specification
Specify the standard line, then determine the angle to lay out.
- Input angle
Specify the angle to lay out.
- Initializing the base angle

Initialize the input layout angle.
[2] Temporary settings for free wire correction angle

- 15 degree
- 30 degree
- 45 degree
- No correction angle
Electricity -119
Electricity/Wiring
[3] Temporary setting for pattern wiring correction angle
Precautions
1. User-registered wiring and pipes

1) Refer to Help for the “Wire Text” and “Wiring Note Table” commands for explanation of the
registration operation.
2) The number of wires and pipes that can be registered is up to 99 parts for each type displayed in
the hierarchy menu.
3) Registered wiring and pipes can be used with the CG Wiring, Wiring, Wire Text, and Wiring Note
Table commands.
4) Registered wiring and pipes cannot be used with the Calculate Main Line Size command.
5) When environment backup and restoration are used, user-registered wiring and pipes in the
restoration destination are deleted.
Operation example
1. Example of operation for “continuous” wiring between placed equipment
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Specify equipment 1”

[1] Specify the first point.
Specify equipment [1] to connect the wire to.
The wiring is rubber displayed.
(2) “Specify equipment 2-1”

[2] Specify the second point.
Specify equipment [2] to connect the wire to.
Different wiring patterns are displayed depending on the mouse
position, so indicate when the intended pattern is displayed [3].
Electricity -120
Electricity/Wiring
(3) “Specify equipment 2-2”

[3] Specify the second point.
Go on to specify equipment [4] to connect the wire to.
Select the wiring pattern [5]
To close, right click to display the context menu, then choose
“Complete”.
2. Example of using batch H/V wiring to wire placed equipment
Command toolbar
(1) “Specify range”

[1] Select horizontally- or vertically-arranged equipment.
Use the diagonally-opposite start point [1] and end point [2] to
indicate the range in which to draw wiring.
Use the Finish button on the Command toolbar, or Finish in the
context menu.
(2) Wiring direction selection (H/V)

[2] Check direction to draw wire.
Wiring in the horizontal direction is displayed, so
use the Y key or the left mouse button to specify if correct.
Use the N key or the right mouse button to switch to displaying
vertical wiring.
(3) Wiring pattern selection

[3] Specify wiring pattern.
When the mouse is moved between the two pieces of
equipment in the bottom left that are a different color,
different wiring patterns are displayed depending on the
mouse position, so indicate when the intended pattern is
displayed [4].
Electricity -121
Electricity/Wiring
(4) Specification of equipment for transfer

wiring
[4] Specify equipment for transfer wiring.
Specify the equipment to start transfer wiring from [5].
(5) Specifying the wiring pattern

[5] Specify transfer wiring pattern.
When the mouse is moved between the two pieces of
equipment in the bottom left that are a different color,
different wiring patterns are displayed depending on the
mouse position, so indicate when the intended pattern is
displayed [6].
(6) “Draw”
[6] Draw wiring.
Draw the wiring and return to (1).
3. Example of operation for “batch concentrated” wiring between placed equipment
Command toolbar
(1) “Specify equipment”

[1] Select equipment.
Use the diagonally-opposite start point [1] and end point [2] to
indicate the range in which to draw wiring.
Use the Finish button on the Command toolbar, or Finish in the
context menu.
Electricity -122
Electricity/Wiring
(2) Specifying the equipment to concentrate

[2] Specify equipment which concentrates wires.
Specify the equipment [4] which concentrates wires.
(3) “Confirm”
[3] Check wiring.
The wiring that will be drawn is displayed temporarily, so
use the Y key or the left mouse button to specify if it is correct.
Use the N key or the right mouse button to go back to (2).
(4) “Draw”
[4] Batch draw wiring.
This batch draws the wiring and returns to (1).
4. Example of operation for using a box connector for “Draw CG wiring” to placed equipment
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) Connection to devices
Electricity -123
Electricity/Wiring
[1] Use the Command toolbar to match the mounting height of the
connector to the height of the device.
Matching elevation with the device enables linkage with the “Move
equipment/device” command.
[2]
Click on Select in the Command dialog box, then select the

[3] connector to place.
Left click to specify the connection position of the device,

determine the direction, then left click again to place the connector.
(2) Connection to wiring

[1] Left click on the wire to specify the connector to connect.
The angle and elevation of the specified pipe can be acquired.
[2] Left click to specify the placement of the connector, determine

the direction, then left click again to place and connect.
Pipe ends close to the pipe specified in [1] are extended or

shortened to connect to the connector.
If there is a connector, the “Move route” command can be

used to specify and move it.
5. Operation example of tracing on tray when drawing CG Wiring
Command Dialog
(1) “Trace on Tray” Draw CG wiring automatically on the cable tray.

(1) Check the box for “Trace on Tray” in the command dialog box.
(2) Specify the start point of the straight cable tray.
(3) Specify the end point of the straight cable tray.
Once the trace is complete, the next point can be specified for
drawing.
N: Displace from reference line setting When automatically running CG wiring along a cable tray, draw the wiring at a position
offset from the axis of the cable tray, towards the main beam.
When drawing a cable tray, the direction of displacement is determined by the direction from the straight tray start point to the end
point.
Electricity -124
Electricity/Wiring
6． Operation examples of Trace on Tray - Displace From Ref Line when drawing CG Wiring
Command Dialog
(1) “Trace on Tray - Displace from Ref line” When automatically drawing CG wiring on a cable tray, draw the
wiring offset from the axis of the cable tray, towards the main
beam.
(1) Input the displacement value “150” in the command dialog box.
(2) Check the box for “Trace on Tray” in the command dialog box.
(3) Specify the start point of the straight cable tray.
(4) Specify the end point of the straight cable tray.
The CG wiring is displaced to the right side, relative to the cable

tray draw start and end positions.
If the displacement value “-150” was input in the command

dialog box, the CG wiring would be displaced to the left side,
relative to the cable tray draw start and end positions.
Electricity -125
Electricity/Up/Down
Up/Down
Function Overview
Draw Up/Down symbols.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Up/Down (T)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
Select commands related to route creation.

Select the installation method for Up/Down wires.
Customers who do not use material counting do not need to be aware of the installation method.
The installation method may be used when determining part names for the Up/Down vertical length in
material counting, with the Edit Materials command.
(However, the Material Count command cannot be with LT products)
The installation method list is displayed when button 2 in the illustration above is pressed.
Select the installation method to draw with and check the item.
When changing the line type, line color or line width for an installation method, select Advanced
Settings.
Settings can also be made by specifying the Fig style.
1 Installation method
Select the installation method to change the style of.
2 Drawing color
Select line color for the installation method.
Electricity -126
Electricity/Up/Down
3 Line type
Select the line type for the installation method
4 Line width
Select the line width for the installation method
5 Temporary settings
The setting is only retained while this command is in effect. The setting is discarded when the
command terminates.
6 Initialize
7 Draw Color, Draw Line Type and Draw Line Width buttons
When multiple installation methods are selected, the Draw Color, Draw Line Type and Draw Line
Width items are presented as buttons, as shown below. Click on the items to change, and their
style can be changed as a batch.
3. Setting the drawing subject

Set the subject to be drawn.
[1] When set in parts (element) mode
When equipment/device parts are specified, the Up/Down symbols can be drawn along the
outline element of the equipment/device part.
The Up/Down symbols can be drawn along the element (line, circle, arc) of the
equipment/device part.
The draw position of the Up/Down symbol can be moved with the mouse position.
However, ellipses and ellipse arcs are not covered.
4. Setting the scale factor

Set the size (scale factor) of the Up/Down symbol when drawing.
5 Details button
Open the Symbol Size Settings dialog box to set up advanced settings when drawing.
Refer to the description of the Symbol Size Settings dialog box later in this manual
1. Selecting symbol type

Select the type of symbol to draw. The shape of the selected symbol type is shown in 4.
[1] Up/Down
Draw an up symbol, down symbol, or same floor symbol.
Electricity -127
Electricity/Up/Down
[2] Pass through

Draw a pass through symbol
[3] Up/Down (arranged horizontally)

Draw two Up/Down symbols side by side.
[4] Up/Down (arranged vertically)

Draw two Up/Down symbols, aligned vertically.
2. Selecting penetration position

Select the penetration position.
[1] General
Draw the circular part of Up/Down symbols with a single circle.
[2] Fire prevention

Draw the circular part of Up/Down symbols with a double circle.
3. Selecting arrow shapes

Select from three types of arrowhead shape.
4. Selecting draw shapes

Select the corresponding shape from the display shapes drawn by selections 1~3.
5. Height settings
Assign floor height and ceiling height information at the placement stage.
The assigned information is used to calculate vertical lengths of wiring for material counts.
Therefore, it is irrelevant to customers who do not use material counting.
(Refer to Material Count commands about material counting. However, the Material Count
command cannot be used with LT products)
[1] FL H
Set FL H.
The floor height set here is set as an attribute of the up and down symbols.
The available input range for floor height is 1~99999mm.
However, when Equip/device under Elec is specified when placing Up/Down symbols, the floor
height and ceiling height information held by the equipment/device is acquired and displayed in
the Height Settings dialog box.
[2] Ceiling Height

Set ceiling height.
The ceiling height set here is set as an attribute of the up and down symbols.
The available input range for ceiling height is 1~99999mm.
However, when Equip/device under Elec is specified when placing Up/Down symbols, the floor
height and ceiling height information held by the equipment/device is acquired and displayed in
the Height Settings dialog box.
[3] Description button

The Detailed description dialog box for floor and ceiling heights will open.
Electricity -128
Electricity/Up/Down
This can be displayed or hidden using the Operation panel on the right end of the Command toolbar.
Description of the Symbol Size Settings dialog box
1. Advanced settings Dialog box

Set the draw size of Up/Down symbols.
1 Setting symbol length 1

Set symbol length 1 (mm at the release of drawing stage) of the display shape.


4 Setting general circle diameter

Set general circle diameter (mm at the release of drawing stage) of the display shape.
Electricity -129
Electricity/Up/Down
5 Setting inner diameter of penetration circles

Set the inner diameter of the display shape of penetrations (mm at the release of drawing stage).
6 Setting outer diameter of penetration circles

Set the outer diameter of the display shape of penetrations (mm at the release of drawing stage).
7 Setting arrow length

Set the arrow length (mm at the release of drawing stage) of the display shape.
8 Setting arrow angle

Set the arrow angle (degrees) of the display shape.
9 Setting scale factor for each scale

Set the scale factor to apply at each scale.
- If the check box is checked
Use the following calculation to find the drawn size on release of drawing.
Drawn size = set size x scale factor x scale factor for each scale
- If the check box is unchecked
Use the following calculation to find the drawn size on release of drawing.
Drawn size = set size x scale factor
10 Setting scale factor

Set the size (scale factor) of the Up/Down symbol when drawing.
Multiple the set sizes 1~8 above by the input scale factor.
11 Scale factor setting button

Open the Screen Scale Factor Settings dialog box and set the scale factor to multiply by,
corresponding to each drawing scale.
1. Setting drawing scale

Set the drawing scale.
Set scales in the form “1/number”.
Make sure the input values is smaller than the set value for the next level.
With the settings shown in the figure below, if the drawing scale that the customer is currently
drawing at is in the range 1/25~1/35, the values set under explanations 1~8. above for the
Symbol Size Settings dialog box are multiplied by 1.667.
The size actually drawn at the release of drawing stage is found by multiplying the setting for
scale factor under Description of the Symbol Size Settings dialog box 10 by the input value.
2. Setting draw scale factor

Set the draw scale factor.
Electricity -130
Electricity/Up/Down
3. Reset to standard settings

Reset all the input values for drawing scale and draw scale factor to the standard values.
12 Draw layer settings

Check to draw in the same layer as the specified electrical part.
Applicable parts are equipment/devices, wires, Up/Down wires, cable trays and raceways.
Uncheck to draw in the currently specified layer.
13 Reference button
Specify a previously drawn Up/Down symbol to get and set its attributes.
14 Initialize button
Context explanation
1. Context
[1] Set base angle.
A . Specify the standard line to acquire the angle.
B . Specify the angle by manual input.
C. Initialize the base angle to 0 degrees.
[2] Make temporary settings for free wire correction angle.
Electricity -131
Electricity/Up/Down
D. Adjust the arrow direction of the Up/Down symbol in pitches of 15~90 degree.
When laying out two symbols at the same time, in Up/Down (H alignment) or Up/Down (V
alignment) mode, correct so that whichever setting is used, the angle becomes 45 degree
Up/Down.
E . Do not adjust the direction of the Up/Down symbol arrow.

The arrow points in the direction specified with the mouse.
When laying out two symbols at the same time, in Up/Down (H alignment) or Up/Down (V
alignment) mode, it is not possible to set for no correction.
Warnings
1. Layout point adjustment

If an element is specified when specifying the 1st point, correct the layout point.
Adjust the draw layout point so that the Up/Down symbol touches the orthogonal intersection point
between the specified element [1] and the draw layout point [2].
Electricity -132
Electricity/Up/Down
Operation example
1. Operation example for drawing an up symbol on a panel
Command toolbar
(1) “Draw shape attribute change”

[1] Set the shape to draw.
Select the shape as shown in the figure on the right.
Symbol type Up/Down
Penetration position General
Arrow shape 2-sided open arrowhead
(2) “Specifying the equipment connection

face”
[2] Specify the layout point or element.
Specify the connection face of the equipment to draw the
Up/Down symbol for.
(3) “Checking elements”

[3] Check the specified element.
The color of the specified element changes temporarily.
Use the Y key or the left mouse button to specify if correct.
Select the N key or the right mouse button to process the
specified point as the layout point for the symbol.
After specification, the draw shape is rubber displayed.
(4) “Specifying layout points”

[4] Specify layout point.
The Up/Down symbol on the specified element moves
according to the mouse position, so specify the layout point [2].
(5) “Specifying direction points”

[5] Specify direction point.
Specify the leader direction of the arrow [3].
Return to (2) after drawing.
Electricity -133
Electricity/Cable Tray
Cable Tray
Function Overview
Draw the cable tray.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Cable Tray (C)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
If other than a V tray
If a V tray
1. Command Selection Commands related to route creation can be selected.
2. Selection of parts Select drawing parts.

[1] Straight tray
- Independent draw (if the continuous draw check box is unchecked)
Draw the cable tray using specifications P1 and P2 (instructions can be given for both plane
and section)
The draw angle follows the correction angle. Refer to the explanation of Context.
- Continuous draw (if the continuous draw check box is checked)

If specifying a plane
Draw continuously while generating Elbow trays at the bends.
The angles of the generated Elbow trays are determined by the bend angle of the tray.
Tray bend angle
If the tray bend angle is not 30 degree, 45 degree, 60 degree, or 90 degree.

Elbow trays are not generated, so trays are butted together.
Electricity -134
If specifying a section
The bend points can be specified on the cross sectional view to draw.
When drawing in/out side bend trays, draw by starting the in/out side bend tray command
after continuous drawing.
When continuously drawing straight trays, the shape of the Elbow trays can be selected from the
Elbow Selection dialog box.
However, even if the shape of the Elbow trays is selected, in the following situations, Elbow
trays are not generated, so trays are butted together.
When an outer right angle branch tray or an inner/outer right angle branch tray is selected
and the angle is not 90 degree
Angle other than 30 degree, 45 degree, 60 degree, or 90 degree when an Elbow tray is
selected
If the elevation is changed during continuous drawing of a straight tray, it is possible to

draw cable tray while changing the elevation by operation on the plan view only.
If the elevation is changed during continuous drawing of a straight tray, the Correction
Angle Settings dialog box is displayed.
Electricity -135
If the correction angle was input, calculate and draw the length of the inclined tray from the
elevation difference and the correction angle.
If the correction angle is 90 degree, the Branch Tray Selection dialog box is displayed, and
the branch tray can be set.
If an in/out side bend tray was selected, it cannot be drawn if the elevation difference
between straight trays is too small.
If there is no correction angle, draw an inclined tray between the straight trays.
[2] Elbow
(NEW FROM HERE- If two cable trays are specified, draw an Elbow corresponding to the angle
to connect.
- When continuously drawing in the same way as with straight trays, the shape of the Elbow trays
can be selected from the same Elbow Selection dialog box.
However, even if the shape of the Elbow trays is selected, in the following situations, Elbow
trays are not generated, so trays are butted together.
(This is the same as for continuous drawing of straight trays).

When an outer right angle branch tray or an inner/outer right angle branch tray is selected
and the angle is not 90 degree
Angle other than 30 degree, 45 degree, 60 degree, or 90 degree when an Elbow tray is
selected
- Tray width, and main girder height and material, follow the straight tray.
[3] T branch
- When two trays are specified that cross at 90 degree, draw a T branch at the intersection point
between the trays.
The sequence of specifying cable trays is to proceed from the main side to the branch side.
In the case of the diagram below, specify the main-side tray for P1, and specify the branch-
side tray and the remaining side direction for P2.
Electricity -136
- The shape of the T branch trays can be selected from the T Branch Selection dialog box.
- If the trays are not perpendicular, T branch trays are not drawn, and straight trays are drawn
butted together.
[4] X branch
- When two trays are selected that cross at 90 degree, draw an X branch at the intersection point
between the trays.
The sequence of specifying cable trays is to proceed from the main side to the branch side.
In the case of the diagram below, specify the main-side tray for P1, and specify the branch-
side tray direction for P2.
- If the sizes of perpendicular trays differ, match to the width of the main tray, as illustrated below.
- If the trays are not perpendicular, X branch trays are not drawn.
[5] Vertical tray

- Draw [V tray].
Electricity -137
- Draw only on the plan view.

- Input elevation 1 (low elevation), and elevation 2 (high elevation).
- Drawing cannot proceed if elevation 1 (low elevation), and elevation 2 (high elevation) are not
input.
[6] In/out bend cable tray

- Specify two trays in the cross sectional view to draw an in/out side bend tray.
This draw specification is only possible in the cross sectional view.
- The shape of in/out side bend trays can be selected from the In/Out Side Bend Tray Selection
dialog box.
- If the bend angle is not 90 degree, it is drawn as illustrated below, regardless of the selected
shape.
3. Tray width selection

Set the tray width from the list, or by manual input.
The input range is 100~2,000.
4. Main girder height selection

Set the main girder height from the list, or by manual input.
The input range is 50~150.
5. Material selection
Select the material from the list.
[1] melamine
[2] Hot dip galvanization
[3] SUS
[4] Aluminum
[5] Galvanized steel plate
[6] Epoxy resin powder
[7] Z A M
[8] Super dima
6. Elevation input
- Make the underside of the tray be the elevation standard position.
Use the mouse to specify elevation.
- The elevation can be specified with the mouse on the cross sectional view.

- The elevation cannot be specified with the mouse on the cross sectional view.
- The value from elevation input is enabled.
Electricity -138
8. Draw connection
Connections can be drawn.
- When in independent or continuous drawing, connections can be drawn to previously drawn
cable trays.
- After specifying the tray to connect to, select branch tray from the Branch Tray Selection dialog
box.
- Even if branch is selected, it can only be drawn when perpendicular to the main tray.
- If straight tray connection is selected when the trays are not perpendicular, branch trays are not
drawn, and straight trays are drawn butted together.
- Specify a previously drawn tray and move the mouse in the same direction as the tray to extend
or shorten it.
- The draw angle for the specified tray follows the correction angle.
Refer to the explanation of Context.

- Connections cannot be drawn.
9. Surface
The standard for the specified point is the face if the box is checked, or center reference if it is
unchecked.
10. Elevation 1
Input elevation 1 (low elevation) when the tray is vertical.
11. Elevation 2
Input elevation 2 (high elevation) when the tray is vertical.

Set the draw pattern of the tray.
- The cross sectional view is only drawn in 2-line when [Draw girders in detail] is set in advanced
settings.
Electricity -139
[1] Set the draw pattern.

- Draw only main girder.
- Draw Main/Sub girder.
- Draw girder in details.
[2] Input the width when drawing girders in detail

- Input main girder width.
- Input secondary girder width.
[3] Set secondary girder draw position

- Place in equal 300mm pitches from center.
- Draw in 300 mm pitches from an position 150mm from the start point.
- Draw in 300 mm pitches from an position 150mm from the end point.
Electricity -140
1.Elbow selection
Select shape to draw Elbowes.
2.T branch selection

Select shape to draw T branches.
3. In/Out bend
tray Select shape to draw in/out bend trays.
Two types can be set for in/out bend tray 1, with radius R=400 and R=600.
Context explanation
1. Context Explains commands in the context menu
1 Complete
- Complete drawing when using [Straight tray] - [Continuous].
2 Setting the base angle

- Input angle
Specify the angle to layout.

3 Setting the correction angle

- 15 degree
Electricity -141
- 30 degree
- 45 degree
- 90 degree
Warnings
1. Spacing of secondary girders

When the total cable tray length is L
Dimension A: 300 (fixed)
Dimension B: L/300 = n(number of secondary girders) remainder (2xB)
2. Elbow
T branch
In/Out bend
Drawing trays
The number of trays specified for the both the main side and branch side is the number of remaining
lines.
2. Draw angle and branch

The Elbow tray branch angle becomes 30 degree, 45 degree, 60 degree, or 90 degree, according to
the correction angle. For other angles, branches are not generated, so trays are drawn directly
connected.
For T branches, X branches, and in/out bend trays, branches are not generated at angles other than
90 degree.
3. Continuous drawing
When drawing continuously, the drawing becomes inappropriate if there is bending in directions that
would not normally be built.
There are complicated aspects to the relationship between cable trays and secondary girders, and
care is required.
When drawing continuously, points may be generated at bends where no branch trays etc. are
generated (horizontal/vertical bends etc.). To avoid outputting these points, change the output
settings to not output point elements.
4. Connections in cross section

Of the cross sectional views (front and side), specify drawing of in/out bend tray in the cross section
viewed from the side. Drawing is not possible if positioning is displaced in the depth direction.
Electricity -142
Operation example
1. Operation example for laying out an Elbow
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Straight tray 1 specification” -> “Straight

tray 2 specification”
[1] Specify straight tray 1
Specify a straight tray [1].
Specifies a straight tray [2].
2. Example of drawing a T branch
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Straight tray 1 specification” -> “Straight

tray 2 specification”
Specifies a straight tray [2].
Electricity -143
3. Operation example for laying out vertical trays
Command toolbar
(1) “Layout point specification” -> “Direction

specification”
[1] Specify the vertical tray layout point.
Specify the vertical tray layout point [1].
[2] Specify the layout direction.
Specify the vertical tray direction [2].
4. Operation example for continuous drawing of straight trays

Specify the tray elevation in the front window
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Start point specification” -> “Direction

specification”
[1] Specify the start point.
Specify the straight tray start point [1].
[2] Specify the connection point.
Specify the straight tray bend point [2].
[3] Specify the elevation.
Specify the elevation of the straight tray in the front window [3].
Specify the same point as the straight tray end point [7].
Alternatively, specify Complete [8] from the context menu.
Electricity -144
5. Operation example for drawing a T branch connection to a previously drawn straight tray
Command toolbar

specification”
Specify the connection start point [1] on the previously
[2] drawn straight tray.
Branch tray selection
Specify the T branch shape [2] from the Branch Tray
[3] Selection dialog box.
Specify end point.
Specify the straight tray end point [3].
Electricity -145
Electricity/Raceway
Raceway
Function Overview
Draw a raceway.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Raceway (L)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
If drawing something other than a box
If drawing a box
2. Selection of parts
Select drawing parts.
[1] Straight raceway
Draw the cable tray using specifications P1 and P2 (instructions can be given for both plane
and section)

Draw continuously while generating elbows at the bends.
The angle of the generated elbow is the raceway bend angle 15 degree, 30 degree, 45
degree, or 90 degree.
Tray bend angle
If specifying a section
The bend points can be specified on the cross sectional view to draw.
Electricity -146
Electricity/Raceway
The only draw angle is 90 degree.
- The raceway draw dimensions at the output stage are drawn as a square column of
1.5mmx1.5mm.
(The above dimensions are fixed, regardless of the scale).
[2] Elbow
- If two raceways are specified, draw an elbow corresponding to the angle.
On the plan view, angles other than 15 degree, 30 degree, 45 degree and 90 degree cannot
be drawn.
Tray bend angle
Two shapes can be selected on the cross sectional view.
Draw on the cross sectional view by specifying two trays. The only draw angle is 90 degree.
[3] T elbow
- When two trays are specified that cross at 90 degree, draw a T elbow at the intersection point
between the raceways. (Only perpendicular raceways can be specified)
The sequence of specifying raceways is to proceed from the main side to the branch side.
In the case of the diagram below, specify the main-side raceway for P1, and specify the
branch-side raceway and the remaining side direction for P2 (specification is only possible in
the plan window).
[4] X elbow
- When two raceways are specified that cross at 90 degree, draw an X elbow at the intersection
point between the raceways. (Only perpendicular raceways in the plan window can be
specified)
The sequence of specifying raceways is to proceed from the main side to the branch side.
In the case of the diagram below, specify the main-side raceway for P1, and specify the
branch-side raceway for P2
Electricity -147
Electricity/Raceway
[5] Box draw

- Draw a J. Box on a previously drawn raceway.
- For 1-way output/ 2-way output
Draw a J. Box on the specified raceway.
Specify one raceway, and the draw position.
- For 2-way/ 3-way/ 4-way output

- Draw a J. Box on the intersection point between two raceways.
Specify two raceways (in the same way as when specifying an elbow)
2-way output L
3-way output
4-way output
- The box draw dimensions at the output stage are drawn as a 2.5mm square.
(The above dimensions are fixed, regardless of the scale).
- J. Box can be drawn = O, J. Box cannot be drawn = x
Electricity -148
Electricity/Raceway
3. Size selection
Select the raceway size from the list.
[1] 40x30
[2] 40x45
Select the raceway material from the list.
[1] Other
[2] melamine
[3] Hot dip galvanizatuion
[4] SUS
[5] Aluminum
[6] Galvalume steel sheet
[7] Z A M
[8] Super dima
5. Scale factor specification

Specify the layout scale factor for the raceway.
◆ The elevation standard position for the raceway is the bottom edge.
6. Elevation input
- Make the underside of the raceway the elevation standard position.
- The elevation can be specified with the mouse on the cross sectional view.

- The elevation cannot be specified with the mouse on the cross sectional view.
- The value from elevation input is enabled.
8. Draw connection
Connections can be drawn.
- When in independent or continuous drawing, connections can be drawn to previously drawn
raceways.
- Drawing is only possible when perpendicular to the main raceway.

- Connections cannot be drawn.
9. Box type selection

Select the box type from the list.
[1] 1-way output
[2] 2-way output
[3] 2-way output L
[4] 3-way output
[5] 4-way output
Electricity -149
Electricity/Raceway
Context explanation
1 Complete
- Complete drawing when using [Straight tray] - [Continuous].
2 Set base angle

- Input angle

3 Set adjust angle

- 15 degree
- 30 degree
- 45 degree
- 90 degree
Warnings
1. Elbow
Drawing T elbows The number of raceways specified for the both the main side and branch side is
the number of remaining lines.

The elbow branch angle becomes 15 degree, 30 degree, 45 degree, or 90 degree, according to the
correction angle.
Drawing is impossible at other angles.
For T elbows, X elbows, elbows are not generated at angles other than 90 degree.
Electricity -150
Electricity/Raceway
Operation example
1. Operation example for laying out elbows
Command toolbar
(1) “Raceway 1 specification” -> “Raceway 2

specification”
[1] Set straight raceway 1
Specify a straight raceway [1]
2. Example of drawing a T elbow
Command toolbar
(1) “Raceway 1 specification” -> “Raceway 2

specification”
Electricity -151
Electricity/Raceway
3. Example of drawing a box
Command toolbar
(1) Draw 1-way output, 2-way output

Draw 1-way output
[1] Specify a straight raceway.
[2] Specify the draw position.
Specify the draw position [2].
Draw 2-way output
[3] Specify a straight raceway.
(1) Draw 2-way output L, 3-way output, and

4-way output
Draw 2-way L output
Draw 3-way output
Draw 4-way output
Electricity -152
Electricity/Raceway
4. Operation example for continuous drawing of straight raceways

Specify the raceway elevation in the front window
Command toolbar
(1) Drawing raceways

Specify the start point [1] of a straight raceway
Specify a bend point [2] on a straight raceway.
This specifies the elevation of the straight raceway in the front
window [3].
This specifies the same point as the straight raceway end point
[7].
5. Operation example for drawing a T elbow connection to a previously drawn straight raceway
Command toolbar

specification”
This specifies the connection start point [1] on the previously
drawn straight raceway.
[2] Specify end point.
Specify the end point of a straight raceway [3].
Electricity -153
Electricity/Bus Duct
Bus Duct
Function Overview
Draw a Bus Duct.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Bus Duct (B)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
For other than a vertical Bus Duct / Plug-in switch box
For a vertical Bus Duct
For a plug-in switch box
[1] Straight Bus Duct
Draw continuously while generating elbows at the bends. (Instructions can be given for both plan and
section)
The only angle for the generated elbows is 90 degree.
[2] Elbow
Specify two perpendicular Bus Ducts and connect them by drawing an elbow. (Instructions can be given
for both plan and section)
The only angle for the generated elbows is 90 degree, so if the intersection is not a right angle, the elbow
is not created.
Draw Width (W), Height (H), distribution system, rated current, and conductor type, according to the
information for the main side Bus Duct.
Electricity -154
[3] Tee
Specify two perpendicular Bus Ducts and connect them by creating a tee. (Instructions can be given for
both plan and section)
- If the ducts are not at right angles, the tee is not drawn.
[4] Cross
Specify two perpendicular Bus Ducts and connect them by creating a cross. (Instructions can be given
for both plan and section)
- If the ducts are not at right angles, the cross is not drawn.
[5] V bus duct

Draw a [Vertical Bus Duct]. Draw only on the plan view.
Input elevation 1 (low elevation), and elevation 2 (high elevation).
Drawing cannot proceed if elevation 1 (low elevation), and elevation 2 (high elevation) are not input.
[6] Offset
Draw the horizontal offset and vertical offset.
Specify two parallel bus ducts routes and draw the offset to connect them.
(Specification is possible in both plan and section)
The width (W), height (H), distribution method, rated current, and conductor type are drawn in the
information for the specified bus duct.
[7] Expansion
Draw “Expansion”.
Specify a straight bus duct and draw an expansion.
[8] F-type expansion

Draw an [F-type expansion].
Specify a straight bus duct and draw an F-type expansion.
[9] Plug-in switch box

Draw a [Plug-in switch box].
Specify a straight bus duct and draw an F-type expansion.
The rated capacity of the plug-in switch box breaker is drawn with the OTB capacity value.
Electricity -155
3. Distribution system selection

Set the wiring method from the list.
[1] 3-wires
[2] 4-wire type
4. Rated current selection

Set the rated current selection from the list.
[1] 200
[2] 300
[3] 400
[4] 500
[5] 600
[6] 700
[7] 800
[8] 1,000
[9] 1,200
[10] 1,500
[11] 1,700
[12] 2,000
[13] 2,500
[14] 3,000
[15] 3,500
[16] 4,000
[17] 4,500
[18] 5,000
[19] 6,000
5. Conductor type selection

Select the conductor type from the list.
[1] Other
[2] Aluminum conductor
[3] Copper conductor
6. Elevation input
The elevation base position for the Bus Duct can be switched between the top, center, or bottom.

8. Elevation 1
9. Elevation 2
10. Capacity selection

Select the plug-in switch box breaker rated capacity from the list.
(1) None
(2) 15A
(3) 30A
(4) 50A
(5) 100A
(6) 225A
(7) 400A
(8) 600A
Electricity -156
1. Size settings for straight parts

Set straight Bus Duct width (W) and height (H).
This indicates the size corresponding to the wiring method, rated current, and conductor type set
in the Command toolbar.
2. Name of each part

Select the parts for the bus duct.
Sizes are displayed according to the wiring method, rated current, and conductor type set in the
command toolbar.
3. Setting values for each part

The setting values for the parts selected in 2 above are displayed.
4. Description of each part

The values set in 3 above are described graphically.
Context explanation
[1] Complete
- This completes the drawing of continuous straight Bus Duct.
[2] Set angle adjustment

- 15 degree
- 30 degree
- 45 degree
- 90 degree
- No adjustment
[3] Set standard level

- Top
- Center
- Bottom
Electricity -157
[4] Set base angle

- Input angle

Warnings
1. Drawing branch parts

The number of Bus Ducts specified for the both the main side and branch side is the number of
remaining lines.
When the drawing of elbows, tees and crosses is specified on the plan view, and the elevation is
specified on the front or side view, straight Bus Ducts that do not have the same depth dimension
cannot be specified.

For elbows, tees and crosses, elbows are not generated at draw angles other than 90 degree.
Electricity -158
Operation example
1. Operation example for drawing a straight Bus Duct
Command toolbar
(1) Specify start point -> Specify continuation

point
Specify the straight Bus Duct start point [1].
[2] Pick the continuation point.
Specify the continuation point [2] of the straight Bus Duct with a
[3] double click.
Specify the start point.
[4] Specify the straight Bus Duct start point [3].
Pick the continuation point.
[5] Specify the continuation point [4] of the straight Bus Duct with a
double click.
Specify the continuation point [6] of the straight Bus Duct with a
double click.
[7] Drawing complete.
2. Operation example for drawing an elbow
Command toolbar
(1) “Bus Duct 1 specification” -> “Bus Duct 2

specification”
[1] Specify straight Bus Duct 1.
Specify the straight Bus Duct [1].
Specify the straight Bus Duct [2].
Electricity -159
3. Operation example for drawing a tee
Commandtoolbar
(1) “Bus Duct 1 specification” -> “Bus Duct 2

specification”
[1] Specify the main side duct.
Specify the straight Bus Duct [1] on the main side.
[2] Specify the branch side duct.
Specify the branch side straight Bus Duct [2].
4. Operation example for continuously drawing a straight Bus Duct

Specify the Bus Duct elevation in the front window
Commandtoolbar

point
Plan operation [1] Specify the start point.
Specify the straight Bus Duct bend point [2].
Specify the elevation of the straight Bus Duct in the front
[4] window [3].
[5] Specify the straight Bus Duct bend point [4].
Front view operation
Specify the same point as the straight Bus Duct end point [7].
Electricity -160
5. Operation example of drawing offsets
Commandtoolbar
(1) Plan and front view operation

“Specify bus duct 1” -> “Specify Bus duct
2”
Connect bus ducts drawn on parallel lines.

(1) Specify bus duct 1.
Specify straight bus duct (1).
(2) Specify bus duct 2.
(3) Drawing complete.
6. Operation example of drawing expansions
<Command toolbar
(1) “Specify bus duct 1” -> “Specify draw Draw an expansion on the straight bus duct.
position”
(1) Specify a bus duct.
Electricity -161
(2) “Specify draw position” -> “Specify draw Draw an expansion on the straight bus duct.
direction”
(2) Specify the draw position.
Specify a position on straight bus duct (2).
(3) Specify the draw direction.
Specify the draw direction (3).
7. Operation example of drawing a plug-in switch box
Commandtoolbar
(1) “Specify bus duct 1” -> “Specify draw Draw a plug-in switch box on the straight bus duct.
position”
(1) Specify a bus duct.
(2) Specify the draw position.

Specify the draw position of the plug-in switch box.
Electricity -162
Electricity/Metal Duct
Metal Duct
Function Overview
Draw a Metal Duct.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Metal duct (M)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
For other than a vertical Metal Duct
For a vertical Metal Duct
For a junction box
1. Command Selection Commands related to route creation can be selected.
2. Selection of parts Select drawing parts.

[1] Straight duct
Draw continuously while generating Elbowes at the bends. (Instructions can be given for both plan and
section)
The only angle for the generated elbows is 90 degree.
Electricity -163
[2] Elbow
Specify two perpendicular Metal Ducts and connect them by creating an Elbow. (Instructions can be
given for both plan and section)
The only angle for the generated Elbowes is 90 degree, so if the intersection is not a right angle, the
Elbow is not created.
Draw Width (W), Height (H), and material according to the information for the main side Bus Duct.
[3] T branch
Specify two perpendicular Metal Ducts and connect them by creating a T branch. (Instructions can be
If the ducts are not at right angles, the T branch is not drawn.
[4] X branch
Specify two perpendicular Metal Ducts and connect them by creating an X branch. (Instructions can be
If the ducts are not at right angles, the X branch is not drawn.
Electricity -164
[5] Vertical duct

Draw a [Vertical Metal Duct]. Draw only on the plan view.
Input elevation 1 (low elevation), and elevation 2 (high elevation).
Drawing cannot proceed if elevation 1 (low elevation), and elevation 2 (high elevation) are not input.
[6] Junction box

Draw a [junction box] Draw the plan view only.
- Junction box (1-way)

Specify a straight bus duct to draw.

- Junction box (2-way L)



3.Size selection
Set the width of the Metal Duct from [ list, or by manual input],or[fixed size].
The input range is 1~2000 (list, or by manual input).
4.Width (W) setting

Set the width of the Metal Duct from the list, or by manual input.
5.Height (H) setting

Set the height of the Metal Duct from the list, or by manual input.
6.Material selection
Set the material selection from the list.
[1] Other
[2] melamine
[3] Hot dip galvanization
[4] galvanized
[5] Stainless steel
Electricity -165
7. Elevation input
The elevation base position for the Metal Duct can be switched between the top, center, or
bottom.

9.Elevation 1
10.Elevation 2
11.Advanced settings
Set Metal Duct size.
[1] Metal duct selection

Select the width of a metal duct in system parts.
[2] Calculation value setting

Set the values for a metal duct of a size not in the system parts, then set the value to add to the
junction box.
[3] Name of each part

Select the metal duct parts.
[4] Size settings

Set the sizes for the metal duct parts selected in [3].
Make settings for junction boxes relative to the metal duct widths selected in [1].
12.Box settings
Draw a [junction box] Draw the plan view only.
Electricity -166
Elbow part selection Select the shape to draw Elbow parts.

The selected part is displayed in a yellow frame.
[1] Draw an Elbow (OA/IA).
[2] Draw an Elbow (OA/IS).
T branch part selection Select the shape to draw T branch parts.

[1] Draw a T branch (IA).
[2] Draw a T branch (IS).
X branch part selection Select the shape to draw X branch parts.

[1] Draw an X branch (IA).
[2] Draw an X branch (IS).
Context explanation
[1] Complete
- This completes the drawing of continuous straight Bus Duct.
Electricity -167
[2] Set angle adjustment

- 15 degree
- 30 degree
- 45 degree
- 90 degree
- No adjustment
[3] Set standard level

- Top
- Center
- Bottom
[4] Set base angle

- Input angle

Warnings
1. Drawing branch parts The number of Metal Ducts specified for the both the main side and branch side is the number of
remaining lines.
When the drawing of L, T, and X branches is specified on the plan view, and the elevation is
specified on the front or side view, straight Bus Ducts that do not have the same depth dimension
cannot be specified.
2. Draw angle and branches For L, T, and X branches, elbows are not generated at draw angles other than 90 degree.
Electricity -168
Operation example
1. Operation example for drawing a straight Metal Duct
Command toolbar

point
Specify the straight Metal Duct start point [1].
Specify the continuation point [2] of the straight Metal Duct with
[3] a double click.
Specify the start point.
[4] Specify the straight Metal Duct start point [3].
[5] Specify the continuation point [4] of the straight Metal Duct with
a double click.
Specify the continuation point [6] of the straight Metal Duct with
a double click.
2. Operation example for drawing an Elbow
Command toolbar
(1) “Metal Duct 1 specification” -> “Metal Duct

2 specification”
[1] Specify straight metal Bus Duct 1.
Specify straight Metal Duct [1].
Specify straight Metal Duct [2].
3. Operation example for drawing a T branch
Command toolbar
(1) “Metal Duct 1 specification” -> “Metal Duct

2 specification”
[1] Specify the main side duct.
Specify straight Metal Duct [1] on the main side.
[2] Specify the branch side duct.
Specify straight Metal Duct [2] on the branch side.
Electricity -169
4. Operation example for continuously drawing a straight metal Bus Duct

Specify the Metal Duct elevation in the front window
Command toolbar

point
Specify the straight Bus Duct bend point [2].
Specify the elevation of the straight Metal Duct in the front
[4] window [3].
[5] Specify the straight Metal Duct bend point [4].
Specify the same point as the straight Metal Duct end point [7].
Electricity -170
5. Operation example of drawing a junction box
<Command toolbar>
(1) “Specify metal duct 1” -> “Specify metal Draw a 4-way junction box.
duct 2”
(1) Specify metal duct 2.
Specify straight metal duct (1).
(2) Specify the duct to connect to.

Specify straight metal duct (2).
Electricity -171
Electricity/Ventilation Pipe
Ventilation Pipe
Function Overview
Draw a Ventilation Pipe.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Ventilation Pipe (P)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
[1] Ventilation Pipe
Draw the Ventilation Pipe using specifications P1 and P2 (specifications can only be given on
plan)

Draw continuously while generating elbows at the bends.
The angles of the generated elbows are determined by the bend angle of the Ventilation
Pipe.
The draw angle follows the correction angle (45 degree or 90 degree).
Refer to the explanation of Context.
Bend angle of the Ventilation Pipe (if FL was not changed)
Electricity -172
Bend angle of the Ventilation Pipe (if FL was changed)
After specifying the second point, if the Ventilation Pipe bend angle is not 45 degree or 90
degree,
it is always rounded to 45 degree or 90 degree.
While drawing a Ventilation Pipe, it is possible to select vent parts from the Command dialog
box.
[2] Elbow
- If two Ventilation Pipes are specified, draw an elbow corresponding to the angle to connect them.
- If the angle formed by two Ventilation Pipes with no elevation difference between them is not 45
degree or 90 degree, they cannot be connected.
- If the angle formed by two Ventilation Pipes with an elevation difference between them is not 0
degree, 45 degree or 90 degree, they cannot be connected.
- If the angle formed by two Ventilation Pipes with an elevation difference between them is 0
degree, they cannot be connected if they do not lie on a single straight line.
- If the elevation difference needed to draw an elbow between two Ventilation Pipes with an
elevation difference between them is not available, they cannot be connected.
[Elevation difference needed to draw an elbow]
- For 100φ The elevation difference must be at least 200.1mm.
- The elbow material must be the same as the material of Ventilation Pipe 1.
Electricity -173
[3] Socket / nipple

- Specify two Ventilation Pipes, or specify one Ventilation Pipe and draw a socket and nipple to
connect it.
- Two Ventilation Pipes with no elevation difference between them cannot be connected if they do
not lie on a single straight line.
- The socket and nipple material must be the same as the material of Ventilation Pipe 1.
[4] Vent cap / hood

- Specify a Ventilation Pipe and draw a vent cap hood.
- Vertical Ventilation Pipes cannot be specified.
Select the Ventilation Pipe material from the list.
4.Size selection
Select the size from the list.
5.Base position selection

Select the base position from the list.
Draw so that the elevation set for FL becomes the set value for the base position.
6.FL setting
Set the draw elevation.
The value given under Properties for the elevation is the center elevation.
7. Draw a hood
When drawing a Ventilation Pipe, you can switch between whether or not to automatically draw vent parts.
- It is possible to select vent parts from the Command dialog box.
Refer to Description of the Command dialog box
- The selected vent part is drawn on completion.

- The selected vent part is not drawn on completion.
8. Continuous draw
Switching between continuous draw and independent draw is possible.
- Draw continuously while drawing Ventilation Pipes and elbows (these may not be generated,
depending on the angle).
Electricity -174

- Independently draw a Ventilation Pipe.
9.Detail settings
Set the shape and properties of the vent part.
- Pipe hood
[1] Set the dimensions for drawing the pipe hood.
[2] Set the pipe hood material.
[3] Set the pipe hood type.
- Vent cap
[1] Set the dimensions for drawing the vent cap.
[2] Set the vent cap material.
[3] Set the vent cap type.
Electricity -175
Vent part selection

Select the vent part type.
Draw the pipe hood.
[2] Draw the vent cap.
Context explanation
1. Context The displayed content of the context menu is explained.
[1] Set base angle

- Input angle

[2] Set adjust angle

- 15 degree
- 30 degree
- 45 degree
Electricity -176
Warnings
1. Draw drawing
Only the plan view can be drawn with this command, but CG display can be used.
(However, CG display cannot be used with LT products)
2. Draw layer
The draw layer for the Ventilation Pipe follows the toolbar layer.
3. Jump
The items that can be set for jumping are as follows:
- Ventilation Pipe
- Style (line color, line type, line width)
[2] Material
[3] Dia
[4] FL
Operation example
1. Operation example for laying out elbows
Command toolbar
(1) “Ventilation Pipe 1 specification” ->

“Ventilation Pipe s specification”
[1] Specify Ventilation Pipe 1
Specify Ventilation Pipe [1]
2. Operation example for socket and nipple lay out
Command toolbar

“Ventilation Pipe 2 specification” ->
“Draw direction specification”
[3] Specify the draw direction.
Specify the socket and nipple draw direction [3].
Electricity -177
3. Example of drawing a vent cap hood
Command toolbar
Command dialog box

“Ventilation Pipe s specification”
Electricity -178
Electricity/Floor Duct
Floor Duct
Function Overview
Draw junction boxes at intersection points with the Floor Duct.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Drawing Systems (S)] -> [Floor Duct (F)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
2. Draw method selection

“Floor Duct”, and “J. Box” drawing can be selected.
[1] Duct draw
Floor Ducts can be drawn by specifying two points.
[2] Draw J.box
Draw a J. Box on the Floor Duct intersection point.
3. Size
Set the Floor Duct size.
4. Number
Set the number of Floor Ducts.
1. Draw color
Select the draw color to use when drawing with the Floor Duct command.
2. Draw line type

Select the draw line type to use when drawing with the Floor Duct command.
3. Draw line width

Select the draw line width to use when drawing with the Floor Duct command.
Electricity -179
Context explanation
1. Context
Explains commands in the context menu
[1] Complete
- “Complete” is invalid.
[2] Setting the base angle

- Input angle
- This is invalid for a J. Box.
Warnings
1. Drawing Floor Ducts

Floor Ducts can be drawn by specifying two points.
2. Drawing J.Boxes
Specify the Floor Duct outline to draw a J. Box at the Floor Duct intersection point. However, this only
applies where there is an intersection with the Floor Duct.
3. Draw layer
The draw layer for the Floor Duct follows the toolbar layer.
The draw layer for the J. Box follows the Floor Duct draw layer.
4. Draw drawing
Only the plan view can be drawn with this command.
Electricity -180
Operation example
1. Operation example for drawing three Floor Ducts of size F-5
(1) “Draw Floor Duct”

[1] Specify the draw start point and end point.
Specify the draw start point and end point.
2. Operation example for drawing a J. Box
(1) “Draw J. Box”

[1] Specify the frame of the Floor Duct intersection point.
Box specify the Floor Duct intersection point.
It is not possible to draw a J. Box at the intersection point

between Floor Ducts with differing sizes and numbers of ducts.
Electricity -181
Let’s modifying a system
Modifying a System
1 Number of Cable Core
2 End Cover
3 Elision Symbol
4 Edit wire
5 Change wire installation method
6 Deleting Wiring Information
7 Hidden line
8 Select 1-Line/2-Lines
9 Edit Route
Electricity/Number of Cable Core
Number of Cable Core

Function Overview
Draw cable bundle symbols and HVAC pipe symbols for wiring or raceways.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Modifying a System (H)] -> [Number of Cable Core (J)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Command Selection Select commands related to Modifying a Systeming.
2. Draw/Edit function selection

Select draw or edit cable bundles.
[1] Draw
Draw new wiring.
[2] One more
Increase previously drawn cable bundles by one.
[3] One less
Decrease previously drawn cable bundles by one.
[4] Move
Move previously drawn cable bundles.
[5] Size change
Resize previously drawn cable bundles.
[6] Sorting
Sort multiple drawn numbers of cable cores in one wiring group, to make one number of cable
cores in one wiring group.
3. Draw method selection When using “Draw”, select the drawing method for wires.
[1] Manually input number of cable core
Draw by manual input of the number of cable bundles.
Multiple numbers of cable cores can be drawn for the same wiring.
[2] Auto-calculate number of cable core of switching circuler
Draw by automatic calculation of cable bundles for lighting and receptacle circuits.
This is applicable to luminaires, receptacles, or ventilation fans.
However, power receptacles, medical receptacles, and receptacles for explosive atmospheres
are excluded.
Circuits for data communications, disaster prevention, security and similar applications are not
subject to auto-calculation.
4. Wire selection method selection Select how to select wires when using “Draw” or “Size change”.
[1] Individual
Draw the set number of Number of Cable Cores.
[2] Batch
Draw the set number of Number of Cable Cores in one batch within the frame.
The draw position for the cable bundles is centered on the longest line or arc within the same
wiring group.
5. Multiple draw specifications Set whether or not to draw multiple numbers of cable cores on one wiring group when drawing
numbers of cable cores.
If the check box is checked, multiple numbers of cable cores can be drawn on one wiring group.
6. Detail button Open the Number of Cable Core Advanced Settings dialog box to set advanced settings for drawing.
Electricity-183
1. Shape display Display the currently set shape.
2. Number of Cable Core selection Select Number of Cable Cores.
3. Bundling method specification

Specify the bundling method for cable bundles (the number to bundle together).
Separate bundled numbers with commas.
4. Ground wire selection Select ground Number of Cable Cores.
5. Draw type selection Select the draw type (cable bundle, HVAC pipe).
6. Remark specification Specify whether or not to draw remark strings.

Draw the set remark text.
Don’t draw the set remark text.
7. Remark text specification Make remark settings.

Specify remark strings.
8. Scale factor specification Specify the size (scale factor) to use when laying out cable bundles or HVAC pipes.
The size of the remark text and the text offset are unrelated to scale factor.
Electricity-184
Description of the Number of Cable Core Advanced Settings dialog box
1. Number of cable core, length specification

Specify the length (at the release of drawing stage) of Number of Cable Cores.
2. Number of cable core ,angle specification

Specify the angle (degree) for Number of Cable Cores.
3. Number of cable core ,spacing specification

Specify the pitch (at the release of drawing stage) between Number of Cable Cores.
4. Bundle pitch specification

Specify the pitch (at the release of drawing stage) between one bundled cable bundle and
the next.
5. Basic bundled number specification

Specify the number of wires to bundle together, as the basis for recalculation.
In the Command dialog box, recalculate with the set value every time “cable bundle” is
changed, and display the result under “Bundling method”.
For example, if 10 is selected as the number of cable bundles and the standard
bundled number is specified as 3, the bundling method is 3-3-3-1.
Do not automatically calculated and display the bundling method in the Command
dialog box.
The set value is not used.
6. Wiring – number of ground wires spacing specification

Specify the pitch (at the release of drawing stage) between Number of Cable Cores and
ground Number of Cable Cores.
7. Number of ground wires ,length specification

Specify the length of ground Number of Cable Cores (at the release of drawing stage).
8. Number of ground wires , angle specification

Specify the ground Number of Cable Core angle (degree).
9. Number of ground wires ,spacing specification

Specify the pitch between ground Number of Cable Cores (at the release of drawing
stage).
Electricity-185
10. Number of cable core angle specification

Specify the angle (arc) (degree) when drawing Number of Cable Cores on arc-shaped
wires.
11. Number of ground wires , angle specification
Specify the angle (arc) (degree) when drawing ground Number of Cable Cores on arc-
shaped wires.
12. Radius of air conditioning pipe symbol specification

Specify the radius of the HVAC pipe symbol (at the release of drawing stage).
13. Angle symbol specification

Specify the angle (degree) of the HVAC pipe symbol.
14. Scale factor display

Display the scale factor.
15. Confirm change in number of cable core

Set the display of a confirmation message when changing Number of Cable Cores.
[1] Don’t
Don't display a confirmation message when drawing a cable bundle symbol which
differs from the number of wires in a cable bundle that has already been drawn.
[2] Do
Display a confirmation message.
16. Reference button

Get the size from a previously drawn cable bundle or HVAC pipe.
17. Initialize button

Reset all settings to defaults.
Initialization clears currently specified values and uses the values prepared by the system
(the state immediately after installation).
1. Text position setting

Set the position of remark text.
[1] Fixed
Draw remark text at the position set by the drawn image portion.
[2] Free
Draw remark text in a free position
2. Text angle setting
Electricity-186
Set the base for the text angle.

[1] Horizontal standard
Always draw remark text horizontally.
[2] Wiring criteria
Draw remark text parallel to wire
3. Text offset specification

Specify text offset.
[1] Set the text offset in the horizontal direction from the wiring.
[2] Set the text offset in the vertical direction from the wiring.
4. Draw image
Set the position of remark text to use when the text position is “Fixed”.
Only one direction of text position can be specified. The draw image is also changed by
the setting.
[Text position of horizontal wire]

[1] Set the draw direction to use when the angle of the cable bundle to draw is in the
hatched range in the diagram below (including on the boundary line).
[2] The positional relationship between the text and the cable bundle is categorized as in
the diagrams below, according to the settings for wire angle and text angle.
[Text position of V wire]

[1] Set the draw direction to use when the angle of the cable bundle to draw is in the hatched
range in the diagram below (including on the boundary line).
Electricity-187
[2] The positional relationship between the text and the cable bundle is categorized as in the
diagrams below, according to the settings for wire angle and text angle.
1. Boundary button
Specify which cable bundle direction to use for wires on the boundary lines of 45 degree, 90 degree
or 135°. The cable bundle direction is judged by the display color (green, yellow, red).
2. Invert button
Specify the cable bundle direction. The directions of all cable bundles of the color concerned are
inverted.
Electricity-188
3. Initialize button Reset all settings to defaults.

Initialization clears currently specified values and uses the values prepared by the system (the state
immediately after installation).
1. Draw settings for 2 cable bundle Make draw settings for cable bundles in wiring calculated as two cable bundles.
[1] Draw to all wires
Draw the cable bundles for all wiring calculated as two cable bundles.
[2] Only draw on the wire from the power supply side to the first equipment
Among the wiring calculated as two cable bundles, draw the cable bundles in the wiring
connecting from the power supply side to the first equipment.
(The above “power supply side” means a panel device, an up/down symbol, or a wire that is not
connected to any device on one side.)
However, if the first equipment is not a luminaire or ventilation fan, process as follows:
- If wiring is not branched from the first equipment
Draw a cable bundle until a luminaire or ventilation fan is found.
- If wiring is branched from the first equipment

Draw cable bundles for wiring to the first equipment.
Electricity-189
[3] Don't draw to all wires

Do not draw the cable bundles for all wiring calculated as two cable bundles.
[4] Draw for wiring to receptacles that require ground wires

In [2] and [3] above, check to draw cable bundles for wiring to receptacles that require a ground
wire, even if the wiring is judged to not be drawn.
2. Ground wire draw settings Make draw settings for ground Number of Cable Cores.
However, if the cable bundle is not drawn, the ground wire is not drawn, regardless of the setting
below.
Draw the number of ground Number of Cable Cores set in the Command dialog box (marked “A”
in the figure below) to all wiring.
[2] Draw only wiring other than that which connects to switches
Draw the number of ground Number of Cable Cores set in the Command dialog box (marked “A”
in the figure below) to wiring other than that which connects to switches.
3. Remark drawing settings Make remark draw settings.

However, if the cable bundle is not drawn, the remark is not drawn, regardless of the setting below.
Draw the remarks set in the Command dialog box (marked “B” in the figure below) to all wiring.
[2] Only draw on the wire from the power supply side to the first equipment
Draw the remarks set in the Command dialog box (marked “B” in the figure below) on wiring
which connects the power supply side and the first equipment.
Electricity-190
Warnings
1. Sorting number of cable cores

To handle multiple numbers of cable cores on one wire group, drawn with CADEWA Real 2015 English
Edition , in CADEWA Real English Edition Version1, use the sort function to merge the wiring numbers
into one wiring number on the wire group before transferring the data between versions.
* On CADEWA Real English Edition Version１ and earlier versions, it is not possible to handle multiple
number of cable cores on one wire group.
2. Terms Explain terms

[1] Only draw Number of Cable Cores for wiring or raceways.
[2] When moving, increasing or decreasing cable bundles, redraw cable bundles on the basis of the
information on cable bundles drawn in the specified wiring.
[3] When drawing multiple numbers of cable cores on the same wire, redraw based on the number
of cable cores information drawn later.
[4] When performing processes such as wiring pattern changes, the result is one number of cable
cores that is the same as the new drawing.
3. Switching Circuit cable bundles Automatic calculation

[1] Bundling method for cable bundles
Automatically calculated cable bundles are bundled according to the bundling method in the
Command dialog box (marked “C” in the figure below), so set the bundling method for each cable
bundle.
[2] Circuits which are subject to automatic calculation

Automatic calculation is applicable to the Switching Circuits of luminaires, receptacles, and
ventilation fans.
Therefore, circuits for data communications etc. are not subject to automatic calculation.
However, power receptacles, medical receptacles, and receptacles for explosive atmospheres
are excluded.
[3] Switching Circuits attributes

To make multiple luminaires or ventilation fans switch on and off with multiple switches, use the
Switching Circuit Command to assign the Switching Circuit attribute such as (i) and (ii) in the
figure below to luminaires or ventilation fans, then automatically calculate the cable bundles.
To make multiple luminaires or ventilation fans turn on and off with one switch, the cable
bundles can be calculated automatically even without assigning the Switching Circuit attribute.
Electricity-191
In a circuit where both luminaires or ventilation fans and receptacles are present, the cable
bundles for receptacles are calculated automatically as receptacles on the power supply feed
side if the Switching Circuit attribute is not assigned.
[4] Basic conditions for performing automatic calculation

The following are the minimum conditions which must be satisfied in order to perform automatic
calculations.
- A power supply, a switch, and a luminaire, ventilation fan, or receptacle must be present in
the circuit
- The Switching Circuit attribute must match between the switch and the luminaire,
ventilation fan, or receptacle.
The above “power supply” means a panel device, an up/down symbol, or a wire that is not
connected to any device on one side.
The following are examples.
If there are parts in the circuit other than a power supply, a switch, and a luminaire, ventilation fan,
or receptacle, they have no effect on the calculation of cable bundles.
In the case illustrated below, the box is not a part that influences the cable bundle calculation,
so the number of Number of Cable Cores connecting to the box is 0.
In the case illustrated below, the box is not a part that influences the cable bundle calculation,
but there is a luminaire before the box that is subject to cable bundle calculation, so the Number
of Cable Core is drawn.
[5] Conditions for circuits in which automatic calculation cannot be performed

The following are conditions in which cable bundles cannot be calculated automatically,
together with the error messages that are displayed in those cases.
Electricity-192
Electricity-193
Electricity-194
[6] Cable bundle calculation methods

The number of cable bundles varies with the types of switches and emergency lighting within
the Switching Circuit.
The cable bundle calculation methods can be categorized into the nine patterns in the table
below.
The table of switches for judging the patterns 0~7 above will be provided later.
For emergency lighting, it is easy to judge from the part name whether it is the built-in type or
the separate type, so they are not tabulated.
The table of applicable receptacles will be provided later.
The judgment of whether or not a ground wire is required for a receptacle follows the table
below.
Examples of cable bundle drawing are shown below for each pattern.
Electricity-195
Electricity-196
Electricity-197
Table of switches for judging the patterns above
Electricity-198
Electricity-199
Table of applicable receptacles
Electricity-200
Electricity-201
Electricity-202
Electricity-203
Electricity-204
Electricity-205
Electricity-206
Electricity-207
Electricity-208
Electricity-209
Electricity-210
Operation examples
1. Operation example for drawing three cable bundle symbols with remarks
Command toolbar
(1) “Inputting draw information”

[1] Click on the Detail button [1] on the Command toolbar.
Specify the text position [2] in the Number of Cable Core
Advanced Settings dialog box.
Text position Fixed
Text angle standard Wiring standard
Draw image In the setting area for the text position for
vertical wires, check on the right, then click on the OK button
[3].
Next, set the number of cable bundles and the remark text
Number of Cable Core 3
Bundling method 3
Ground wires 0
Remark Check the check box.
Remark text string 1.6
Electricity-211
(2) “Wire specification”

[2] Specify wires for drawing cable bundles.
Specify the wiring to draw cable bundles for.
(3) “Draw”
[3] Draw cable bundles.
Draw cable bundles and remarks at the same time.
Then, return to (2).
2. Operation example of automatic calculation and drawing of Switching Circuit cable bundles
Remarks and ground wires for cable bundles will not be drawn.
Draw the cable bundles for wiring calculated as two cable bundles.
Command toolbar
(1) “Inputting draw information”

[1] Set the draw information in the Command dialog.
Click on the Detail button [1] on the Command toolbar.
Specify automatic calculation [2] in the Number of Cable Core

Advanced Settings dialog box.
Check Draw to all wires [3].
Click the [OK] button [4].
Uncheck the Remark check box.

Set the number of ground wires [6] to 0.
Electricity-212
(2) “Wire specification or device specification”

[2] Switching Circuit wires for automatic calculation of cable
bundles
Alternatively, specify the device.
Specify the wiring [7] of the circuit to draw cable bundles for.
(3) “Confirmation of the cable bundle drawing

circuit and number of bundles”
[3] Confirm the cable bundle drawing circuit and number of
bundles.
The color of the circuit that cable bundles will be drawn changes
temporarily.
Cable bundles are drawn temporarily.
so use the Y key or the left mouse button to specify if correct.
(4) “Draw”
[4] Draw cable bundles.
Draw cable bundles.
Electricity-213
Electricity/End Cover
End Cover
Function Overview
Draw, move, or delete the End Cover symbol for the wire.

1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Modifying a System (H)] -> [End Cover (E)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Command Selection Select commands related to Modifying a Systeming.
2. Draw/Edit function Select draw or edit cable for End Cover symbols.
selection
[1] Draw
Draw the End Cover symbol.
[2] Move
Move the End Cover symbol.
[3] Del
Delete the End Cover symbol.
3. Draw method selection Select the draw method for End Cover symbols.
This is only enabled if “Draw” is selected under “2.Draw/edit function selection”
[1] Individual
Draw one End Cover symbol for each single wire.
[2] Batch
Draw End Cover symbols simultaneously for multiple wires.
4. Bundling specification Check box to draw multiple wires with one End Cover symbol.
This is only enabled if “Batch” is set under “3. Draw/edit function selection”
5. Draw method selection Select the draw method for wires to draw with End Cover symbols.
End Cover symbols are drawn at the intersection points between wires and the selection frame.
This is only enabled if “Batch” is set under “3. Draw/edit function selection”
[1] Rectangular (diagonal)
The processing frame is rectangular, and the range is specified by the diagonal.
[2] Rectangular (center)
The processing frame is rectangular, and the range is specified from the center.
[3] Circle
The range is specified as a circle.
[4] Straight line
The range is specified as a straight line.
If “4. Bundle specification” is checked, the setting is automatically set to straight line. [UP TO
HERE]
6. Style specification Set whether or not to refine the selection according to the installation method when selecting the wires on
which to draw End Covers.
If the box is checked, the selection is refined according to the content specified under 7. Condition
settings for wires subject to selection below.
Electricity-214
7. Condition settings for wires subject to selection Set the conditions for wires subject to selection.
This is only enabled if “Batch” is set under “3. Draw method selection”
When the Style button is clicked, the Selection Conditions (style) dialog box, as illustrated below,
opens.
[1] Installation method

Select the installation methods that are subject to selection. Multiple selections can be made.
Only wires with the installation method selected here can have End Cover symbols drawn.
[2] Select all button
Make all installation methods selected.
[3] Deselect all button
Make all installation methods unselected.
[4] Temporary settings button
The settings are only retained while the End Cover command is in effect. The settings are
discarded when the command terminates.
8. Symbol button Select the draw shape of the End Cover symbol.
9. Scale factor specification Specify the size (scale factor) of the End Cover symbol.
10. Details button Open the End Cover Size dialog box to specify the size to draw.
[1] End Cover type

There are the following four types of End Cover symbol.
The figures below show the setup methods for each Command toolbar.
- Circular (independent)
Electricity-215
- Circular (bundle)
- Rectangular (independent)
- Rectangular (bundle)
[2] Illustration
Illustrations of each type of End Cover symbol are shown.
[3] Length specification
Specify the lengths (mm) stated in the illustrations.
[4] Space specification
Specify the pitches (mm) stated in the illustrations.
[5] Height ratio specification
Specify the height percentage (%). Height percentage = arc H 1/arc H 2
[6] Reference button
Specify a previously drawn symbol to get its attributes, then set and display them in the dialog
box.
[7] Initialize button

Select the installation method for wires to draw with End Cover symbols changes to the selected
method.
A: Installation method
Select the installation method.
B: Detail settings
Open the Installation Method Style Setup dialog box and set the line color, line width, and line
type style for the installation method.
Refer to Wiring Command for details.
Electricity-216
2. Automatic setup specification Specify automatic settings for the installation method.
The automatically set installation method is determined by the installation method for the wire for
which the End Cover symbol is drawn. The combination of installation methods is set by clicking on
the Auto-set button to open the Auto-set of Installation Method dialog box, and making the settings.
[1] Installation methods subject to automatic setting

When specifying a wire, select the installation method to make subject to automatic setting.
If the checked installation method and the installation method for the wire specified for End
Cover drawing match, the specified wire is changed to the installation method specified in [3].
If a wire is specified with an installation method that is unchecked, the installation method is
changed to the one set as in the figure below.
[2] Draw direction

Specify the orientation of the End Cover symbol.
[3] Installation method for automatic setting
Specify the installation method for automatic setting.
Electricity-217
Context explanation
① Set the base angle.
A Specify the standard line to acquire the angle.

B Specify the angle by manual input.
C Initialize the base angle to 0 degrees.
Electricity-218
[2] Set the correction angle.

This correction angle is used to correct the straight line used when selecting wire groups for batch
drawing of End Covers.
Warnings
1. Frame batch drawing When frame specification of a batch is used, the draw direction of End Covers is arranged so that the
open side of the End Cover symbol faces into the range frame.
The installation method is changed for areas included within the frame.
2. Deletion
The installation method after an End Cover is deleted is restored to the installation method for the
direction in which the End Cover is closed.
3. Movement Movement is only possible on the wire on which the specified End Cover is drawn.
4. Horizontal offset length, vertical offset length

If an End Cover symbol has been drawn, deleted or moved, the horizontal and vertical offset length
attributes of the wiring element are automatically recalculated.
Horizontal and vertical offset length can be input using the Wire Length command. (Customers
who do not use material counting do not need to consider the horizontal and vertical offset length).
[1] When drawing an End Cover symbol

The processing method for horizontal and vertical offset length differs according to how many
parts a wiring element is divided into after the End Cover symbol is drawn.
- When split into 2 parts

If one wiring element is split into 2 parts with the independent or batch draw function, half of
the horizontal and vertical offset lengths that the wiring element had before the End Cover
was drawn is assigned to the wiring element attributes after the End Cover is drawn.
Electricity-219
- When split into 3 parts

If one wiring element is split into 3 parts with the batch draw function, one third of the
horizontal and vertical offset lengths that the wiring element had before the End Cover was
drawn is assigned to the wiring element attributes after the End Cover is drawn.
[2] When deleting an End Cover symbol

The horizontal and vertical offset lengths that the wiring elements on both sides of the End
Cover had before the End Cover was deleted are added together and added to the wiring
element attributes after the End Cover is deleted.
[3] When moving an End Cover symbol

The processing method differs between when the symbol is moved on the same wiring element,
and when it is moved on a different wiring element.
- When moved on the same wiring element

Basically, the horizontal and vertical offset lengths are not recalculated.
However, they are added if the symbol is moved to the end of a wiring element.
- When moved onto a different wiring element
Electricity-220
For the wiring element that the End Cover was moved from, the horizontal and vertical offset
lengths that the wiring element had before the End Cover was moved are added together
and assigned to the wiring element attributes.
For the wiring element that the End Cover was moved to, half of the horizontal and vertical
offset lengths that the wiring element had before the End Cover was moved are assigned to
the corresponding wiring element attributes after the End Cover is drawn.
Operation examples
1. Operation example of drawing the End Cover symbol independently and changing the installation method to ceiling
concealed
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Draw position specification”

[1] Specify the wire.
Specify the draw position [1] of the End Cover symbol on the
wire to be drawn.
Electricity-221
(2) “Specify installation method change

direction”
[2] Specify the method to change installation method.
Specify the direction [2] to change installation method for.
(3) “Specifying the draw direction”

[3] Specify the direction to draw the End Cover symbol.
Specify the draw direction [3] of the End Cover symbol.
Return to (1) after drawing the End Cover symbol.
2. Operation example of batch (frame) drawing End Cover symbols and changing the installation method to ceiling
concealed
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Draw range specification”

[1] Specify the range to draw End Cover symbols.
Specify the draw range with [1] and [2].
(2) “Draw”
[2] Draw the End Covers.
Draw the End Cover symbols at the intersection points
between the specified frame and the wires.
Electricity-222
3. Operation example of batch (straight line) drawing End Cover symbols and changing the installation method to
ceiling concealed
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Wire group selection”

[1] Use lines to select wire groups for which to draw End
Cover symbols.
Use the line with the start point and end point [1] and [2] to
select the wire group for which to draw End Cover symbols.
(2) “Specify installation method change

direction”
[2] Specify direction to change installation method.

[3] Specify the direction to draw the End Cover symbol.
Electricity-223
4. Operation example of bundled batch (straight line) drawing End Cover symbols and changing the installation
method to ceiling concealed
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Straight line specification”

[1] Select wires by straight line specification.
Use the line [1]-[2] to specify the wire group for which to draw
End Cover symbols.
(2) “Direction specification”

[2] Specify direction to change installation method.

[3] Draw the End Covers.
Electricity-224
5. Operation example of moving End Cover symbols
Command toolbar
(1) “End Cover symbol specification”

[1] Specify the End Cover symbol to move.
Specify the End Cover symbol [1] to move.
(2) “Move destination specification”

[2] Specify which wires to move the End Cover symbols for.
Specify the move destination [2].
At this stage it is not possible to specify a wire that is not the
one on which the End Cover was originally drawn.
(3) “Draw”
[3] Move the End Cover symbol.
Draw the End Cover symbol at the move destination.
6. Operation example of deleting End Cover symbols
Command toolbar
(1) “End Cover symbol specification”

[1] Select the End Cover symbol.
Specify the End Cover symbol [1] to delete.
(2) “End Cover symbol deletion”

[2] Delete the End Cover symbol.
Delete the End Cover symbol and restore the installation
method of the wire.
Electricity-225
Electricity/Elision Symbol
Elision Symbol
Function Overview
Draw Elision Symbols for wires, cable trays, raceways, and ventilation pipes.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Modifying a System (H)] -> [Elision Symbol (S)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Command Selection Commands that edit routes can be selected.
2. Draw/restore function selection Select the Draw or Restore function for the Elision Symbol.
[1] Draw
Draw an Elision Symbol.
[2] Restore (1-line)
Delete an Elision Symbol drawn on a wire and restore the wire.
Elision Symbols drawn on 2-lines elements such as cable trays and raceways cannot be
restored.
3. Independent/batch process methods

Selection Select processing methods to use for [Draw] and [Restore].
[1] Individual
Draw or restore an Elision Symbol independently.
[2] Batch (1-line)
Draw or restore an Elision Symbols for a wire in a batch.
4. Bundling specification Check box to draw multiple wires together with one Elision Symbol.
Draw multiple wires together with one Elision Symbol.
The “5. Selection method”, described later, is automatically changed to “Specify equipment”.
Refer to “[4] Select with straight line” under “5. Selection method”, described later.
Draw multiple wires bundled together.
5. Selection method Set the selection method for wires, trays, etc.
[1] Select with rectangle (diagonal)
Electricity-226
[2] Select with rectangle (center)
[3] Select with circle
[4] Select with straight line

When [Group multiple elements] is on, [Select with straight line] is the only method.
- When [Group multiple elements] is on
- When [Group multiple elements] is off
[5] Set Equipment

- For [Draw]
Draw at the offset distance from the equipment to the Elision Symbol.
Refer to “6. Offset Settings button” under description of the toolbar.
!) If equipment that has been processed once is specified again, only wires that satisfy the
following conditions are processed.
- Wires that are connected to equipment, without elision
- Only wires that are connected to equipment and elided, but have the end of the
Elision Symbol within the set offset are reprocessed.
Refer to “6. Offset Settings button” for information about offsets.
- When using [Restore]

Electricity-227
All wires linked to equipment are restored.
6. Offset Settings button

Set the offset distance from equipment.
“5.This is only enabled if “Specify equipment” is set under “5. Selection Method”
[1] Processing frame shape

- Rectangle Cut wires with a rectangular frame.
- Circle Cut wires with a circular frame.
[2] Offset
- Set the offset distance from equipment (at the release of drawing stage
!) The offset is the distance from the minimum rectangular range.

- When using rectangular frame processing
- When using circular frame processing
Electricity-228
7. Detail button
The Elision Symbol Advanced Settings dialog box opens, for setting the shape of the Elision
Symbol.
Refer to “Description of the Elision Symbol Advanced Settings Dialog Box” later in this manual.
Display the shape and scale factor of each type of Elision Symbol.
The dialog box changes between the above states 1, 2, and 3, depending on the Command toolbar
setting.
There is no display if [Draw/restore function selection] on the Command toolbar is set to [Restore
(1-line)].
1. For 1-line/ For 2-lines This is displayed when the Command toolbar is set to [Draw] - [Independent].
Draw Elision Symbols for elements for which the box is checked.
2. For 1-line This is displayed when the Command toolbar is set to [Draw] - [Batch (1-line)].
3. For bundling This is displayed when the Command toolbar is set to [Draw] - [Batch (1-line)] and “Group multiple
elements” is turned on.
4. Scale factor Specify the scale factor to use when drawing 1-line symbols.
This is only enabled when drawing 1-line symbols.
When the picture area within the above Command dialog box is specified, dialogs are displayed
corresponding to the buttons.
- Symbols for 1-line use These are the shapes for drawing 1-line wiring etc.
Select Elision Symbol shapes for 1-line use.
Click the Details button to open the Elision Symbol Advanced Settings dialog
box, which can be used to set the symbol length, angle, etc.
Refer to “Description of the Elision Symbol Advanced Settings Dialog Box”
later in this manual.
Electricity-229
- Symbols for 2-lines use These are the shapes for drawing 2-lines cable trays, raceways, etc.
Select Elision Symbol shapes for 2-lines use.
- Symbols for bundling: These are the shapes for grouping multiple 1-line elements to draw as
one symbol.
Select Elision Symbol shapes for bundling use.
Electricity-230
5. Direction specification for 1-line symbol 2

Specify the draw direction for the arrow for 1-line symbol 2.
This setting is only displayed when 1-line symbol 2 is selected.
This setting is enabled when the Command toolbar is set to [Draw] - [Independent], or to [Draw] -
[Batch (1-line)]. This is invalid when [Draw] - [Batch (1-line)] is selected on the Command toolbar
and “Group multiple elements” is turned on.
Description of the Elision Symbol Advanced Settings Dialog Box
This dialog is displayed by clicking on the Detail button on the Command toolbar, or the Detail button in the Elision Symbol
Selection dialog box. Refer to “7. Details” in the earlier “Description of the Command toolbar”.
1. Symbol type selection Select the type of Elision Symbol to set.
2. Symbol shape selection Select the shape of Elision Symbol to set.
3. Illustration display They are displayed in the shape specified in “2. Symbol shape selection”.
4. Size setting Set Elision Symbol size.

At this stage, set the items with reference to “3. Illustration display”.
[1-line symbol] details
Select shapes and set sizes to use when drawing Elision Symbols for wires and other 1-line
elements.
[1] 1-line symbol 1
Electricity-231
- Setup criteria
Arrow length: Draw the symbol with the arrow standard.
Arrow height: Draw symbol with the arrow height standard.
- Dimension settings
Arrow length: Input arrow length.
Arrow height: Input arrow height.
Arrow angle: Input arrow angle.
[2] 1-line symbol 2
- Setup criteria
Arrow length: Draw symbol with arrow length standard
[3] 1-line symbol 3
- Setup criteria
Arrow length: Draw symbol with arrow length standard
[4] 1-line symbol 4

Electricity-232
Arc height 1: Input arc height 1.
Arc height 2: Input arc height 2.
[5] 1-line symbol 5
- Setup criteria
Straight line length: Draw symbol with straight line length standard
Straight line height: Draw symbol with straight line height standard
Straight line length: Input the straight line length.
Straight line height: Input the straight line height.
Straight line angle: Input the straight line angle.
Electricity-233
[6] 1-line symbol 6
Radius of arc: Input the arc radius.
Straight line length: Input the straight line length.
Jut height: Input the jut height.
[2-lines symbol] details
Select shapes and set sizes to use when drawing Elision Symbols for cable trays, raceways, and
other 2-lines elements.
[1] 2-lines symbol 1
- Setup criteria
Extension length: Draw the symbol with the extension length standard.
Extension height: Draw symbol with lengthen height standard
Extension length: Input the extension length.
Extension height: Input the extension height.
Straight line angle: Input the straight line angle.
Electricity-234
Width ratio: Input the width ratio
- Setup criteria
Jut height: Draw the symbol at jut height reference.
Width ratio: Draw the symbol with width ratio standard.
Protrusion angle: Input the jut angle.
Arc height ratio: Input the arc height ratio.
Electricity-235
[Bundling symbol] details
Select shapes and set sizes to use when drawing one Elision Symbol for a group of 1-line elements.
[1] Bundling 1
[2] Bundling 2
Electricity-236
[3] Bundling 3
- Setup criteria
Jut height: Draw the symbol at jut height reference.
Width ratio: Draw the symbol with width ratio standard.
Protrusion angle: Input the jut angle.
[4] Bundling 4
[5] Bundling 5
Electricity-237
Warnings
1. End Cover elision

If there is an End Cover symbol on the wire and there is one or more wiring group with a multiple
wiring installation method, the installation method changes when an Elision Symbol is drawn by a
method that attempts to delete End Cover symbols.
The End Cover symbol can't restored even if the Elision Symbol is restored.
The following are examples.
[1] When drawing one Elision Symbol.

The installation method of the wiring element that is made invisible by elision is changed to
match the wiring element for which the Elision Symbol is drawn.
In the example of the figure below, the roof space (dash dot line) portion is changed to ceiling
concealed (solid line).
[2] When drawing multiple Elision Symbols.

When drawing 2 or more Elision Symbols in a batch on one wiring group, they will be changed
to one installation method, even if multiple installation methods are present.
Electricity-238
2. Horizontal and vertical offset lengths

If an Elision Symbol has been drawn or restored, the horizontal and vertical offset length attributes
of the wiring element are automatically recalculated.
Horizontal and vertical offset lengths can be input using the Wire Length command.
(Customers who do not use material counting do not need to consider the horizontal and vertical
offset length).
“Wiring element” means an element that is a constituent of a wiring group.

To explain using the figure below, the wiring group consists of three wiring elements, a blue line, a
green arc, and a purple line.
Each of these wiring elements can have horizontal and vertical offset length attributes.
[1] When drawing Elision Symbols

The processing method for horizontal and vertical offset length varies with the number of elided
wiring elements.
- If only one wiring element is elided
- When drawing one Elision Symbol

If one Elision Symbol is drawn on one wiring element using the independent or batch
draw functions, the horizontal and vertical offset lengths that the wiring element had
before the Elision Symbol was drawn are assigned to the visible wiring element side.
Electricity-239
- When drawing two Elision Symbols

If two Elision Symbols are drawn simultaneously on one wiring element using the batch
draw function, half of each of the horizontal and vertical offset lengths that the wiring
element had before the Elision Symbol was drawn are assigned to the visible wiring
element side.
- If multiple wiring elements are elided
The processing of wiring elements for which Elision Symbols are drawn (the solid blue line
in the upper figure below) assigns the vertical offset length A and horizontal offset length B,
which the wiring element had before the Elision Symbol was drawn, to the horizontal and
vertical offset length attributes of the wiring element side that was not elided after the Elision
Symbol is drawn (the solid blue line in the lower figure).
The elided wiring element side (the dotted red line in the lower figure) is assigned zero for
the horizontal and vertical offset length attributes.
For wiring element for which no Elision Symbol was drawn (the green and purple solid lines
in the lower figure) the vertical offset length L and horizontal offset length M, and the vertical
offset length A and horizontal offset length Y, that the wiring element had before elision, are
Electricity-240
assigned unchanged to the vertical and horizontal offset length attributes of the elided and
unseen wiring elements (the dotted green and purple lines in the lower figure).
[2] When restoring Elision Symbols

If visible wiring elements and invisible wiring elements are merged into a single wiring element
after restoration, the offset of the wiring element that was visible before the merger is added and
assigned as the offset attribute of the merged wiring element after restoration. The following are
several examples.
- When one visible and one invisible wiring element are merged
Electricity-241
- When two visible and one invisible wiring element are merged [BATCH 2 TO HERE]
3. Drawing Elision Symbols for cable trays

It is only possible to draw Elision Symbols for cable trays if they are straight trays and if the
elevation difference between the tray start and end points is 0 (zero).
4. Drawing Elision Symbols for raceways

It is only possible to draw Elision Symbols for raceways if they are straight raceways and if the
elevation difference between the raceway start and end points is 0 (zero).
5.． Paper layout Elision symbols can be drawn on parts on the paper layout.
Operation examples
1. Operation example of drawing an [independent] Elision Symbol on a specified wire
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
Electricity-242
(1) “Specify draw position”

[1] Set the Elision Symbol shape.
Specify [1] to change the Elision Symbol shape.
Select 1-line symbol 1 [2]
[2] Specify the position to draw the Elision Symbol.

Specify the Elision Symbol draw position [4].
(2) “Specify remaining line side”

[3] Specify the remaining line side.
Specify remaining line direction [5].
2. Operation example of [batch] drawing Elision Symbols on frame specified wires
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Specify process range”

Select 1-line symbol 2 [2].
[2] Specify the start point of the range to process.

Specify processing frame start point [4].
[3] Specify the end point of the range to process.

Specify processing frame end point [5].
(2) “Draw”
[4] Draw an Elision Symbol.
Draw an Elision Symbol at the intersection points between the
specification frame and the wires.
Electricity-243
3. Operation example of drawing Elision Symbols on frame specified wires
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) Specify start point -> Specify end point

Select bundle symbol 2 [2].
[2] Specify the start point of the line that selects the wire
group to process.
Specify line start point [4].
[3]
Specify the end point of the line that selects the wire
group to process.
Specify line end point [5].
(2) “Draw”
[4] Draw an Elision Symbol.
Draw an Elision Symbol at the intersection points between the
specification line and the wires.
Electricity-244
Electricity/Edit wire
Edit wire
Function Overview
Edit previously drawn wires and change cable bundles, Elision Symbols, hidden line symbols and End Cover sizes.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Modifying a System (H)] -> [Edit wire (M)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
When Move wire
When Connect wires
When Break wire
When Add
When Devide
When Move corner
When Delete
When wire allocation
When Change object sizes
Electricity-245
1. Command Selection Commands related to Modifying a Systeming can be selected.
2. Edit command selection The method for editing routes can be selected.
[1] Move wire: Move a wire.
[2] Connect wires: Merge 2 [Wire] groups together to make 1 [Wire] group.
[3] Break wire: Divide 1 [Wire] groups to make 2 [Wire] group.
[4] Add : Specify the wires (linear elements) of a [Wire] group to add a corner bend.
[5] Divide : Divide corner Specify the wires (arc elements) of a [Wire] group to split one arc into two.
[6] Move corner: Specify the wires (arc elements) of a [Wire] group to move a corner bend.
[7] Delete : Specify the wires (arc elements) of a [Wire] group to delete a corner bend.
[8] Wire allocation: Assign multiple wires automatically, at equal or set pitches.
[9] Change object size: Change the sizes of previously drawn wire accessory elements (arc radii,
Number of Cable Cores, End Cover symbols, Elision Symbols, hidden line symbols).
3. Selection method specification Specify the selection method for wires to move.
[1] Individual: Specify the wires to move with one click. If independent, the processing method for
wire movement can be selected.
Free: Freely move the selected wire.
Stretch: Fix the selected wire, then stretch it.
Parallel: Move the selected wire in parallel.
Pattern: Change the draw pattern for the selected wire.
[2] Multiple: Multiple wiring routes can be selected and their wires moved.
The action varies with the wire selection method.
If the wires are selected as shown below, they can be moved freely.
If the wires are selected as shown below, they can be moved in parallel.
However, if multiple elements of one wiring group were selected, and if arc wires were
selected,
Electricity-246
they are not applicable.
4. Switching terminal processing processing can be set

If the Elision Symbol is drawn and the wire beyond the Elision Symbol is hidden, terminal.
[1] Displayed wire: If the end of the Elision Symbol is specified, the end of the displayed wire is
made the base point for movement.
[2] Hidden wire: If the end of the Elision Symbol is specified, the end of the hidden wire beyond the
displayed wire is made the base point for movement.
5. Retention of Elision Symbols

Settings can be made for what to do if the end of the hidden wire is moved to the base point and
the end of the hidden wire goes beyond the position of the Elision Symbol.
[1] Symbol retention: Even if the end of the hidden wire goes beyond the position of the Elision
Symbol, the Elision Symbol is retained.
[2] Hidden wire: If the end of the hidden wire goes beyond the position of the Elision Symbol, the
Elision Symbol is deleted.
6. Arc radius specification

Specify the radius of new arcs generated when processing wires with wire merge, corner addition,
or corner division.
7. Wire merge processing method selection

Select the processing method to use when merging wires.
[1] : Extend the wire to generate one arc-shaped wire.

[2] : When connecting ends of the specified line with a straight line, generate two arc-shaped
wires. And delete the Elision Symbol.
8. Move standard specification

Specify the movement standard to use when moving a corner.
[1] Midpoint of arc: Move the midpoint of the arc length of the moving arc wire to the standard.
[2] Intersection point with the extension line: Move the intersection point with the extension of the
straight line that is tangent on the moving arc wire to the standard.
9. Specified element selection

Select the specified element “equipment/device”, “Wire”, when sorting wires.
[1] Equipment/device: Specify the equipment/device and sort the wires that connect to it.
[2] Wire: Specify the wire group and sort the wires.
10. Element selection method selection

Select the element selection method to use when sorting wires, between “independent” and “batch”.
[1] Individual: Select equipment/devices independently.
[2] Batch: Select equipment/devices in a batch, using a frame.
11. Sort range selection

Check to include lines on the start point and end point in the specified elements, as the assignment
range.
This is only enabled if “Wire” is set under “2 Specified element selection”.
12. Assignment method selection

Select the wire sort method, between “Uniform” and “Pitch specification”.
[1] Uniform: Sort the wires uniformly, relative to the sort face.
[2] Uniform (start point/ end point) Sort the wires uniformly from the start point and end point,
relative to the sort face.
[3] Pitch specification: Assign the wires in the specified pitches.
When using uniform sorting
a = Connection process face length ÷ (number of connected wires + 1)
Electricity-247
When using uniform (start point/ end point) sorting
b = Connection process face length ÷ (number of connected wires - 1)
When using pitch specification
c = Specified pitch
13. Pitch specification

Specify the pitch (mm, at the release of drawing stage) to use when sorting wires.
This is only enabled if “Pitch specification” is set under “5. Sort method selection”.

Make settings for wire sorting.
1. Free
Move wire in in free mode. Perform the following actions, depending on the specified element:
- Straight line wire which is a line terminator: Freely move the end point coordinate of the straight
line wire.
- Straight line wire which is not a line terminator: Move the wire parallel to the straight line wire.
- Arc-shaped wiring: Freely move the end point coordinate of the arc wire.
- Arc wire (corner): Freely move the arc wire.
2. Stretch
Extend or shorten the wire in Stretch mode. Perform the following actions, depending on the
specified element:
- Straight line wire which is a line terminator: Extend or shorten the end point coordinate of the
straight line wire.
- Arc-shaped wiring: Freely move the end point coordinate of the arc wire.
- Arc wire (corner): Enlarge/shrink and move arc wires.
3. Parallel
Extend or shorten the wire in Stretch mode. Perform the following actions, depending on the
specified element:
- Straight line wire which is a line terminator: Move the wire parallel to the straight line wire.
- Arc-shaped wiring: Enlarge/shrink and move arc wires.
- Arc wire (corner): Enlarge/shrink and move arc wires.
4. Pattern
Change the draw pattern for 1-route wiring in Pattern mode.
The middle level of the Command dialog box above is for change pattern selection in 2-click mode.
The lower level is for change pattern selection in 1-click mode.
Electricity-248
- Straight line wire which is a line terminator: Change the draw pattern for 1-route wiring.
- Straight line wire which is not a line terminator: Change the draw pattern for 1-route wiring.
- Arc-shaped wiring: Change the draw pattern for 1-route wiring.
- Arc wire (corner): Change the draw pattern for 1-route wiring.
5. Switch button This button switches between 2-click mode and 1-click mode.
1. Subject element selection

Select the wire accessory element to resize. Select with the [Wire], [Cable Bundle], [Elision],
[Hidden Line], and [End Cover] buttons.
Multiple buttons can be selected. Selections can be made from the picture area or from the buttons.
2. Scale factor Specify the scale factor.
3. Size type selection

Make selections by multiplying the value specified for the scale factor by one of the sizes below.
[1] Draw size: Use the size currently drawn on the drawing as the standard.
[2] Set size: Use the size set in the Wire Info dialog box, which is displayed when the [Settings]
button is clicked, as the standard.
4. Sets button
Specify the size of the wire accessory element. Refer to the description of the Wire Info dialog box
for details.
1. Wire
Specify wire-related information.
- Specify the wire arc radius.
- Select All button: All setting items in the currently-open wire accessory elements are selected to
be targets.
- Deselect button: All setting items in the currently-open wire accessory elements are deselected.
- Invert selections button: Setting items in the currently-open wire accessory elements are
inverted between selected and deselected.
- Initialize button: All setting items in the currently-open wire accessory elements are initialized.
Initialization clears currently specified values and uses the values prepared by the system
(the state immediately after installation).
Electricity-249
2. Number of Cable Core

Specify cable bundle-related information.
- [1] Specify the Number of cable core ,length(mm)
- [2] Specify the Number of cable core ,angle (deg)
- [3] Specify the Number of cable core ,spacing(mm)
- [4] Specify the Pitch per wiring unit(mm)
- [5] Specify the Basic number per unit(pcs)
- [6] Specify the Wire-number of ground wire ,spacing(mm)
- [7] Specify the Number of ground wires ,length(mm)
- [8] Specify the Number of ground wires ,angle(deg)
- [9] Specify the Number of ground wires ,spacing(mm)
- [10] Specify the Number of cable core ,angle(arc)(deg)
- [11] Specify the Number of ground wires ,angle(arc)(deg)
- [12] Specify the Radius of air conditioning pipe symbol(mm)
- [13] Specify the Angle symbol(deg)
- Refer to “1. Wiring” above for button explanations.
Refer to advanced settings for the Number of Cable Core command for details.
3. Elision Symbol
Specify Elision Symbol-related information.
The only thing that can be changed is the Elision Symbol for 1-line elements. Symbols for 2-lines-
use and for bundling can't be changed.
Electricity-250
Refer to advanced settings for Elision Symbols with the Elision Symbol command for details of [1]
1-line symbol 1 ~ [6] 1-line symbol 6.
Refer to “1. Wiring” above for button explanations.
4. Hidden line
Specify hidden line-related information.
- Hidden line symbols associated with cable trays and raceways can’t be changed.
- Symbol setting when other parts are hidden
Refer to advanced settings for the Hidden Line command for details.
- Symbol setting when some parts are hidden
Refer to advanced settings for the Hidden Line command for details.
With the Hidden Line command, line hiding can be partially applied on 1-route wires, but the
symbol settings for when partial line hiding has been used should be edited using the set values
specified here.
5. End Cover
Specify End Cover-related information.
- For details of circular End Cover length ~ square End Cover pitch, refer to the End Cover size
settings under the End Cover command.
Electricity-251
Hidden line symbols associated with cable trays and raceways can’t be changed.
1. Sorting order specification Specify the sorting order after allocation.

Rearrange wires when sorting them.
Don't change the sorting order when sorting wires.
2. Radius of arc specification

When wires have been sorted, specify the wire arc radius (mm at the release of drawing stage)
when the wire has been moved away from the equipment connection face, where it was before
allocation, and moved to a separate connection face.
3. Sort mode
Set the standard for sorting equipment/device parts where the cross boundary is circular.
[1] Layout angle base
The angle of the inscribed rectangle to the circle of the cross boundary follows the layout
angle of the equipment/device parts.
[2] Horizontal/Vertical standard
The angle of the inscribed rectangle to the circle of the cross boundary follows horizontal and
vertical standards, regardless of the layout angle of the equipment/device parts.
[3] Wire connection angle standard
The angle of the inscribed rectangle to the circle of the cross boundary is based on the
connection angle of each wire connected to the equipment/device parts.
Refer to “3. Sorting equipment/devices” for precautions concerning the cross boundary.
Electricity-252
Warnings
1. Hidden lines
If part of the moved wire was hidden line processed, the hidden line is restored.
2. Wire text
When there was wire text associated with the moved wire, the text is only moved if it was drawn
with a lead line or offset.
3. Number of Cable Cores

If wire movement means that the wiring element that a cable bundle belonged to ceases to exist,
the cable bundle is moved to the longest wiring element.
4. Joining wires
- [Wire (arc)] groups can't merge. Only [Wire] groups can merge.
- Only the terminal wires (straight elements) of [Wire] groups can merge.
- To merge terminal wires (straight elements) of [Wire] groups that are not in the same direction,
wires (line elements) are added and merged.
Wires (arc elements) are not added.
- In cases as illustrated below, in which wires are connected to unseen wire ends, the specified
portions of the wires to be merged (indicated by red circles) may become shorter than the merged
length.
5. Corner addition
There is no setting to generate corners in arcs. There is no addition of arc corners.
6. When changing element sizes

[1] If the subject wire accessory elements could not be changed by the specified setting, it is
temporarily displayed in red.
[2] Radius of arc
- If there is a hidden line symbol on the wire arc, the wire arc radius cannot be processed.
- If the change process on the wire arc radius causes a straight line wire connected to the end
point of the arc wire section to be shortened, and there is a cable bundle in the shortened
section, it is moved to the center of the longest wire in the wiring group.
[3] Cable bundle
- Size type: For draw size
This is multiplied by the size currently drawn on the drawing, so depending on the specified
scale factor, the overall size may be enlarged or reduced.
- Size type: Set size
The length and angle are redrawn using the size specified on the Wire Info dialog box.
- If cable bundle text was drawn on the cable bundle, it is moved together with the shape of the
cable bundle.
Electricity-253
7. Arc wires
The sorting process is not possible with arc wires.
8. Draw as set
If a wire got too close to an equipment/device part in the sorting process, it may not be processed
according to the uniform or set pitch setting.
9. Sorting equipment/device parts

[1]The basic action of the sorting process is as stated below.
The process below is also used if the command was initiated from the context menu with the
equipment preselected.
[2] Pitch calculation at the sorting process stage differs with the shape of the equipment.
A If the equipment has 1 component element and the cross boundary is circular
The sort pitch is calculated using the inscribed square for the circle (the blue line in the
figure below).
B If the equipment has 2 component elements and the cross boundary consists of an arc
and a straight line (such as an automatic fire alarm),
the sort pitch is calculated using the inscribed square for the arc and the straight line
portion (the blue line in the figure below).
C Other than A and B above

The sort pitch is calculated using the minimum rectangle for the section element (the
blue line in the figure below).
Electricity-254
[3] All wires that are linked to equipment/devices are not subject to sorting.
The conditions for wires subject to sorting are stated below:
- All wires that are linked to equipment/devices and have not been processed for elision are
subject to sorting.
- In wires that have been processed for elision, the processed wiring elements themselves
are directly linked to the sort face, so wiring elements that are perpendicular to the sort face
are subject to sorting.
A: This is a wiring element directly linked to the sort face. It is not perpendicular to the sort
face so it is not elision processed.
B: This is a wiring element directly linked to the sort face, but it is not perpendicular to the
sort face, and is elision processed.
C: The elision processed wiring element is not directly connected to the sort face.
D: This is linked to the sort face and is not arrow processed.
E: This elision processed wiring element directly linked to the sort face, and is perpendicular
to the sort face.
F: The elision processed wiring element is not a wiring element that links directly to the sort
face.
- Equipment that has no boundary element and has multiple connection points is not subject
to sorting.
10. Wire sorting

The sort process produces different process results, as illustrated below, depending on how the
specification line is written.
When looking to the end point side from the start point side, the sort order is determined by the
state of wiring on the right.
Electricity-255
[2] The wire connection position after sort processing is as shown below.
[3] If the wire was separated from the connection process face and moved to the outer side of the
equipment at the wire sorting stage, the angle of lines leading from the equipment is drawn parallel
to the specification line.
[4] If “Include start point and end point” is not checked under “Sort range selection”, and the end of
the specification line is on the wire, that wire is excluded from being subject to movement.
In the example below, [1] and [2] do not move.
If “Include start point and end point” is checked under “Sort range selection”, and the end of the
specification line is on the wire, that wire is subject to movement.
In the example below, [1] and [2] do move.
Electricity-256
11. Wires
The movement of wires is based on the processing of the Move Wire command.
Operation examples
1. Operation example of free-moving wires

Command toolbar
Command dialog box

[1] Specify the route to deform.
Specify the wire [1] to move.
(2) “Move destination coordinate

specification”
[2] Specify the coordinates to deform.
Specify the move destination coordinates [2].
Electricity-257
2. Operation example of parallel-moving wires

Command toolbar
Command dialog box

(2) “Move destination coordinate

specification”
3. Operation example of enlarging the radius of arc wires

Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Arc wire specification”

Electricity-258
(2) “Deformation method selection” ->

“Move destination coordinate
specification”
Set the move method to Enlarge/shrink [2].
4. Operation example of changing the connection destination of a wire on which an Elision Symbol has been drawn
Command toolbar
Command dialog box

(2) “Deformation method selection” ->

“Move destination coordinate
specification”
Specify the move destination equipment/device [2].
Electricity-259
5. Operation example of sort processing on equipment/devices

Command toolbar
(1) “Specify equipment”

[1] Specify the equipment.
Specify the subject element [1], as in the Command toolbar
illustrated above.
If wires on equipment [1] are sorted using the context menu for
equipment [1], the wires are sorted at the same time as the
command initiates.
(2) “Sort process”

[2] Sort wires.
Sort wires uniformly, relative to the specified equipment.
6. Operation example of sort processing on wires

Command toolbar
(1) “Specify subject elements”

[1] Specify the range to perform wire sorting.
Select the wire group to sort using a line with start and end
points [1] and [2].
At that stage, if uniform sorting is used, the length of the line is
used in the sort calculation, so specify the tray width.
(2) “Sort process”

[2] Sort wires.
The selected wire group is sorted uniformly.
Electricity-260
Electricity/Change wiring installation method
Change wiring installation method

Function Overview
Change previously drawn wires, CG-display wires, and up/down installation methods (line types).
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Modifying a System (H)] -> [Change wiring installation method (H)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
Description of the Command toolbar
1. Setting subject parts

Specify parts that are subject.
2. Installation method before the change

Specify the installation method before the change.
Specify the installation method before the change, and the subject installation method. If ”All” is
selected, all installation methods are subject to the search.
3. Installation method after change

Select the installation method (line type) after the change.
Refer to the Wire command for the setting method for the installation method style that displayed
when Advanced Settings is clicked.
The content above differs from the installation methods that can be selected under installation
methods (wires) and installation methods (up/down).
Warnings
1. Selection of change subjects

If the same point is specified (double click) when specifying the range to process, it is possible to
make installation methods that are not selected in “Before change” in the Command dialog box as
wires subject to processing.
Electricity-261
Electricity/Change wiring installation method
Operation examples
1. Operation example of changing a wire drawn as ceiling concealed to roof space installation
(1) “Set range”

[1] Specify the range to process.
The Command dialog box
Before change: Ceiling concealed,
After change: Select in roof space
Use the diagonally-opposite points [1] and [2] to indicate the

range in which to change the installation method.
(2) “Check”
[2] Please check.
The color of the changed wire changes temporarily,
so use the Y key or the left mouse button to specify if correct.
(3) “Draw”
[3] Change the installation method.
Change the wire to roof space.
Then, return to screen (1).
Electricity-262
Electricity/Deleting Wiring Information
Deleting Wiring Information

Function Overview
Delete wiring information that has been assigned to drawn wires.
1. Pulldown Menu
Click on [Electrical (Q)] -> [Edit route (H)] -> [Delete Wiring Information (L)].
2. Icon menu
Click on
1.Command Selection
Commands related to route editing can be selected.
2.Delete
A wire that has wiring information assigned can be selected and deleted.
Warnings
1.Check wiring information

Use the Wiring Information Check command to check wiring information.
2. Delete
Wires that have had wiring information deleted become undefined wires.
Operation examples
1.Operation example of selecting and deleting
Command toolbar
(1) “Select and delete” Select the wire to delete wiring information from.
(1) Specify the first point of the rectangular selection.
(2) Specify the second point of the rectangular selection.

Place the wire to delete wiring information from into the frame.
(3) Press the End Selection button to delete.
Electricity-263
Electricity/Hidden line
Hidden line
Function Overview
Hide lines for wires, cable trays, raceways, and ventilation pipes, and restore those lines.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Modifying a System (H)] -> [Hidden Line (I)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
Commands that edit routes can be selected.
2. Draw and edit function selection

Functions to draw or edit hidden lines can be selected.
[1] Hide lines

Hide lines for wires, cable trays, raceways, and ventilation pipes.
[2] Restore
Restore hidden lines for wires, cable trays, raceways, and ventilation pipes.
[3] Replace
Transpose the hidden portions of the hidden line side and the remaining line side.
However, only portions of the same wire are subject to replacement processing.
[4] Sort
Restore portions that are hidden unnecessarily.
However, only wires are subject to arrangement processing.
(*) “Remaining line side” means the wire that is not hidden after a hide line process.
(*) “Hidden line side” means the wire that is hidden after a hide line process.
3. Hide line processing method selection

Select the hidden line processing method.
[1] Wire
Hide parts that intersect with wires.
[2] Cable tray
Hide parts that intersect with cable trays.
However, parts that intersect with equipment/device parts, raceways, and ventilation pipes
cannot be hidden.
[3] Raceway
Hide parts that intersect with raceways.
However, parts that intersect with equipment/device parts other than luminaires, or with cable
trays and ventilation pipes, cannot be hidden.
[4] Ventilation pipe
Hide parts that intersect with ventilation pipes.
However, parts that intersect with equipment/device parts, cable trays, and raceways cannot be
hidden.
Electricity-264
[5] Specified parts

Hide parts of the specified parts within the specification range. However, equipment/device
parts cannot be hidden.
[6] Batch
Hide parts which intersect with wires, cable trays, raceways, ventilation pipes, and equipment at
the same time.
4. Selecting the method for determining parts to leave

Select the method for determining parts on the side to leave.
If “3. Hide line processing method selection” is set to “Wires”.
[1] Equipment
Hide wires that intersect with equipment/device parts.
[2] Specified side
Process wires in the same direction as the specified wiring element as the remaining line side.
[3] Specified install method
Process wiring elements with the same installation method as the specified wire as the
remaining line side.
[4] Specified wire element
Process specified wiring elements as the remaining line side.
[5] Specified wiring group
Process specified wiring groups as the remaining line side.
[6] Cable tray
Hide wires that intersect with cable trays.
[7] Raceway
Hide wires that intersects with raceways.
[8] Ventilation pipe
Hide wires that intersect with ventilation pipes.
If “3. Hide line processing method selection” is set to “Raceways”.

[1] Equipment
Hide raceways that intersect with equipment/device parts (luminaires).
[2] Specified side
Process raceways in the same direction as the specified remaining raceway as the remaining
line side.
5. Batch Setup button

Set details for the batch hidden line process.
This is only enabled if “Batch” is set under “3. Hide line processing method selection”
6. Settings for whether to draw hidden line symbols 1

Set whether or not to draw symbols when hiding intersections between wires and non-wire parts
(equipment/devices, cable trays, and raceways).
pressed means “Draw”.
pressed means “Don’t draw”.
7. Settings for whether to draw hidden line symbols 2

Set whether or not to draw symbols when hiding intersections between parts of the same type.
pressed means “Draw”.
pressed means “Don’t draw”.
8. Detail button
Make settings for hidden line symbols and hidden line pitches. Specify to open the Advanced
Settings dialog box.
Electricity-265
Description of the Batch Processing Settings dialog box
1. Equipment hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where equipment and wires intersect.
Batch process hidden lines for intersections with equipment.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with equipment.
2. Wire hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where wires intersect with other wires.
Batch process hidden lines for intersections with wires.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with wires.
3. Detail button Make advanced settings for batch processing of hidden lines for wires.
When the Details button is clicked, the Advanced Settings dialog box opens.
Electricity-266
[1] Hide line of arc wires

Set whether or not to process hidden lines for arc wires.
[2] Min. radius
Set the minimum radius for arc wires subject to hidden line processing.
hidden line processing will not be performed on arc wires below this set value.
This is only enabled if the check box [1] is checked.
[3] Priority method
Set whether or not to assign an order of priority based on installation methods.
[4] Set priority
Set a priority order for each installation method. Wiring with an installation method which has
the higher value is the hidden line side.
[5] Cable tray/raceway settings
If the check box is checked, the setting is that parts with the higher elevation on the plan view,
and parts to the front on the front or side elevation views, are the remaining parts.
[6] Standard to remain the same priority lines
Set the remaining line standard to use when the priority order is the same.
- Horizontal
Set the horizontally-oriented wiring element as the remaining line side.
- Vertical
Set the vertically-oriented wiring element as the remaining line side.
- Standard line
Specify the element to use as the standard, and process wiring elements in the same
direction as that element as the remaining line side.
[7] If can't define the remaining lines after hidden.
Set how to handle situations where the remaining line can't be identified.
- Auto-process
The wiring element detected first by the system is automatically made the remaining line
side.
- Confirmation message
Obtain confirmations while processing which wires to hide.

- Don't process
Don't process hidden lines.
Electricity-267

Reset all settings to defaults.
4. Cable tray hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where cable trays intersect with wires.
Batch hide parts that intersect with cable trays.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with cable trays.
5. Raceway hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where raceways intersect with wires.
Batch process hidden lines for intersections with raceways.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with raceways.
6. Ventilation pipe hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where ventilation pipes intersect with wires.
Batch hide parts that intersect with ventilation pipes.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with ventilation pipes.
7. Restore hidden line settings Set whether or not to process restoration of hidden wires.
Batch process restoration of intersections with wires or equipment.
Don't process restoration.
If the boxes are checked for “1. Equipment hidden line settings” or “2. Wire hidden line settings” and
hidden line restoration, restoration is processed first.
8. Clean up settings
Set whether or not to process restoration places where hidden line processing is not required.
If the box is checked for “6. Hidden line restoration settings”, this cannot be set.
1. Cable tray hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where cable trays intersect with cable trays.

Batch hide parts that intersect with cable trays.
Electricity-268

Don't process hidden lines for intersections with cable trays.
2. Detail button Make advanced settings for batch processing of hidden lines for cable trays.
The Advanced Settings dialog is the same as for wires.
3. Restore hidden line settings Set whether or not to process restoration of hidden cable trays.
Batch restore hidden cable trays.
1. Equipment hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where equipment and raceways intersect.
Batch process hidden lines for intersections with equipment.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with equipment.
2. Raceway hidden line settings Make settings for the hidden line process where raceways intersect with wires.
Batch process hidden lines for intersections with raceways.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with raceways.
3. Detail button Make advanced settings for batch processing of hidden lines for raceways.
4. Restore hidden line settings Set whether or not to process restoration of hidden raceways.
Batch restore hidden raceways.
Electricity-269
1. Ventilation pipe hidden line settings

Make settings for the hidden line process where ventilation pipes intersect with other ventilation pipes.
Batch hide parts that intersect with ventilation pipes.
Don't process hidden lines for intersections with ventilation pipes.
2. Detail button Make advanced settings for batch processing of hidden lines for ventilation pipes.
The Advanced Settings dialog is the same as for wires.
3. Restore hidden line settings Set whether or not to process restoration of hidden ventilation pipes.
Batch restore hidden ventilation pipes.
Electricity-270
1. Drawing image An illustration reflecting the setting content of the dialog box is displayed.
2. Symbol settings when other parts are hidden

Set the hidden line symbols to use for wires in areas where wires intersect with non-wire parts
(equipment/devices, cable trays, raceways).
Draw hidden line symbols when hiding intersections between wires and equipment/devices,
cable trays, and raceways.
Don't draw the hidden line symbol. Symbol lengths and symbol angles cannot be set.
3. Symbol length input Input the lengths (mm) of the symbols to draw when hiding wires and non-wire parts.
4. Angle symbol settings Input the angles (degrees) of the symbols to draw when hiding wires and non-wire parts.
[1] Draw at a parallel angle to the remaining line side (red wire)
Draw symbols parallel to equipment/devices, cable trays, and raceways.
[2] Draw in the set angle on hidden line (light blue line) side
Make the wire on which the symbol is drawn be the base angle (0°) and draw the symbol at the
set angle.
5. Symbol settings to use when hiding the same parts

Set hidden line symbols to use in areas where parts of the same type intersect (wire with wire,
cable tray with cable tray, raceway with raceway).

Draw the hidden line symbol where the hidden line process is performed on parts of the same
type.
Don't draw the hidden line symbol. Symbol lengths and symbol angles cannot be set.
6. Symbol length input Input the lengths (mm) of the symbols to draw when hiding parts of the same type.
7. Angle symbol settings Input the angles (degrees) of the symbols to draw when hiding parts of the same type.
[1] Draw at a parallel angle to the remaining line side (red wire)
Draw the symbol parallel to the part that becomes the remaining line side.
[2] Draw in the set angle on hidden line (light blue line) side
Electricity-271
Make the wire on which the symbol is drawn be the base angle (0°) and draw the symbol at the
set angle.
This setting is only valid for hidden line processing where wires intersect with other wires.
1. Hidden line pitch input Input the dimension for deletion of hidden wires at the release of drawing stage.
2. Wire pitch input

If the pitch between two wires is less than the input value, wires crossing those two wires are
hidden.
However, this process is not performed on arc wires.
As in the figure below, there are wires [3] and [4] that cross hidden line wires [1] and [2], and if the
distance between those wires [3] and [4] is less than the input value D, the wires crossing [3] and [4]
are processed as [2] is.
Electricity-272
1. Display method for hidden parts Select the display method for hidden parts of raceways.
[1] Delete
Hide hidden line parts.
[2] Dashed
Display hidden line parts as dashed lines.
Context explanation
[1] Batch process within drawing

Batch process hidden lines within the drawing.
Warnings
1. Conditions in which lines can’t be hidden

Hidden line processing is not possible in cases such as the following:
[1] Elements other than wires, cable trays and raceways cannot be hidden with the Hidden Line
command.
[2] Hidden line processing is not possible in cases such as that illustrated below. (The same is true
for arcs).
- “Hidden lines between wires and wires” Where the wire on the hidden line side is shorter than
the hidden line pitch (L).
Electricity-273
- “Hidden lines between wires and equipment” Where the end of the wiring element is included
within the equipment.
[3] It is not possible to hide the whole of the specified wire when hiding specified parts.
The same is true for cable trays and raceways.
[4] It is not possible to hide the end of the specified wire when hiding specified parts.
The same is true for cable trays and raceways.
[5] When a cable tray and wire intersect, one wiring element that comprises a wiring group cannot
be hidden if there are not two intersection points between the cable tray and the main girder.
The same is true for intersections between raceways and wires.
[6] When cable trays intersect with other cable trays, hidden line processing cannot be performed
when a branch part intersects with a straight tray.
The same is true for straight raceways, elbows and boxes.
[7] Hidden line processing cannot be performed when parallel cable trays overlap.
The same is true for raceways.
Electricity-274
[8] Hidden line processing cannot be performed when cable trays do not protrude.
The same is true for raceways.
2. Automatic hidden line replacement in batch processing

If a wire ceases to exist after it is hidden, the hidden line process is performed on the opposite side
of the wire.
The following is a drawing example for when “Remaining line standard at same rank: vertical” is set.
3. Hidden line arrangement Cable trays and raceways are not subject to hidden line arrangement.
4. Hidden line symbol when the specified parts is hidden

If hidden line processing is performed on a specified part the symbol lengths and angles are
processed on the basis of the values defined under “Draw hidden symbol at same parts” in the
“Hidden line symbols” tab of the Advanced Settings dialog box.
Refer to “5. Symbol setting for when same parts are hidden” in the above-mentioned Advanced
Settings dialog box.
5. Wire lengths
When wires and equipment are hidden, wires are hidden using minimum rectangles for the
equipment, so hidden lines may get larger for circular equipment.
6. Raceway equipment Line hiding and restoration

When restoring hidden lines for raceways and equipment, cable bundles or Elision Symbols are
deleted if they exist on raceways.
- “When using Hide lines”
- “When using Restore”
Electricity-275
Operation examples
1. Operation example of processing wires in the same direction as the specified wire as the remaining line side.
Perform hidden line processing so that the horizontally-oriented wire is the remaining line.
Command toolbar

[1] Specify the remaining line direction.
Specify wire [1] in the horizontal direction.
The color of the specified wire changes.
(2) “Specifying the line hiding range”

[2] Specify the range to perform line hiding.
Specify the start point [2] and the end point [3] of the range in
which to process hidden lines.
The specified range is rubber displayed.
(3) “Hidden line drawing”

[3] Process hidden lines.
Perform hidden line processing in places where wires intersect
in the specified range.
In this case, the horizontal line is the remaining line.
2. Operation example for hiding all wires that intersect with the specified wire
Command toolbar

[1] Specify the remaining line wire.
Specify wire [1].
Electricity-276

Perform hidden line processing of all wires that intersect with
the specified wire.
3. Operation example for hiding all wires that intersect with equipment
Command toolbar

[1] Specify the range to perform equipment hiding.
Specify the range to process line hiding, using the start point
[1] and the end point [2].

Perform hidden line processing of wires that intersect with
equipment within the specified range.
Electricity-277
4. Operation example of hiding lines with the specified pitch at any arbitrary wiring position
Command toolbar

[1] Specify parts to partially hide lines for.
Specify the wire [1] to hide.
The color of the wire changes when it is specified.
(2) “Rectangular specification of hide line

range”
[2] Specify the range in which to perform partial line hiding.
Specify the start point [2] and the end point [3] of the range in
which to process partially hidden lines.
(3) “Partial hidden line drawing”

[3] Perform partial hidden line process.
Perform hidden line processing on the specified wiring parts.
Electricity-278
5. Operation example of restoring hidden wires
Command toolbar
(1) “Specifying the restoration range”

[1] Specify the range to perform hidden line restoration.
Specify the range to process restoration, using the start point
(2) “Draw restoration”

[2] Process restoration.
Perform restoration processing on hidden parts in the
specified range.
6. Operation example of transposing hidden line parts and remaining line parts
Command toolbar
(1) “Hidden line replacement position

specification”
[1] Specify the hidden line change position.
Specify the hidden line replacement positions [1], [2], [3].
(2) “Hidden line replacement drawing”

[2] Process hidden line replacement.
Replace hidden lines in the specified area.
Electricity-279
7. Operation example for hiding all raceways that intersect with equipment
Command toolbar

[1] Specify the range to perform line hiding on raceways.
Specify the range to process line hiding, using the start point

Perform hidden line processing of raceways that intersect with
equipment within the specified range.
Electricity-280
Electricity/Select 1-Line/2-Lines
Select 1-Line/2-Lines
Function Overview
Convert to 2-Line changes a drawn wire into a CG display wire.

Convert to 1-Line changes a CG display wire into a wire and end cover.
1. Pulldown Menu
Click on [Electrical (Q)] -> [Edit route (H)] -> [Select 1-Line/2-Lines (K)].
2. Icon Menu
Click on .
- If the edit type is [2-line] [Independent]
- If the edit type is [2-line] [Batch]
- If the edit type is [1-line] [Independent]
- If the edit type is [1-line] [Batch]
1.Command Selection
Commands for editing routes can be selected.
2. Edit method selection

The edit method can be selected from [Convert to 2-Line, Convert to 1-Line].
(1) Convert to 2-Line
Wires and pipes drawn as 1-line are converted to 2-line.
(2). Convert to 1-Line
Wires and pipes drawn as CG wiring are converted to 1-line.
3. Selection method
Independent or batch can be selected.
4. Condition for refining a search

Conditions can be set for the selected subject part.
Electricity-281
(1) Refine by equipment type (layer) of drawn wires.

(2) Refine by construction method of drawn wires.
5. Detail button
Open the Advanced Settings dialog box to make detailed settings for drawing.
1.Wiring information settings

Specify the wiring information to assign to undefined wires when converting to 2-line.
2. Correct button
Correct the wiring information to assign to undefined wires when converting to 2-line.
3. Import wire texts

Specify drawn wire text and import it as Command Dialog wiring information.
Electricity-282
Description of the Elision Symbol Advanced Settings Dialog Box
1.Conversion level settings for wires not connected to devices

Set the standard elevation for each construction method for wires that are not connected to devices
when they are converted to 2-line.
Refer to “material count - Wiring pick-up concepts” for details.
2.Conversion level settings for wires connected to devices

Modify the standard elevation for each construction method for wires that are connected to devices.
Use added counting attributes for wires connected to devices at the equipment/ device layout stage.
3. Construction type
This expresses the type of construction for wiring adjusted when converting to 2-line.
The construction type remains subject even if the line type is changed.
4. Standard elevation
This expresses the standard elevation for each construction type when converting to 2-line.
5. Adjustment value
Adjust the conversion elevation, based on the type of construction for wiring, when converting to 2-
line.
Electricity-283
Input the adjustment value as a positive or negative value on the side, relative to the standard
elevation.
6. Selection settings for undefined wires

Set whether or not to select undefined wires when converting to 2-line.
If the setting is to select undefined wires, they become CG wires as specified in the wiring
information assigned to undefined wires in the Command Dialog.
7. Up/down settings
Set whether or not to convert up/down elements when converting to 2-line.
8. Wiring settings
Set whether or not to delete the original wires from before conversion after converting to 2-line.
9. CG wiring settings
Set whether or not to delete the original CG wires from before conversion after converting to 1-line.
Electricity-284
Warnings
1. On conversion to 2-line
(1)Command Dialog
1) If the check box is checked for the undefined wire selection setting in the “Advanced settings” -
“Other settings” tab, the wiring information dialog box assigned to undefined wires is not
displayed, even when the command is running.
2) The wiring information set in the Wiring Information dialog box assigned to undefined wires is
applied to all selected undefined wires.
(2) Conversion
1) The order of priority for application of wiring information to the same wire depends on the wiring
pick-up concept.
Refer to “material count - Wiring pick-up concepts” for details.
2) Parts drawn in the diagram for defined wires are converted to CG as the parts with the largest
outside diameter.
3) If there is an Up/down element in the diagram, there may be differences between count results
for 1-line and material count results after conversion to 2-line.
4) When converting to 2-line, you are advised to use “Save drawing as” to save.
Depending on the conversion conditions, conversion to 1-line may not restore the same state as
existed before conversion to 2-line.
5) Wire text, end covers, number of cable cores, and number of cable cores text are lost on
conversion to 2-line.
2. On conversion to 1-line
(1) Conversion
1) Trace CG wiring and pipes that have the centers of their CG wiring and pipe ends at the same
position and facing each other, and convert them to one wire.
2) Wires drawn in the diagram for traced CG wiring and pipes assigns the CG wiring and CG
pipes that have the largest outside diameter to wiring information for one wire.
3) End covers are generated at the joints between CG wiring and CG pipes.
4) Up/down elements are not generated.
5) When converting to 1-line, you are advised to use “Save drawing as” to save.
Depending on the conversion conditions, conversion to 2-line may not restore the same state as
existed before conversion to 1-line.
6) Vertical CG wiring and pipes that have their end center points at the same plan position are
excluded from conversion.
7) If only CG wiring accessories are converted, wiring information is not assigned.
Electricity-285
Operation examples
1. Operation example of batch conversion of wires with wire text to 2-Line command
Command toolbar
(1) “Selection method settings” -> “Wiring (1) Set the Edit method in the command OTB to Convert to 2-
settings” -> Selection Line.
(2) Set the Selection method in the command OTB to Batch.
(3) Press the Correct button in the Command Dialog. Set the
wiring information to assign to undefined wires.
“Wire selection” (4) Specify the range to process

(5) Specify diagonal points (4) and (5) of the range in which to
convert to 2-line.
“End Selection” -> “End Convert to 2-Line” (6) Press the Selection Complete button (5) in the command
OTB.
The selected wiring becomes CG wiring.
2. Operation example of batch conversion of wires with wire text and end covers with the Convert to 2-Line command
Command toolbar
(1) “Selection Method Settings” -> “Wiring (1) Set the Edit method in the command OTB to Convert to
Selection” 2-Line.
(2)
Set the Selection method in the command OTB to Batch.
(3)
Specify the range to process
Specify diagonal points (3) and (4) of the range in which to
convert to 2-line.
“End Selection” -> “End Convert to 2-Line” (4) Specify the End Selection button (5) in the command OTB.
Left from the end cover position is converted to “G36”,
and right from the end cover position is converted to “CV8 -
3C”
Electricity-286
3. Operation example of batch conversion of CG wiring with the Convert to 1-Line command
Command toolbar
(1) “Edit method settings” -> “Selection (1) Set the Edit method in the command OTB to Convert to
settings” -> Selection 1-Line.
(2) Set the Selection method in the command OTB to Batch.
(3) Specify the range to process
(4) Specify diagonal points (3) and (4) of the range in which
to convert to 1-line.
“End Selection” -> “End Convert to 1-Line” (5) Press the End Selection button (5) in the command OTB.
The selected CG wiring becomes wiring.
Electricity-287
Electricity/Edit Route
Edit Route
Function Overview
Edit previously drawn cable trays, raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts, ventilation pipes, and CG-displayed wires.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Modifying a System (H)] -> [Edit Route (H)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
When Move route
When Route deforming
When change elevation
When Stretch
When using face/center alignment
Change size/material
2. Process type selection Select parts to draw.

[1] Move route
Specify previously drawn route parts and move them to any position.
Applicable parts are cable trays, raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts, ventilation pipes, and CG-
displayed wires.
Specifications can be made in the plan view, front elevation or side elevation.
[2] Route deforming
Specify previously drawn straight line routes and deform them.
displayed wires.
Specifications can be made in the plan view, front elevation or side elevation.
The following dialog box is displayed, according to the specified part.
If a cable tray, bus duct, or metal duct is specified
Electricity-288
If a raceway is specified
If a ventilation pipe or CG-displayed wire is specified
1 Specify the route deform method

Position to fix is “one end”: On deformation, generate a branch part at one position and then
deform.
Position to fix is “both ends”: On deformation, generate a branch part at two positions and then
deform.
2 Base point specification

The base point for deforming a route can be specified. Base point change is only valid if the
fixed position is “one end”.
If the fixed position is “both ends”, the action is the same as for “Connection face 1”
Center: Deform to match the center of the straight line part.
Electricity-289
Connection face 1: Deform to match the connection face of the inner end of the generated
branch part.
Connection face 2: Deform to match the connection face of the outer end of the generated
branch part.
3 Specification of branch parts

Specify the branch part to generate at the bend when the route of a raceway is deformed.
[3] Change elevation

Change the elevation of the specified route part. Specification is only possible on plan.
displayed wires.
There are three methods for elevation change. When an section is specified in which to change
the elevation, the branch part is generated when the elevation changes.
For cable trays and bus ducts, the Part Selection dialog box is displayed, and the processing
method for connection parts can be set.
If a cable tray is specified if a metal duct is specified
Electricity-290
[4] Face/Center
If parts of differing width sizes are connected, the connection standard can be changed. The
only part type this applies to is cable trays.
It is also possible to change tray width from partway along a straight tray.
If cable trays with differing tray widths are connected to both ends of a straight tray, the side
nearer to the mouse position is changed to the standard.
[5] Change size/material

The sizes and materials of previously drawn route parts can be changed. Specification is only
possible on plan.
displayed wires.
On Finish, the following dialog box is displayed, and the parts to change can be specified.
In the above dialog box, the buttons for parts searched for with frame selection are enabled.
Only parts with their boxes checked are subject to change.
1 The Set Size/Material dialog box for cable trays opens.
A Change item setting

If the check box is checked
Tray widths, main girder heights and materials can be changed with settings after
changes.
If the check box is unchecked
Tray widths, main girder heights and materials can’t be changed.
B Setting before change
Display tray widths, main girder heights and materials before changes.
If multiple cable tray widths, main girder heights and materials are selected, they are
displayed as “mixed”.
C Setting after change
Set tray widths, main girder heights and materials after changes.
D Change setting for girder display
Electricity-291
Change the girder display.

Do not change the girder display.
E Girder display setting
Set girder display after change.
F Changed girder width setting
Set main girder width and secondary girder width after change.
2 The Set Size/Material dialog box for raceways opens.

Change size and material in the modified settings.
Don't change size and material.
Set size and material before change.
If the selected raceway has multiple sizes and materials, it is displayed as “Mixed”.
Set size and material after change.
3 The Set Size/Material dialog box for bus ducts opens.

Change modified settings for distribution system, rated current, conductors, and sizes.
Don’t change the distribution system, rated current, conductors, and sizes.
Display settings for distribution system, rated current, conductors, and sizes before
change.
If the selected bus duct has multiple distribution systems, rated currents, conductors,
and sizes, it is displayed as “Mixed”.
Set the modified settings for distribution system, rated current, conductors, and sizes.
4 The Set Size/Material dialog box for metal ducts opens.
Electricity-292

5 The Set Size/Material dialog box for ventilation pipes opens.

6 The Set Size/Material dialog box for CG-display wires opens.

Change type and size, finished outside diameter, and bend radius in the modified
settings.
Do not change type and size, finished outside diameter, and bend radius.
Display the type and size, finished outside diameter, and bend radius before change.
If the selected CG-display wire has multiple types and sizes, finished outside diameters
and bend radii, it is displayed as “Mixed”.
Set type and size, finished outside diameter, and bend radius in the modified settings.
D Type and Size selection buttons
If the Cable button or the Conduit button is clicked, the type and size can be selected.
3. Move method Select the move method. (deformation method) selection

[1] Free move (free deformation)
Specify the position after movement, with the specified part as the standard, to move it.
[2] Standard move (standard deformation)
Specify the line to be the standard for movement (deformation), then move to a position that is
the move distance (input value) away from that standard.
Electricity-293
4. Face/center standard setting

Specify whether to use the face or center as the standard when using [Route move] or [Route
deform].
Face standard: Processing using a face as the standard.
When a straight line part is specified, the face nearer to the mouse position is the standard face.
Center standard: Processing using the center as the standard.
5. Move distance input When processing a move (deformation) with standard movement, input the move distance.
It is only possible to input the move distance when the move method (deformation method)
selection is set to standard move (standard deformation).
6. Deflection angle setting Specify the deflection angle to use with [Route deformation].
The branch part generated varies according to the part subjected to route deformation.
- Cable tray
The following dialog box is displayed when straight tray is specified on the plan view.
If the deflection angle is set to 30 degree, 45 degree, 60°, or 90 degree, the parts generated
are L branch (90 degree), L branch (60°), L branch (45 degree), L branch (outer right angle), and L
branch (inner/outer right angle).
If an angle other than 30 degree, 45 degree, 60°, or 90 degree is set, it produces a butt shape.
The following dialog box is displayed when a straight tray is specified on the front or side
elevation.
If the deflection angle is set to 90 degree, in/out 1 and in/out 2 are generated.
If an angle other than 90 degree is set, it produces a butt shape.
- Raceway
If a straight raceway is specified on the plan view and the deflection angle is set to 15 degree,
30 degree, 45 degree, or 90 degree, the parts drawn are elbow (15 degree), elbow (30 degree),
elbow (45 degree), elbow (90 degree), and box.
If an angle other than 15 degree, 30 degree, 45 degree, or 90 degree is set as the deflection
angle, it is fixed to elbow (90 degree).
If a straight raceway is specified on the front or side elevation view, it is fixed to elbow (90
degree), regardless of the set angle.
- Bus duct
If a straight bus duct is specified, it is fixed to elbow (90 degree), regardless of the set angle.
- Metal duct
Electricity-294
The following dialog box is displayed when straight metal duct is specified.
Either L branch (IA) or L branch (inner right angle) is generated, regardless of the set angle.
- Ventilation pipe
If a straight ventilation pipe is specified and the deflection angle is set to 45 degree or 90
degree, the parts drawn are elbow (45 degree) or elbow (90 degree).
If an angle other than 45 degree or 90 degree is set, it is fixed to elbow (90 degree).
CG-display wires
- If CG-display wire is specified, draw an elbow to fit the set angle.
7. Section specification
When the elevation is changed, specify the section to change. (This is only displayed if the
processing type selection is set to “Elevation change”)
Change entire route: Change the elevation of the entire route that the specified straight tray is
connected to.
Change between the specified 2 points: Change the elevation of the route that the specified straight
tray is connected to, between two points.
However, elevation change is not possible if the route branches at a T branch or X branch etc.
between the two points.
Change the specified direction at the specified point: Change the elevation of the route that the
specified straight tray is connected to, beyond the specified point.
However, of the cable tray route is looped, the elevation of the whole route changes.
8. Refer to elevation
The elevation can be changed while referring to the level of the specified cable tray.
(This is only displayed if the processing type selection is set to “Elevation change”)
Unchecked: There is no reference to the elevation of the specified cable tray.

Checked: Refer to the elevation of the specified cable tray.
After the section in which to change the elevation is determined, the Elevation Settings dialog box is
displayed, and the elevation can be changed while checking the current elevation.
9. Start level
Set the elevation after change when changing the elevation.
(This is only displayed if the processing type selection is set to “Elevation change”).
This is disabled when Refer to elevation box is checked.
10. Change tray width

Electricity-295
The width of cable trays can be changed.

(This is only displayed if the processing type selection is set to “Face/Center alignment”).
Set the elevation after change when changing the elevation.
(This is only displayed if the processing type selection is set to “Elevation change”).
Unchecked: Can't change tray width.

Checked: The width of the specified cable tray can be changed.
It is also possible to change tray width from partway along a straight tray.
1 Tray width setting

Set tray width after change. When the dialog box opens, the tray width of the specified cable tray
is displayed.
2 Select processing method

Specify whether to change the width of the specified tray, or to change if from partway along the
specified tray.
Context explanation
[1] Change angle

- When moving a route, it is possible to specify the bends of provisional branches in cable
trays, and of CG wires, and change the bend angle.
A: Draw rigid conduit elbow

If a pipe capable of being drawn with normal bends has been edited with the CG Wire Draw
command, it becomes possible to draw a newly-drawn normal part with a normal bend.
Electricity-296
Warnings
1. Wires on cable trays cannot be moved (deformed) with Wires

[Move route] or [Deform route] on the cable tray.
Use the Move Wire command to move wires. If deformation is used, the wiring is rewritten.
Use the Continue mode of the Wire command, etc.
2. Raceway-related parts
Wires connected to branch boxes etc. cannot be moved (deformed) with [Move route] or [Deform
route] on the cable tray.
Use the Move Wire command to move wires.
If deformation is used, the wiring is rewritten. Use the Continue mode of the Wire command, etc.
Also, luminaires do not move in linkage.
3. Route movement
With the kind of movement described below, normal movement is not possible in some situations.
[1] When using [Move route], the route cannot be moved if the pitch between straight raceways is
short and the branch part cannot be reproduced, or if the route movement would move beyond
adjacent branch parts.
[2] The tray size (size annotation) moves in linkage with [Move route]. In the case of parallel
movement, the draw position is maintained, but if the length of a cable tray changes, the draw
position is calculated proportionally. If drawing is with a leader line, tray sizes (size annotations)
drawn on V1.2 or earlier do not move in linkage.
4. Route deformation
When using [Route deform], it is impossible to use it if the shape after deformation cannot generate
a straight line part, or if branch parts overlap.
If [Route deform] is used on a straight line part that is drawn with size annotation, the size
annotation text is left behind.
When [Route deform] is used, and an inclined straight line part is deformed on the front or side
elevation view, the specified start position and end position differ from their positions after
deformation.
5. Hidden lines
If a line is hidden and [Move route] or [Route deform] is used, the hidden line is restored.
The lines can be hidden again with the Hidden Line command of Real-time hidden line can be used.
6. Changing sizes and materials

Plug-in switch boxes on bus duct parts are excluded parts.
Electricity-297
Operation examples
1. Operation example of free-moving cable trays

Command toolbar
(1) “Specify part”

[1] Specify the part to use as the move standard.
Specify a straight cable tray [1] to move.

[2] Specify move destination.
Specify the move destination [2] of the cable tray.
2. Operation example of standard-moving cable trays

Command toolbar

[1] Specify the part to use as the move standard.
Specify a straight cable tray [1] to move.
[2] Specify a standard line with the same angle as part to use as
the move standard.
[3] Specify the line [2] to use as the move standard.

Input the move value.
Input the move distance from the standard.
(2) “Move direction specification”

[4] Specify the move direction.
Specify the move direction [4] of the cable tray.
Electricity-298
3. Operation example of free-deforming cable trays

Command toolbar

[1] Specify the parts to deform.
Specify a straight cable tray [1] to deform.
[2] Pick the start position of deformation.
Specify the position [2] to start deformation.
[3] Specify the end position of deformation.
Specify the position [3] to end deformation.
(2) Branch parts selection

[4] Select branch parts to generate automatically.
Specify the branch parts to generate in the deformed area.
[5] Select the deflection angle.
Select the deflection angle for the deformation.
(3) “Deform destination specification”

[6] Specify the deform destination.
Specify the deform direction [4] of the cable tray.
Electricity-299
4. Operation example of standard-deforming cable trays

Command toolbar

[1] Specify the parts to deform.
Specify a straight cable tray [1] to deform.
[2] Pick the start position of deformation.
Specify the position [2] to start deformation.
[3] Specify the end position of deformation.
Specify the position [3] to end deformation.
[4] Set a standard line with the same angle as the part to be
deformed.
Specify the line [4] to use as the move standard.

Select branch parts to generate automatically.
(2) Branch parts selection

[5] Specify the branch parts to generate in the deformed area.
Input the move value.
[6] Input the move distance from the standard.
(3 “Deformation direction”
[7] Specify the deformation direction.
Specify the deformation direction [5] of the cable tray.
Electricity-300
5. Operation example of changing the width of a cable tray from partway along
Command toolbar

[1] Specify a straight tray.
Specify the part [1] for which to change tray width from partway
along the straight line part.
(2) “Tray width specification”

[2] Specify tray width
Specify the tray width after change.
(3) “Deformation direction”

[3] Specify direction to divide straight tray.
Specify the straight tray divide position [2].
[4] Specify direction to change W of straight tray
Specify the direction [3].
Electricity-301
6. Operation example of changing cable tray size

Command toolbar
(1) “Parts selection”

[1] Select parts to change the size or material of.
Frame select the cable tray [1] [2] to change the size and
material of.
(2) “Change size/material”

[2] Specify size and material after change.
Select [3] the target parts.
Specify the tray width [4] after change.
(3) “Change size/material”
Electricity-302
Let’s drawing a Sleeve and Insert
Sleeve and Insert
1 Sleeve
2 Insert
Electricity/Sleeve
Sleeve
Function Overview
Draw sleeves in beams, walls and floors.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Sleeve and insert (R)] -> [Sleeve (R)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Draw type selection

Select the process type from [draw, edit, CSV output, delete route link information].
- If Draw is selected
Lay out sleeves on the drawing.
- If Edit is selected
Change the sleeve shape, size, elevation, etc.
- When CSV output is selected
Output sleeve sizes and position information in the drawing in CSV format.
* Refer to the precautions for details of output content.
- If delete route linkage information is selected
Delete sleeve and route linkage information drawn with the “Specify penetrating part” checkbox
checked.
2. Draw type selection

Select the draw type from [wall/beam sleeve, floor sleeve].
3. Penetrating part specification

Select whether or not to specify penetrating parts.
Specify the penetrating part and draw a sleeve.
Draw a sleeve without specifying the penetrating part.
4. Lay out parallel to route

Select whether or not to lay out sleeves parallel to the route.
Where the building frame members (walls, beams, double-line sections, arcs) and the route
intersect at an angle on plan, lay the sleeves out parallel to the route
Where the building frame members (walls, beams, double-line sections, arcs) and the route
intersect at an angle on plan, lay the sleeves out parallel to the route.
Electricity-304
Electricity/Sleeve
5. Offset
Select how to handle offset [input value, bare, with insulation, chilled/hot water, auto, set] when
specifying penetrating parts.
Offset can’t be set if wiring (electric parts) is specified. Input size for the drawing stage.
[1] Offset handling: Input value

Specify the offset input value.
[2] Offset handling: Bare

Draw with the offset specified in “Size settings” under advanced settings.
[3] Offset handling: With insulation

[4] Offset handling: Chilled water and Chilled/hot water

[5] Offset handling: Hot water

[6] Offset handling: Automatic

Judge bare, with insulation, and chilled/hot water automatically from the specified parts,
and draw with the offset specified in “Size settings” under advanced settings.
- For duct parts
- For pipe parts
[7] Offset handling: Settings

Judge bare, with insulation, chilled/hot water, hot water and refrigerant pipe automatically
from the specified parts, and draw with the offsets specified in advanced settings for duct,
pipe for general use, refrigerant pipe.
However, if electric parts are specified, the offset specified in Size settings is used.
6. Sleeve size
Specify the sleeve size to use if the penetrating part is not specified.
- Sleeve shape: If the shape is circular
Specify φ size.
- Sleeve shape: If the shape is rectangular
Specify size (WxL).
Electricity-305
Electricity/Sleeve
7. Length
Draw type: Specify the sleeve length for floor sleeves.
8. Elevation
Specify the sleeve elevation to use if the penetrating part is not specified.
The reference standards for sleeve elevation are as follows:
- Wall/beam sleeve
Round: Center reference
Rectangular: Bottom edge reference
- Floor sleeve
Top end of sleeve
Set details.
[1] Hatch settings
Set the hatch pattern line spacing on release of drawing for each drawing scale.
- Drawing scale: Specify drawing scale.

- Hatch pitch: Specify the hatch pattern line spacing for each drawing scale
- Hatch angle: Specify angle of lines in hatch pattern.
Electricity-306
Electricity/Sleeve
[2] Sleeve size settings

- Duct
Set the offset value for each duct size.
- Offset handling: Select from [bare, with insulation].

- Offset: Specify the offset for each size.
- Size: Specify size.
Electricity-307
Electricity/Sleeve
- Pipe for general use

Set the sleeve size for each pipe size.
- Offset handling: Select from [bare, with insulation, chilled/hot water, hot water].
- Pipe size: Specify pipe size.
- Sleeve size: Specify the sleeve size for each pipe size.
- Check box:
The sleeve size range that includes the maximum pipe size is the nominal diameter
plus the specified offset.
Electricity-308
Electricity/Sleeve
- Refrigerant pipe
Set the sleeve size for each refrigerant pipe size.
- Offset handling: Select from [bare, with insulation].

- Pipe size: Specify the size of refrigerant pipe (large).
- Sleeve size: Specify the sleeve size for each size of refrigerant pipe (large).
- Check box:
The sleeve size range that includes the maximum pipe size is the nominal diameter
plus the specified offset.
Electricity-309
Electricity/Sleeve
[3] Size settings

Set offset and other details
- Offset
Specify the sleeve offsets to use for each duct, each pipe, and each tray (electric) that
uses offset handling, when drawing a wall/beam sleeve.
Refer to Explanation of the Command toolbar - Offset about offsets.
- Size for toilet basin
Specify floor sleeve size to use for Japanese-style toilets when drawing floor sleeves.
- Minimum dimension for release of drawing

Draw with the specified dimensions if the sleeve to draw is smaller than the above the
specified dimensions.
- Specify the minimum diameter on release of drawing for circular shapes.
- Specify the minimum diameter on release of drawing for rectangular shapes.
- Flange setting
Specify the flange length to use when drawing a flanged sleeve.
Electricity-310
Electricity/Sleeve
[4] Layer setting

Specify the draw layer to use when specifying parts and when drawing freely
- Layer to draw when specifying parts

Set the draw layer to use when specifying parts and drawing sleeves.
- Input layer
Draw sleeves in the input layer.
- Specified layer
Draw sleeves in the specified layer.
Caution) Make judgments about air conditioning ducts, utility ducts, air conditioning
pipes, sanitary plumbing, and utility pipes as follows, from the function group
number of the specified part.
* The [function code 1] item of the Property item indicates the function group
number.
- Layer for free drawing

Set the draw layer to use when drawing sleeves without specifying parts.
- Input layer
Draw sleeves in the input layer.
- Specified layer
Draw sleeves in the specified layer.
Electricity-311
Electricity/Sleeve
(5) Settings for deleting route link information

This sets the style of a sleeve for which route linkage information has been deleted.
- Change the color of a sleeve for which linkage information with a route has been deleted
If this is checked, the color of the processed sleeve is changed to the specified color.
- Change color
Select the color to use when changing the color of a sleeve for which linkage information
with a route has been deleted.
Electricity-312
Electricity/Sleeve
1. Shape type selection

Select the sleeve draw form.
2. Flange draw
Select whether or not to draw flanged sleeves.
Draw a flanged sleeve.
Electricity-313
Electricity/Sleeve

Draw a flangeless sleeve.
The flange length can be specified in advanced settings.
3. Wall/beam Sleeve Switch button

When drawing sleeves with the draw type set to wall/beam sleeves, and general-purpose
elements specified, this button switches between wall sleeves and beam sleeves.
This button is only enabled when general-purpose elements (lines or arcs) are specified.
4. Sleeve size check

The Sleeve Size Check dialog box is displayed after the penetrating part is specified.
[1] Sleeve size
Specify sleeve size.
[2] Sleeve elevation

Specify elevation of sleeve.
[3] Check box for sorting from center when changing the horizontal size of rectangular ducts
and trays
When changing the horizontal sizes of rectangular ducts and trays, sort the horizontal
sizes of sleeves from the centers of rectangular ducts and trays.
When changing the horizontal sizes of rectangular ducts and trays, sort the horizontal
sizes of sleeves from the bottoms of rectangular ducts and trays.
5. Sleeve edit
The Check dialog box is displayed after sleeve specification when editing sleeves.
[1] Sleeve shape change
Change the sleeve shape. It is possible to interchange between rectangular sleeves and
circular sleeves.
[2] Sleeve size

Change the sleeve size.
[3] Sleeve length

Change sleeve length.
- Beam/wall sleeves
Change sleeve length between from the center and uniform lateral.
- Floor sleeve
Change sleeve length with the top end of the sleeve as the standard.
[4] Sleeve elevation

Specify elevation of sleeve.
[5] Wall sleeve/ beam sleeve switching

Switching is possible if the sleeve was drawn as a wall/beam sleeve.
Can't change when editing floor sleeves.
[6] Switch between sleeve and fire protection zone material

Switching is possible between sleeves and fire protection zone materials (this is not displayed
with HVAC/SAN commands).
Electricity-314
Electricity/Sleeve
Context menu description
1. Context menu
1.Base angle settings (draw type: Floor sleeve only)

- Angle input

2.Check size every time

- If the box is checked
The Sleeve Size Check dialog box that is displayed after sleeve placement is displayed
every time.
- If the box is unchecked
The Sleeve Size Check dialog box that is displayed after sleeve placement is not displayed.
However, the Sleeve Size Check dialog box is displayed if a route is specified that has no
size attribute.
Precautions
1. When drawing wall/beam sleeves

Penetrating part specification: If the check box is checked, the parts that can be specified are as
follows:
[Electric parts]
[1] Cable tray
[2] Bus duct
[3] Metal duct
[4] Wiring
[5] CG wiring
[6]Ventilation pipe
[HVAC/sanitary parts]
[1] Ducts
[2] Pipes
2. When drawing floor sleeves

If the Penetrating Part Specification check box is checked, the subject parts are as shown below.
[Electric parts]
Penetrating part specification: Electric parts can't be specified. Draw with the check box
unchecked
[HVAC/sanitary parts]
[1] Riser duct/pipe
[2] Japanese-style toilet
Electricity-315
Electricity/Sleeve
3. HVAC/SAN parts
The Sleeve command only covers fire protection zone materials if electric parts and penetrating
parts are not specified.
Therefore, even if the type is set to fire protection zone, only sleeves can be drawn if
HVAC/sanitary parts are specified as penetrating parts.
(There are no HVAC/SAN commands that handle fire protection zone materials).
４．CSV output
Output sleeve size and position information drawn in CADEWA to a CSV file.
The loading of output sleeve data is supported by the KAP (specialized CAD/CAM for steel-framed
buildings) system from Katayama Stratech Corp.
When sleeve data is loaded into the KAP system from Katayama Stratech Corp, it can be used for
fixing checks against the steel frame.
The table below shows the format and data content of the sleeve data output by CADEWA.
Note 1 Output origin (X,Y) coordinate values

Output the output origin (X,Y) coordinates of the sleeve data specified with this command.
Note 2 Sleeve numbers

Set sleeve numbers to attributes according to the following rules, and output them.
- Start output from the sleeve with the smallest Y coordinate.
- If the Y coordinates are the same, start output from the sleeve with the smallest X coordinate.
- If the X and Y coordinates are the same, start output from the sleeve with the smallest Z
coordinate.
The sleeve number attributes are initialized (cleared to 0) when re-drawn by route movement, rotate-
move-copy, sleeve edit, etc.
Note 3 Sleeve start point and end point coordinates

The coordinates (X,Y,Z) of the start point and end point of a sleeve are output as relative coordinates,
relative to the output origin.
Note 4 Size rectangles (W/H)

Output rectangular sleeve width and height.
* When a sleeve is loaded into the KAP system, it is handled as a circular sleeve with diameter equal
to the maximum value of width and height.
File names for CSV output files

The file name of an output CSV file should be set with information that enables identification of the
property and drawing etc. when linked with the KAP system.
File name： [件名]_[図面名]_[年月日]_[原点情報（通り芯のＸ軸－通り芯のＹ軸－レベル基準）]

Reference example: CADEWA building_2nd floor beam shape plan sleeve
diagram_20130930_origin-X1-Y1-2FL±0.CSV
- [Property name] - Set a name that can identify the property.

- [Drawing name] - Set a drawing name that can identify the drawing.
- [Date] - Set a name that can identify the file chronologically.
- [Output origin] - Set X,Y,Z origin information that can identify the origin point.
Sleeves subject to output

Electricity-316
Electricity/Sleeve
Output sleeves which have the same scale as the current different scale, and which exist at the same
Z elevation scale.
5. Delete linkage information with a route

Subject sleeves are sleeves that have linkage information with parts.
Operation example
1. Operation example for drawing a sleeve penetrating a beam
(1) “Specify beam” -> “Specify penetrating

part”
[1] Specify wall/beam or line/arc to draw sleeve.
Specify the beam [1] in which to draw a sleeve.
The specified beam is displayed in red.
[2] Specify penetrating part.

Specify the penetrating part [2].
The specified penetrating part is displayed in red.
(2) “Check sleeve size”

[3] Set the sleeve size.
Check the sleeve size, then press the OK button.
Electricity-317
Electricity/Sleeve
(3) “Drawing complete for a sleeve

penetrating a beam”
[4] Specify wall/beam or line/arc to draw sleeve.
Draw a sleeve penetrating a beam, then go back to
screen (1).
2. Operation example for drawing a western-style toilet sleeve penetrating a floor
(1) “Specify penetrating part”

[1] Specify the element to draw a sleeve for.
Specify the Japanese-style toilet [1] to draw a floor-
penetrating sleeve for.
The specified Japanese-style toilet is displayed in
red.
(2) “Check sleeve size”

[2] Set the sleeve size.
Check the sleeve size, then press the OK button.
(3) “Drawing complete for a sleeve

penetrating a floor”
[3] Specify the element to draw a sleeve for.
Draw a sleeve penetrating a floor, then go back to screen
(1).
Electricity-318
Electricity/Sleeve
3. Operation example of changing sleeve size
(1) “Sleeve specification”

[1] Set the sleeve to resize.
(2) “Edit Sleeve dialog box”

[2] The status of the specified sleeve is displayed in
the dialog box.
[3]
Change the width of the sleeve 600->800.
(3) “Size change complete”

[4] The sleeve size is changed.
(If the facilities are drawn by dimensions, the
dimensions also change in linkage).
Electricity-319
Electricity/Sleeve
4. Operation example of sleeve data CSV output
(1) “Origin Specification”

(1) Specify the origin for output of sleeve data (the lower
left intersection point of the axis line).
(2) “Output CSV File Selection”

(2) Save the output file.
Name and save the output sleeve data CSV file.
Press the Save button to go back to (1) origin
specification.
Electricity-320
Electricity/Insert
Insert
Function Overview
Draw inserts at freely specified points, cable trays, raceways, and equipment/devices.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Sleeve and insert (R)] -> [Insert (I)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Saving setting values

Specify the method for saving setting values.
Commands related to inserts can be selected.
3. Process type selection

Select the process type from draw, move, and delete.
[1] Draw
Draw an insert.
[2] Move
Move freely-drawn inserts and cable trays (straight line) or inserts drawn in raceways
(straight line).
[3] Delete
Delete an insert.
4. Subject part selection

Select subject parts, from free, route, and equipment/device.
[1] Arbitrary
Draw an insert at any freely specified point.
[2] Route
Draw inserts cable trays and raceways.
- By batch
Subject parts are cable tray (straight), cable tray (Elbow), cable tray (T branch), cable tray
(X branch), and raceway (straight).
- If independent
Cable tray (straight) and raceway (straight) are subject parts.
[3] Equipment/device
Draw an insert at the layout point for a luminaire for which the mounting location is ceiling.
5. Processing method selection

Select the processing method, from batch and independent.
[1] Batch
Draw inserts for a batch of parts.
[2] Independent
Draw inserts independently for subject parts.
6. Scale factor setting

Set the scale factor for the inserts to lay out, in the range 0.01 to 99.99.
Electricity-321
Electricity/Insert
7. Angle setting
Set the angle for the inserts to lay out, in the range 0.00 to 359.99.
Set details.
[1] Cable tray
Make advanced settings for drawing cable trays.
- Straight tray settings

Make advanced settings for drawing inserts for cable trays (straight).
When batch drawing, the set shape is drawn.
1. An illustration reflecting the setting content of the dialog box is displayed.
2. Check to lay out from the center, at the specified pitches.
3. Input the pitch to use for laying out from the center, at the specified pitches, in the range
300~99999 in single-byte numerals.
6. Check to divide equally, at or below the specified pitch.
7. Input the maximum pitch to use for laying out uniformly, in the range 300~99999 in
single-byte numerals.
8. Check when laying out an insert to a specified distance from the end.
9. Input the distance to use for laying out inserts, as the specified distance from the edge,
in the range 0~300 in single-byte numerals.
- Elbow settings
Make advanced settings for drawing inserts for cable trays (Elbow).
10. Display the illustration.
Electricity-322
Electricity/Insert
13. Check to lay out an insert at the center.
- T branch and X branch settings

Make advanced settings for drawing inserts for cable trays (T branch) and cable trays (X
branch).
14. Display the illustration.
- Spacing setting
Make advanced settings for drawing inserts for cable trays (straight).
18. Check to lay out inserts at the specified pitches.
19. Input the distance to use for laying out inserts in specified pitches, in the range
20. Check to lay out inserts with offsets.
21. Input the distance to use for laying out inserts in offsets, in the range 0~99999 in
single-byte numerals.
[2] Raceway
Make advanced settings for drawing raceways.
- Straight raceway settings

Make advanced settings for drawing inserts for raceways (straight).
1. An illustration reflecting the setting content of the dialog box is displayed.

Electricity-323
Electricity/Insert
6. Check to divide equally, at or below the specified pitch.
7. Input the maximum pitch to use for laying out uniformly, in the range 300~99999 in single-
byte numerals.
9. Input the distance to use for laying out inserts, as the specified distance from the edge, in
the range 0~300 in single-byte numerals.
10. For continuous raceways, unify them and calculate the pitch.
[3] Size settings tab

Set the size of the insert and the length of its center line.
- Attribute setting
Set the insert attributes.
1. Specify the insert size.
2. Specify the insert material.
- Center line length settings

Set the length of the insert center line.
[4] Layer settings tab

Set the draw layer for inserts.
Electricity-324
Electricity/Insert
- Layer settings for free insert drawing

Set the draw layer to use for inserts that are drawn freely.
- Insert draw layer settings when an electric part is selected

Set the draw layer to use when selecting route parts and equipment/device parts to draw inserts.
[5] Initialization button

Reset all advanced setting items to defaults.
1. Shape type selection

Select the insert shape type to draw, from the dialog box below.
[1] Insert Shape and Type Selection dialog box
Select insert shape type.
Electricity-325
Electricity/Insert
- When drawing the center line in the insert shape

Check “Draw center lines”.
2. Base point selection

Select the base point for free drawing, from Center, Left / Top, Right / Top, Left / Bottom, Right /
Bottom, Left / Center, Right / Center, Top / Center, Bottom / Center.
3. Auto layout
When drawing equipment/devices, draw inserts without setting their number or pitch.
Check to automatically lay out equipment/devices.
The table below shows equipment/devices and insert positions for which auto layout is possible.
* Auto layout cannot be used if the Wattage and number of lamps is the same as in the table,
but the shape is different.
4. Dialog Size Switch button

Electricity-326
Electricity/Insert
Enlarge/shrink dialog boxes.
5. Lateral number setting

Input the lateral layout number of inserts, as an integer in single-byte numerals, in the range 1~10.
Use in the drawing of any equipment/device.
6. Longitudinal number setting

Input the longitudinal layout number of inserts, as an integer in single-byte numerals, in the range
1~10.
7. Lateral pitch setting

Input the lateral layout pitch of inserts, as an integer in single-byte numerals, in the range 0~99999.
8. Longitudinal pitch setting

Input the longitudinal layout pitch of inserts, as an integer in single-byte numerals, in the range
0~99999.
9. Lateral Pitch Measurement button

Use this when acquiring the lateral layout pitch of inserts from a drawing.
10. Longitudinal Pitch Measurement button

Use this when acquiring the lateral layout pitch of inserts from a drawing.
Precautions
1. Drawing on equipment/devices
The only equipment/devices subject to this kind of drawing are luminaires for which the mounting
location is ceiling.
Take care in the following situations:
[1] Automatic drawing is not possible for symbols with the number of bolts set to 0. If the bolt
pitch is set to 0, bolts are drawn superimposed at the layout point. The bolt pitch and number
of bolts can be set under “Changing existing parts” for the Creating Parts command
[2]The initial values for bolt pitch, number of bolts and layout point are set by Evolution. The bolt
hole positions may differ for some luminaires.
[3] Even if the layout point was changed before drawing, the layout point from before the
change will be used for the drawing.
[4] The insert layout angle is the same as the Equipment/Device angle. However, the layout
angle for inserts is corrected to the range 0.00 to 359.99°.
[5] inserts drawn with equipment/devices as the subject parts cannot be moved using the Insert
command.
[6] When the Change Scale and Angle command is used to change the scale factor for
equipment/device with previously drawn inserts, the scale factor process is also performed
on the insert layout pitch.
[7] When the Replacement command is used to change the scale factor for equipment/device
with previously drawn inserts, the inserts are deleted.
2. Drawing to routes
If the route subject to drawing is batch processed, the subject parts are cable trays (straight), cable
trays (Elbow), cable trays (T branch), cable trays (X branch), and raceways (straight).
For independent drawing, cable tray (straight) and raceway (straight) are subjects.
[1] Drawing is not possible on routes drawn other than on plan.
[2] Can't draw vertical trays.
Electricity-327
Electricity/Insert
[3] When batch drawing cable trays (straight) and raceways (straight), it is not possible to draw
more than 100 insert layout groups per part. (Independently-drawn inserts and moved inserts
form one layout group)
[4] Inserts drawn in cable trays (Elbow), cable trays (T branch), and cable trays (X branch)
cannot be moved using the Insert command.
[5] If inserts are drawn in cable trays (Elbow), cable trays (T branch), and cable trays (X branch),
they cannot be drawn if the distance from the end exceeds the straight line portion.
[6] In batch drawing, the inserts are drawn using the part length of the cable tray projected onto
the horizontal plane, rather than the actual part length.
[7] The insert layout angle is the angle at which the insert is perpendicular to the route layout
angle. However, the layout angle for inserts is corrected to the range 0.00 to 359.99°.
3. Move
Inserts freely drawn are subject to the move function of the Insert command.
- Inserts drawn in cable trays (straight) and raceways (straight) are subjects.
[1] Inserts can't be moved to other drawings.
[2] Freely drawn inserts can be moved freely, but only individually.
[3] Inserts drawn in cable trays (straight) and raceways (straight) move along the drawn route.
They cannot move if they are not on a route.
4. Draw layer
The draw layer varies according to the subject parts set on the Command toolbar. The layer that
was set the last time the command was closed is still set the next time it starts.
[1] Free: Draw in specified layer. By default, draw in “Elec - Insert - Other - 1”.
[2] Route: Draw in “Elec - Insert - Routing”
[3] Equipment/device: Draw in “Elec - Insert - Equip”
5. Jump
The items that can be set for jumping are as follows:
- Shape (line color, line type, line width, center line)
[2] Scale factor (however, if the value is not in the range 0~99.99, the previous set value is
used).
[3] Angle
[4] Attributes (size/material)
6. Other
[1] Inserts drawn on equipment/devices are automatically deleted when the equipment/device is
deleted.
[2] Inserts drawn on routes are automatically deleted when the route is deleted.
Electricity-328
Electricity/Insert
Operation example
1. -Operation example of batch drawing inserts on equipment/devices
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Equipment/device selection” -> “Range

specification”
-> “Finish”
[1] Select equipment/device to draw.
Specify diagonally-opposite points [1] and [2] to indicate the
range to draw inserts.
The selected equipment/device is displayed in red.
Click the [Finish] button [3].
The equipment/devices to be drawn are indicated in blue.
(* When using auto layout, keep the Auto Layout button in the
Command dialog box checked until this stage.
An insert is drawn in the equipment/device by clicking on the

Finish button [3]).
(2) “Representative equipment/device

specification”
[2] Specify representative equipment/device to draw.
Input of the Auto Layout button in the Command dialog box is
disabled.
The Command toolbar is in the state illustrated below.
Set the scale factor and detail on the Command toolbar.
Set the shape of the Command dialog, the numbers of lateral
and longitudinal items, and lateral and longitudinal spacing
between items.
Specify the representative equipment/device [4] to draw.
(3) “Insert draw”

[3] Draw an insert.
An insert is drawn according to the settings on the Command
toolbar and in the Command dialog box.
If multiple representative equipment/devices are present,

specify all of them or right click and select “Back” to return to
screen (1).
Electricity-329
Electricity/Insert
2. Operation example of batch drawing inserts on a route
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Route selection” -> “Range

specification” -> “Finish”
[1] Select route to draw.
range to draw inserts.
The selected route is displayed in red.
Set the scale factor and detail on the Command toolbar.
Set the shape of the Command dialog.
(2) “Insert draw”

[2] Draw an insert.
An insert is drawn according to the settings on the Command
toolbar and in the Command dialog box.
Electricity-330
Electricity/Insert
3. Operation example of moving inserts drawn on a route
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Insert specification”

[1] Specify the route to draw
Specify the insert [1] to move, which is drawn on a route.
The cursor position along the route is rubber displayed.

[2] Specify the move destination.
When the move destination [2] is specified, the insert is
moved.
Right click and select “Back” before specifying the move
destination [2], to return to screen (1).
Electricity-331
Let’s finishing a drawing
Annotation
1 Wire Text
2 Electric Equipments List
3 Wire List
4 Drawing Symbol
5 Circuit Number
6 Switching Circuit
7 Installed Height
8 Size Annotate
Electricity/Wire Text
Wire Text
Function Overview
Draw text strings that define wire sizes etc.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Wire Text (S)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Command Selection Commands related to Annotation can be selected.
2. Draw method selection The draw method for wire text can be selected.
[1] New
Draw new wire text
[2] Replace
Replace previously drawn wire text.
The draw layer for the acquired wire text is retained.
[3] Same wire texts
Associate previously drawn wire text with multiple wires.
3. Draw shape selection The draw form for wire text can be selected.
[1] Offset
Use the set vertical offset to draw only the text string on the wire.
[2] Leader
Draw text strings with leader lines.
[3] Leader (with frame)
Draw text strings with leader line frames.
[4] Text
Draw text strings only.
[5] Text (with frame)
Draw text strings with frames.
[6] Text (underlined)
Draw text strings underlined.
4. Draw base point selection

The draw base point for wire text can be selected.
However, this is only enabled when the draw form is text, text (with frame) or text (underlined).
5. Correction angle selection

Correction angle is enabled and can be selected when the draw form is leader or leader (with
frame).
6. Text angle setting method

Select the angle setting method for drawn text strings.
[1] Rotation pitch
Determine the text string layout angle according to the set angle pitch, then draw the text string.
Select the set angle from 15, 30, 45, 90 or 180°.
[2] Draw angle
Draw with the set angle.
However, this is only enabled when the draw form is leader or leader (with frame).
7. Text angle Set the text angle corresponding to the above rotation pitch [1] or draw angle [2].
Electricity-333
8. Advanced Settings button

Open the Advanced Settings dialog box to set line terminator type, section area ratio and vertical
offset.
9. Panel Station Show or hide the dialog box.
1. Wire text string list

Display added wire text and make selections.
Press and hold the keyboard shift key while clicking on list lines to select the range between the first
line clicked on and the second line.
Press and hold the keyboard Ctrl key while clicking on list lines to toggle the clicked line between
selected and deselected status.
It is also possible to drag to select a range.

Double click on a list line to display the Wire Text Info dialog box.
2. Add button
Click to add to the wire text string list.
The Wire Text Info dialog box is displayed after the button is pressed.
3. Correct button
Select one line from the list of added wire texts, then click on the Correct button to display the Wire
Text Info dialog box.
This is the same as a double click on a line in the wire text list.
4. Delete button
Click to delete the text string selected in the wire text string list.
Multiple text lines can be deleted at once. [6] Refer to “1. Wire text string list” for the multiple
selection method.
5. Wire text import button

Click to add to the wire text strings drawn in the drawing to the list.
6. UP button
Click to move the text string selected in the wire text string list to a higher position in that list.
7. DOWN button
Click to move the text string selected in the wire text string list to a lower position in that list.
8. Pipe Info
Information checking the relationships between selected pipes and wires, based on section area
ratios set in the pipe and wire masters provided by the system or set in advanced settings, is
displayed.
Wire and pipe masters provided by the system are Noteditable.

Wire and pipe sizes set by the system are reference values.
Carefully consider the content of the building, the types of load, the installation method, etc. and, if
the wiring is inappropriate, select appropriate wiring.
Electricity-334
9. Size calculation
Click to change the pipe sizes in the pipe information in 8. above.
10. Wire text draw settings

This can be used to set whether or not to draw the second and subsequent lines of the wire text
string list.
Description of the Wire Text Info dialog box
1. Wire text correction Wire text set in 2.~5. below can be displayed, and changed by manual input.
Wire names can be input manually. They can also be selected from history.
If wire text is input manually, the information set in 2.~5. below is not changed.
Jump, import wire texts, size calculation, properties, property annotation
Note that information set in 2.~5. below is also used.
2. Wire type settings Set and display wire types and numbers of wires.
When the Select button is pressed, the Hierarchy menu for wire type and size selectioNumberpens
and can be used to set wire types and sizes.
If other parts are selected, wire names can be input manually.
Electricity-335
Numbers of wires can be selected from the list box.

If “Number wire” is checked, wire text can be drawn without a wire type.
3. Ground wire setting Set and display the ground wire size.
When the Select button is pressed, the Hierarchy menu for ground wire size selectioNumberpens
and can be used to set ground wire types and sizes.
If “Number ground wire” is checked, wire text can be drawn without a ground wire.
Electricity-336
4. Pipe type settings Set and display pipe types and numbers of wires.
When the Select button is pressed, the Hierarchy menu for pipe type and size selectioNumberpens
and can be used to set pipe types and sizes.
If “conduit and other parts” is selected, pipe names can be input manually.
The numbers of pipes can be selected from the list box.

If “Number pipe” is checked, wire text can be drawn without a pipe type.
5. Pipe size calculation

If the message “Pipe size is too large! ” or “Pipe size is too small! ” is displayed, click the Size
Calculation button to recalculate and change the pipe size.
When the message “There is Number part of this type that has a section area ratio of OO% or less”
or “Check the pipe size”, the pipe size will not be calculate.
Electricity-337
Description of the Select wire type/ground wire size dialog box
1. Wiring Parts selection menu

Select the wiring parts selection menu that was edited in the Edit Wiring Parts dialog box.
2. Edit button
Opens the Edit Wiring Parts dialog box.
3. Wire name
Display the wiring that was selected in the hierarchy menu and size list.
4. Selection type
Select the types to display in the hierarchy menu.
Electricity-338
Description of the Select wire type and ground wire size dialog box
1. Ground wire parts selection menu

Select the ground wire parts selection menu that was edited in the Edit Wiring Parts dialog box.
2. Edit button
3. Ground wire
Display the ground wire that was selected in the hierarchy menu and size list.
4. Selection type
Electricity-339
Description of the Select Pipe Type/Size dialog box
1. Pipe parts selection menu

Select the pipe parts selection menu that was edited in the Edit Pipe Parts dialog box.
2. Edit button
Opens the Edit Pipe Parts dialog box.
3. Pipe name
Display the pipe that was selected in the hierarchy menu and size list.
4. Selection type
Electricity-340
Description of the Edit Wiring Parts dialog box.

Select the wiring parts selection menu to register.
2. Hierarchy menu
Select the hierarchy of wiring to register.
3. Save Selection Menu button

Save the wiring parts selection menu.
4. Delete Selection Menu button

Delete the wiring parts selection menu.
5. Edit screen
(1) Show/ Hide
Set whether to show or hide the size list of the Select Wire Type/Size dialog box.
(2) Wiring part code

Set the number of the wire to register.
(3) Wiring part name

Set the name of the wire to register.
(4) Size list display

Set the name to display in the size list of the Select Wire Type/Size dialog box.
(5) Nominal diameter

Set the nominal diameter.
(6) Outside diameter cross sectional area

Set the outside diameter cross sectional area for size calculations.
(7) Allowable current I

Set the allowable current value to use to calculate main line size.
(8) Allowable current II

(9) Allowable current III

(10) Allowable current IV

(11) Finished outside diameter

Set the finished outside diameter to use with the Draw CG Wiring command.
(12) Approximate calculated weight
Electricity-341
Set the approximate calculated weight.
(13) Standard attenuation

Set the amount of attenuation.
(14) Set wire/cable bend radius

Set the cable bend radius to use with the Draw CG Wiring command.
(15) Add button

Add user-registered wiring.
６．Delete button
Delete registered wiring parts.
７．OK button
Save edited wiring parts content.
８．Cancel button
Discard edited wiring parts content.
Description of the Edit Ground Wire Parts dialog box

Select the ground wire parts selection menu to register.
2. Hierarchy menu
Select the hierarchy of ground wires to register.

Save the ground wire parts selection menu.

Delete the ground wire parts selection menu.
5. Edit screen
(1) Show/ Hide
Set whether to show or hide the size list of the Select Wire Type/Ground Wire Size dialog box.

Set the number of the ground wire to register.

Set the name of the ground wire to register.
Set the name to display in the size list of the Select Wire Type/Ground Wire Size dialog box.


Electricity-342

Set the allowable current value.







(15) Add button

Add a user-registered ground wire.
６．Delete button
Delete registered ground wire parts.
７．OK button
Save edited ground wire parts content.
８．Cancel button
Discard edited ground wire parts content.
Electricity-343
Description of the Edit Pipe Parts dialog box

Select the pipe parts selection menu to register.
2. Hierarchy menu
Select the hierarchy of pipes to register.
Save the pipe parts selection menu.

Delete the pipe parts selection menu.
5. Edit screen
(1) Show/ Hide
Set whether to show or hide the size list of the Select Pipe Type/Size dialog box.
(2) Pipe parts code

Set the number of the pipe to register.
(3) Pipe material name

Set the name of the pipe to register.

Set the name to display in the size list of the Select Pipe Type/Size dialog box.

(6) Inner diameter

Set the inner diameter.
(7) Inner cross sectional area

Set the inner cross sectional area to use in size calculations.
(8) Normal bend radius R

Set the bend radius of a normal bend.
(9) Normal bend straight length

Set the length of the straight part of a normal bend.
(10) Set conduit bend radius

Set the bend radius and hatching of conduit.
(11) Add button

Add user-registered pipes.
６．Delete button
Delete registered pipe parts.
７．OK button
Electricity-344
Save edited pipe parts content.
８．Cancel button
Discard edited pipe parts content.
1. Line terminator type selection Select the line terminator type shape for the leader line.
2-lines terminator type setting Set the dimensions of the line terminator type. (DimensioNumbern release of drawing)
Electricity-345
3. Section area ratio setting Set section area ratios

Setting values on installation are based on “Internal Wiring Regulation (1995), Chapter 4 Low-
voltage wiring methods, Section 410 Metal pipes, and Section 415 Plastic pipes”, by the Japan
Electric Association.
Press the “Reset to standard settings” button to return all setting values to their installed values.
4. Shape settings
Set the standards for vertical offset, lateral offset, and frame shape to use when the draw form is
offset, leader (with frame), or text (with frame).
Precautions
1. Drawing text strings If the draw form is offset, the text is drawn parallel to the specified wire. If not, it is drawn horizontally.
2. Subject parts which can be drawn

Parts for which wire text can be drawn are wires and up/down symbols.
However, if the draw form is offset, up/down symbols cannot be drawn.
3. Same wire texts There is Number limit to the number of wires which can specified for one wire text.
A line terminator type is added if the draw form of the specified wire texts is leader or leader (with
frame), or if there is a real intersection point between the specified wire and the leader line.
4. Offset When drawing with offset as the draw form, specify only the straight line parts of wires.
Electricity-346
5. Leader or leader (with frame)

The angle of leader lines when the draw form is leader or leader (with frame) follows the correction
angle from the Command toolbar.
6. Acquisition items when using Jump

Information which can be acquired when using Jump consists of the Command toolbar draw base
point, Fig style settings, text style settings, draw layers, and the following wire text attributes.
Wire text attributes acquired when jumping
- With/without wires
- Wire part name
- Text strings when “wires etc.” is selected
- Number of wires
- With/without a ground wire
- Ground wire part name
- With/without pipes
- Pipe part name
- Text strings when “pipes etc.” is selected
- Number of pipes
7. Hierarchy menu When the hierarchy menus for wire type, ground wire type, and pipe type are opened, they take the
state they had last time they were opened in the history.
However, if Jump etc. is used to import a wire text string that did Notexist within the previous history
level, all types are opened, regardless of the previous history.
8. Paper layout
Wire text can be drawn on the paper layout.

1) Wiring part edits can be registered from the various commands that display the Wire Text Information
dialog box.
2) The number of wires and pipes that can be registered is up to 99 parts for each type displayed in the
hierarchy menu.
Table commands.
Electricity-347
Operation example
1. Operation example of drawing wire text with offset
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Draw wire text”

[1] Draw wire text with offset.
Specify the wire to draw [1].
The rubber moves along the wire and specifies the draw
position [2].
2. Operation example of drawing wire text with a leader line or leader line (with frame)

[1] Draw wire text with a leader line or leader line (with frame).
The position at which the wire is specified is the leader
position.
Specify turning points [2], [3].
Up to two turning points can be specified, and after that,
specify the direction.
To make only one turning point, specify [2] and [3] on the same
point.
“Complete” can also be used from the context menu.
3. Operation example of drawing wire text with text, text (underlined), or text (with frame).

[1] Draw wire text with text, text (underlined), or text (with
frame).
Electricity-348
4. Operation example of replacing wire text
(1) “Replace wire text”

[1] Specify the wire text to replace.
Specify the wire text to replace [1].
The rubber moves along the wire and specifies the draw
position [2].
The draw layer from the replacement is retained.
5. Operation example of associating the same wire text with multiple wires
(1) “Associate with same wire texts”

[1] Associate the same wire text with multiple wires.
Specify the wire text [1].
When the intersection point between the wire and the leader
line is specified [2],
draw the line terminator type at the intersection point.
If there is Number intersection point between the wire and the
leader line, drawing other thaNumberf leader lines is only
associated with wires and wire text.
Electricity-349
Electricity/Electric Equipments List
Electric Equipments List

Function Overview
Search for parts within drawing and create a legend table for Equipment/Devices.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Electric Equipments List (E)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
2. Legend table correction The Legend Table Creation List dialog box opens and equipment/device part text can be set.
3. Draw method selection The draw method for Electric Equipments Lists can be selected.
[1] New
Draw a new Electric Equipments List.
[2] Replace
Replace a previously drawn Electric Equipments List.
4. Draw base point selection The draw base point for Electric Equipments Lists can be selected.
5. Advanced Settings button The Advanced Settings dialog box can be opened and used to make draw settings.
Electricity-350
Description of the Legend Table Creation List dialog box
1. Reference master file Electric Equipments List settings can be saved, referred to, and deleted.
The button can be used to refer to existing master files.
Electric Equipments List settings that were changed using the button can be saved by
overwriting a master file, or used to create a new master file.
Electric Equipments List master files are stored in CADEWA Real installation drive:\CADEWA
Installation folder\ACES＿E\MST\HANREI.
When installed, the system provides
Use the button to delete a saved master file.
Electricity-351
2. Electric Equipments List draw settings

Of items displayed in the list, those checked for drawing are drawn in the order in which they are
listed.
Up to 50 items can be displayed in the list.
Left click on the title fields at the top of the list to sort items in the following orders:
- Draw: Gather rows for which Draw is checked at the top.
- Part name: Sort iNumberrder of codes and text strings assigned to parts.
- Installed Height: Sort iNumberrder of Installed Height, from the smallest value.
- Remarks: Do not sort.
3. Editing Electric Equipments List text

Legend table text can be added, corrected, and deleted.
[1] Add button
Click on the Add button to open the Legend Table Setup dialog box, which can be used to set
legend table text.
[2] Correct button

Click on the Correct button to open the Legend Table Setup dialog box, and correct legend table
text, while maintaining information in the selected row.
Electricity-352
* Symbols that have been registered from the Symbol Registration command - Create New Part
Shape And Attributes are not displayed.
* Symbols that have been registered from the Symbol Registration command - Change Existing
Part Shape And Attributes are displayed.
[3] Delete button

Click on the Delete button to delete the selected row.
Multiple rows can be deleted at once.
4. Referring to Electric Equipments Lists

An Electric Equipments List can be created from previously drawn Electric Equipments Lists and
from drawing data.
[1] Legend Table Refer button
An Electric Equipments List the same as a previously drawNumberne can be created.
When the Legend Table Refer button is used to acquire a previously drawn Electric Equipments
List, the list content is rewritten with the acquired information.
[2] Part Search button
An Electric Equipments List can be created by searching for parts from previously drawn
drawings. The drawings subject to search can be switched according to the search method
selection.
Cable trays, raceways, floor ducts, wires and inserts are not covered by the search.
5. Draw text selection Check/uncheck the draw check boxes for legend table text strings displayed in the list.
[1] “Draw subjects”
Check to draw all selected items.
[2] “Cancel Draw”
Uncheck draw on all selected items.
6. Sort
[1] Auto button
Automatically sort the legend table text strings displayed in the list, using part type, part name,
and Installed Height as keys.
[2] Up/down buttons
Move the selected Note table text up or down. (Multiple selections can be made)
Electricity-353
7. Additional text batch settings

Batch set the set additional text to all items displayed in the list.
When the Batch Setup button is pressed, additional text is assigned to the Installed Heights for the
lines selected in the list.
When the Cancel Batch Setup button is pressed, additional text is canceled from the Installed
Heights for the lines selected in the list.
8. Scale factor batch settings Batch set the set scale factor to all lines selected in the list.
9. Installed Height setting Set whether or not to draw Installed Height in the legend table when the Installed Height is 0.
10. Mount height field draw setting

Set whether or not to draw the mount height field.
11 Remarks field draw setting

Set whether or not to draw the remarks field.
12. Set title field

Call the Set Title Field dialog box.
Set the text string for the title field.
13. Advanced settings for the equipment/device legend table

Call the Equipment/Device Legend Table Advanced Settings dialog box.
Electricity-354
Description of the Legend Table Setup dialog box
1. Parts names 1, 2 settings

Set part names 1 and 2. When then Correct button is pressed, the Equipment/Device command
Part Selection dialog box opens for selection of parts.
However, concentrated switches, combined switches, building parts and “other” parts cannot be
selected.
The shapes of the selected parts are displayed in the preview window in the upper left.
2. Scale factor setting Set the scale factor to use when an Electric Equipments List has been drawn in a drawing, taking the
size at which the table is drawn to fill the full frame height of one row as 1.00.
3. Installed Height setting Set installation method and cable bundles.

[1] Additional text setting: Set the text string to be added to Installed Height.
The text will not be drawn if the check is removed. Refer to the Installed Height command.
[2] Installed Height: Set Installed Height. Refer to the Installed Height command.
The setting content is displayed in the preview window.
[3] Mounting location Set the mounting location. Refer to the Installed Height command.
4. Remark settings Set the text string to draw as a remark.
Description of the Search Method Selection dialog box
1. Search method selection [1] Search all open drawings

Make all opened drawings subject to search.
[2] Search iNumberne drawing
Of the opened drawings, make only the active drawing subject to search.
[3] Search only the selected sheets of all open drawings
Electricity-355
Search for parts in the selected sheets of all open drawings.

[3] Search only the selected sheets of one drawing
Make only the active sheets of open drawings subject to search.
Cable trays, raceways, floor ducts, wires and inserts are not covered by the search.
2. Refine Conditions button Set conditions for refining a search for parts.
Description of the Refine Conditions dialog box
1. Refine conditions list Set condition for refining a search
2. Select All button Select all items in the list.
3. Deselect All button Deselect all items in the list.
Electricity-356
4. Invert Selection button Invert the selection status of items in the list.
1. Offset settings Set vertical offset and lateral offset.
2. Draw settings [1] Base line: Set the text standard and shape standard.
[2] Text adjustment If the outline is selected according to the draw base line, set whether or not to
perform text correction.
[3] Single row height: Set the height of one row to use when set to an outline standard.
[4] Width of part shape field: Set the width of the part shape field to use when set to an outline
standard.
[5] Width of part name field: Set the width of the part name field to use when set to an outline
standard.
[6] Installed Height field width: Set the width of the Installed Height field to use when set to an
outline standard.
[7] Remarks field width: Set the width of the Remark field to use when set to an outline standard.
3. Set text position Set Text Position button: Set the text positions of the part name field, mount height field, and remarks field.
Precautions
1. Legend table text draw settings

Legend table text will not be drawn as drawing data if the draw check is removed.
The Legend Table Refer button only acquires drawn text. To save legend table text for which the
draw check is removed, save it as master data before ending the command.
2. Number of legend table text registrations

The maximum number of data items that can be registered to be drawn at one time in part addition
or part search etc. is 256.
To draw more than 256, separate them to draw in two groups.
3. Legend Table Refer button

When the Legend Table Reference button is used to acquire a previously drawn Electric
Equipments List, the list content is rewritten with the acquired information.
4. Jumping
Jumping acquires the attributes of an Electric Equipments List and can draw an Electric
Equipments List with the same content.
Electricity-357
However, information on text height, text spacing, draw layers and advanced settings follow the
settings that were in effect last time the function ended.
5. Refining searches
The Refine button can be used to refine the content of an Electric Equipments List imported with a
reference master file or the Legend Table Refer button, but data not covered by the refinement is
deleted from the list. To restore data that was excluded from the refinement, use the reference
master file again or refer to the Electric Equipments List.
6. Excluded parts
Parts, other than the following, that can be drawn with the Equipment/Device command, are subject
to part search.
Excluded part types are concentrated switches, combined switches, construction parts, and “Other”
parts.
However, combined switches are searched as their individual switch components in part searches.
7. Drawing equipment/device parts

Part shapes that are drawn in the part shape column are calculated with reference to the frame
height to fit within the frame.
Therefore, some parts may protrude from the frame.
8. When equipment/device parts are edited with commands that handle them
Shapes drawn in the part shape field are registered with the same structure as equipment/device
parts that can be drawn with the Equipment/Device command, so part shapes can be edited with
commands that handle equipment/device parts.
The commands that can edit part shapes, and the associated Precautions, are as follows:
- Jump
Jump from the part shape to the Equipment/Device command. However, shape information is the
only information that can be acquired in this way.
- Replacement command
Part shapes can be replaced. However, when parts are replaced with other parts having different
shapes and layout points, they may protrude from the frames or have misplaced layout points.
Also, if attributes are not inherited through the replacement, the parts may become subject to
material counting or be displayed with CG.
- Change Scale and Angle command
The scale factors and angles of part shapes can be changed.
- Move Equipment/Device command
Part shapes can be moved.
- Wire command
Wires can be connected to part shapes.
- Up/down command
Up/down symbols can be drawn on part shapes.
- Drawing Symbol command
Drawing Symbols can be drawn on part shapes, and attributes can be assigned to them.
- Circuit Number. command
Circuit numbers can be drawn on part shapes, and attributes can be assigned to them.
However, when Circuit numbers can be drawn on part shapes, they become subject to panel
diagrams and the Panel Display command.
- Switching Circuit command
Switching Circuits can be drawn on part shapes for switches, luminaires, ventilation fans, and
parts related to power loads and solar power, and attributes can be assigned to them.
- Installed Height command
Installed Heights can be drawn on part shapes, and attributes can be assigned to them.
- Property annotation and the Property command
Part shapes can be displayed and changed as equipment/device parts, and their properties can
be drawn.
- Change Ceiling Height command
The floor heights and ceiling heights of part shapes can be changed, and they can be assigned
room names.
9. Handling with the Base command

The commands to copy and move Electric Equipments Lists, the Delete Inside Frame command and
the Delete One Element command, can be used to batch search the whole table, even without using
frame specification to surround the whole table.
However, if parts shapes are edited with the commands for Replacement, scale factor and angle
change, and subject copying are handled individually.
Electricity-358
With commands other than those to copy and move Electric Equipments Lists, the Delete Inside
Frame command and the Delete One Element command, part shapes are handled individually.
Operation example
1. -Operation example of creating an Electric Equipments List
Command toolbar
(1) “Legend table text setting”

[1] Open the Legend Table Creation List dialog box.
The Legend Table Creation List dialog box opens when the
Correct Legend Table button on the Command toolbar is
used, or when the command is started.
[2]
Set the legend table text.
The Add button opens the Legend Table Setup dialog box,
which can be used to set part names, Installed Heights, and
remarks.
Previously set legend table text can be corrected using the

Correct button.
Press the OK button to draw.
(2) “Refer to the Electric Equipments List”

[1] Previously drawn Electric Equipments Lists can be
referred to.
When a previously drawn Electric Equipments List is specified,
content identical to that table is displayed in the Legend Table
Creation List dialog box and can be added or changed.
At this stage, the information referred to is added at the end

content of the Legend Table Creation List dialog box.
Electricity-359
(3) “Part search”

[1] Parts can be searched for within drawings. [UP TO HERE]
Previously drawn parts can be searched for in all open
drawings, or in the active drawing (searching in 1 drawing).
Part searching acquires part names and Installed Heights, and

displays them in the Legend Table Creation List dialog box.
The Refine Conditions button can be used to set which parts

are subject to the part search.
2. -Operation example of referring to the master file to create an Electric Equipments List
The Legend Table Creation List dialog box
(1) “Refer to master file”

[1] The Electric Equipments List master file can be referred
to.
Press the button in the Legend Table Creation List
dialog box to open the Master File Reference dialog box.
Electricity-360
(2) “Editing an Electric Equipments List after

referring to it”
[1] “An Electric Equipments List that has been referenced
can be edited.”
The referenced Electric Equipments List can be edited with
the Add, Correct, and Delete buttons.
(3) “Refining a referenced Electric

Equipments List”
[1] A referenced Electric Equipments List can be refined.
A referenced Electric Equipments List can be refined by
part types.
Also, if a part search is performed on a referenced Electric
Equipments List, Draw checks are only added for items
drawn in the drawing.
At this stage, if there are any items that are not listed in the
referenced Legend Table Creation List dialog box, they are
added at the end.
(4) “Saving an edited Electric Equipments

List”
[1] An edited Electric Equipments List can be saved.
After editing a referenced Electric Equipments List, press
the button to open the Save Master File dialog box
and save the Electric Equipments List by overwriting the
master file, or by creating a new master file.
Master files can be saved for newly created Electric

Equipments Lists, not just for referenced ones.
Electricity-361
Electricity/Wire List
Wire List
Function Overview
Search for cable bundles within a drawing and draw a Wire List.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Wire List (H)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
2. Wire List correction The Create Wire List dialog box opens and Note table text can be set.
3. Draw method selection The draw method for Wire Lists can be selected.
[1] New
Draw a new Wire List.
[2] Replace
Replace a previously drawn Wire List.
The Note table draw layer from before the replacement is retained.
4. Draw base point selection The draw base point for the Wire List can be selected.

Open the Advanced Settings dialog box to set the drawing of offsets, End Covers and
protection pipes.
Electricity-362
Description of the Create Wire List dialog box
1. Referenced master file Wire List settings can be saved and referred to as a master file.
The ___ button can be used to refer to existing master files.
Wire List settings that were changed using the button can be saved by overwriting a master
file, or used to create a new master file.
Electricity-363
Wire List master files are stored in CADEWA Real installation drive:\CADEWA Real Installation
folder\ACES＿E\MST\RAN.
When installed, the system provides

Use the button to delete a saved master file.
2. Note table text draw settings

Of items displayed in the list, those checked for drawing are drawn in the order in which they are
listed.
[1] Draw: Gather rows for which Draw is checked at the top.
[2]Layer Number.: Layer numbers selected for the facility type are displayed.
Facility type: Change the order of display in the layer information settings.
Double click on the wire text string to correct to display the dialog box shown below.
The Layer Settings command can be used to set facility types.
Refer to the Layer command for details.
[3] Installation method Sort in order of installation method number.

Cable bundles: Sort in order of number of cables, from the smallest.
Ground wire: Sort in order of number of cables, from the smallest.
Remark: Sort in order of text strings.
End Cover: Click on the list to toggle between drawing and not drawing End Covers.
End Cover drawing is switching in linkage with the list in the Create Wire List dialog box.
Electricity-364
[4] Wire text: Sort in order of codes and text strings assigned to wires, ground wires, and pipes.
Protection pipe: Sort in order of codes and text strings assigned to pipes.
Remarks: Do not sort.
Wire text, protection pipes, and remarks can be set.
Remarks can be entered directly by double clicking on the wire text string to correct.
3. Editing Note table text Note table text can be added, corrected, and deleted.
[1] Add button
Click on the Add button to open the Note Table Setup dialog box, which can be used to set Note
table text.
[2] Correct button

Click on the Correct button to open the Note Table Setup dialog box, maintaining information in
the selected row, and correct Note table text.
Electricity-365
[3] Delete button

Click on the Delete button to delete the selected row (multiple selections can be made).
4. Referring to Wire Lists

A Wire List can be created from previously drawn Wire Lists and from Number of Cable Cores in
drawing data.
[1] Wire List Refer button
A Wire List the same as a previously drawn one can be created.
[2] Cable Bundle Search button
A Wire List can be created by searching for Number of Cable Cores in previously drawn drawings.
The cable bundle search can be switched between searching one target drawing of those that are
open or searching all open drawings, and it is also possible to search only the selected sheet of a
drawing.
[3] Refine Conditions button The Note table text displayed in the list can be refined by facility type
and installation method.
Electricity-366
5. Draw text selection

Check/uncheck the check boxes for Note table text strings displayed in the list.
[1] “Draw subjects”
Check to draw all selected items.
[2] “Cancel Draw”
Uncheck draw on all selected items.
6. Sort
[1] Auto button
Automatically sort the Note table text strings displayed in the list, using installation method,
cable bundles, and ground Number of Cable Cores as keys.
[2] Up/down buttons
Move the selected Note table text up or down (multiple selections can be made).
7. Cable bundle search settings

If the referenced master is used for a cable bundle search, facility types are ign ored, and for
matches having the same installation method, cable bundles, ground wires and remarks, the top
wire text and protection pipe in the list is acquired to fill out blanks.
8. End Covers Draw form

The draw shape of End Covers in the Wire List can be selected.
9. Protection pipe draw settings

When the box is checked, the text string “protection pipe” is displayed in protection pipe rows within
the Wire List.
Example: (CD16) -> Protection pipe (CD16)
10. Remark draw settings When the box is checked, the remark field of the Wire List can be drawn.
11. Title field settings Titles for Wire Lists can be edited.
When subjects are checked, the text strings of the Wire List can be drawn.
Electricity-367
12. Wire List Advanced Settings

This is the same as the Detail button in the command OTB.
Open the Advanced Settings dialog box to set the drawing of offsets, End Covers and protection
pipes.
Description of the Note Table Setup dialog box
1. Facility type settings The Layer Settings command can be used to set facility types.
Refer to the Layer command for details.
2. Installation method and cable bundle settings

Installation method and cable bundles can be set.
[1] Installation method selection

The installation method for wires can be set.
The line type for the selected installation method is displayed in the preview window on the
right.
Check in raceways to display raceways in the preview window.
[2] Number of Cable Cores
Settings can be made for Number of Cable Cores, ground Number of Cable Cores, HVAC
pipes, bundling methods, and remarks, and the setting content is displayed in the preview
window.
The setting content is the same as that for the Number of Cable Core command.
Electricity-368
3. Wire text settings Wire text can be set.

Refer to the Wire Text (Independent) command for the setting method.
Set and display protection pipe types.

When the Correct button is pressed, the Hierarchy menu for pipe type and size selection
opens and can be used to set pipe types and sizes.
Number protection pipe Check

Click on the Delete button to delete the set protection pipe.
Electricity-369
Description of the Wire Text Info dialog box
1. Wire text correction Wire text set in 2.~3. below can be displayed, and changed by manual input.
Wire names can be input manually. They can also be selected from history.
If wire text is input manually, the information set in 2.~3. below is not changed.
Jump, refer to and import Note tables, size calculation, properties, property annotation, etc.
Note that information set in 2.~3. below is also used.
2. Wire type settings Set and display wire types and numbers of wires.
When the Select button is pressed, the Hierarchy menu for wire type and size selection opens and
can be used to set wire types and sizes.
Even if other parts are selected, wire text can be set by manual input.
Numbers of wires can be selected from the list box.

If “Number wire” is checked, wire text can be drawn without a wire type.
3. Ground wire setting Set and display the ground wire size.
When the Select button is pressed, the Hierarchy menu for ground wire size selection opens and
can be used to set ground wire types and sizes.
Electricity-370
If “Number ground wire” is checked, wire text can be drawn without a ground wire.
4. Protection pipe settings Set and display pipe types and sizes.
When the Select button is pressed, the Hierarchy menu for pipe type and size selection opens and
can be used to set pipe types and sizes.
Electricity-371
The numbers of pipes can be selected from the list box.

If “Number pipe” is checked, wire text can be drawn without a pipe type.
5. Pipe size calculation

If the message “Pipe size is too large! ” or “Pipe size is too small! ” is displayed, click the Size
Calculation button to recalculate and change the pipe size.
When the message “There is Number part of this type that has a section area ratio of OO% or less”
or “Check the pipe size”, the pipe size will not be calculated.
The wire sizes and pipe sizes are calculated by the system on the basis of the “2006 Edition of the
Construction Equipment Design Standard”.
The wire and pipe sizes in the master differ between manufacturers, so the calculation results are
intended as reference values.
Description of the Select wire type/ground wire size dialog box

Select the wiring parts selection menu that was edited in the Edit Wiring Parts dialog box.
2. Edit button
Electricity-372
3. Wire name
Display the wiring that was selected in the hierarchy menu and size list.
4. Selection type
Description of the Select wire type and ground wire size dialog box

Select the ground wire parts selection menu that was edited in the Edit Wiring Parts dialog box.
2. Edit button
Electricity-373
3. Ground wire
Display the ground wire that was selected in the hierarchy menu and size list.
4. Selection type
Description of the Select Pipe Type/Size dialog box

Select the pipe parts selection menu that was edited in the Edit Pipe Parts dialog box.
2. Edit button
Opens the Edit Pipe Parts dialog box.
Electricity-374
3. Pipe name
Display the pipe that was selected in the hierarchy menu and size list.
4. Selection type
Description of the Edit Wiring Parts dialog box.

Select the wiring parts selection menu to register.
2. Hierarchy menu
Select the hierarchy of wiring to register.

Save the wiring parts selection menu.

Delete the wiring parts selection menu.
5. Edit screen
(1) Show/ Hide
Set whether to show or hide the size list of the Select Wire Type/Size dialog box.

Set the number of the wire to register.

Set the name of the wire to register.

Set the name to display in the size list of the Select Wire Type/Size dialog box.
Electricity-375










(15) Add button

Add user-registered wiring.
６．Delete button
Delete registered wiring parts.
７．OK button
Save edited wiring parts content.
８．Cancel button
Discard edited wiring parts content.
Description of the Edit Ground Wire Parts dialog box

Select the ground wire parts selection menu to register.
2. Hierarchy menu
Select the hierarchy of ground wires to register.
Electricity-376

Save the ground wire parts selection menu.

Delete the ground wire parts selection menu.
5. Edit screen
(1) Show/ Hide
Set whether to show or hide the size list of the Select Wire Type/Ground Wire Size dialog box.

Set the number of the ground wire to register.

Set the name of the ground wire to register.
Set the name to display in the size list of the Select Wire Type/Ground Wire Size dialog box.










(15) Add button

Add a user-registered ground wire.
６．Delete button
Delete registered ground wire parts.
７．OK button
Save edited ground wire parts content.
８．Cancel button
Discard edited ground wire parts content.
Electricity-377
Description of the Edit Pipe Parts dialog box

Select the pipe parts selection menu to register.
2. Hierarchy menu
Select the hierarchy of pipes to register.
Save the pipe parts selection menu.

Delete the pipe parts selection menu.
5. Edit screen
(1) Show/ Hide
Set whether to show or hide the size list of the Select Pipe Type/Size dialog box.
(2) Pipe parts code

Set the number of the pipe to register.
(3) Pipe material name

Set the name of the pipe to register.

Set the name to display in the size list of the Select Pipe Type/Size dialog box.

(6) Inner diameter

Set the inner diameter.
(7) Inner cross sectional area

Set the inner cross sectional area to use in size calculations.
(8) Normal bend radius R

Set the bend radius of a normal bend.
(9) Normal bend straight length

Set the length of the straight part of a normal bend.
(10) Set conduit bend radius

Set the bend radius and hatching of conduit.
(11) Add button

Add user-registered pipes.
６．Delete button
Delete registered pipe parts.
７．OK button
Electricity-378
Save edited pipe parts content.
８．Cancel button
Discard edited pipe parts content.
Description of the Search Method Selection dialog box
1. Search method selection [1] Search all open drawings

Make all opened drawings subject to search.
[2] Search in one open drawing
Of the opened drawings, make only the active drawing subject to search.
[3] Make only the active sheets of drawings [1] and [2] above subject to search.
Description of the Refine Conditions dialog box
1. Refine by facility type [1] Facility type selection

Select only the refined targets from the facility types (layers) in the list.
Use Shift to make continuous selections and Ctrl to make multiple selections.
[2] Display switching
The facility types (layers) displayed in the list can be switched between three modes: electrical
only, piping/wiring within electrical, and display all.
[3] Select all
Make the refined targets all the facility types (layers) in the list.
[4] Deselect all
Make all the facility types (layers) in the list not refined targets.
[5] Invert selections
Invert the selection of refined targets among the facility types (layers) in the list.
Electricity-379
2. Refine by installation method

[1] Installation method selection
Check the installation method to make refined targets.
[2] Select all
Make all installation methods refined targets.
[3] Deselect all
Exclude all installation methods from refined targets.
[4] Invert selections
Insert the selection of installation method refined targets.
1. Lateral offsets
Set the left offset of wire symbols.
2. Lateral offsets
Set the right offset of wire symbols.
3. Lateral offsets
Set the left offsets of wire names, pipe names, and remarks.
4. Lateral offsets
Set the right offsets of wire names, pipe names, and remarks.
5. Vertical offsets
Set the lower offset of Wire Lists.
6. Vertical offsets
Set the upper offset of Wire Lists.
Electricity-380
7. Wiring - cable bundle pitch

Set the pitch between the start point of the wire symbol and the first Number of Cable Core.
8. Cable bundle [centerlines] length

Set the centerline length of the Number of Cable Core as a proportion of the height of the Note table
frame.
9. Cable bundle [centerlines] pitch

Set the pitch between the centers of Number of Cable Cores.
10. Cable bundle [centerlines] - [Ground wire] pitch

Set the pitch between the Number of Cable Cores centers and ground wires.
11. Cable bundle [ground wire]- [Ground wire] pitch

Set the pitch between the Number of Cable Cores ground wire and other ground wires.
12. Cable bundle [ground wire] length

Set the length of the Number of Cable Core ground wire as a proportion of the height of the Note
table frame.
13. Remark - End Cover Pitch

Set the pitch between remark text and End Covers.
14. End Cover [longitudinal] Length

Set the longitudinal length of End Covers as a proportion of the height of the Note table frame.
15. End Cover [lateral] Length

Set the lateral length of End Covers as a proportion of the height of the Note table frame.
16. End Cover [lateral] - Wire end point pitch

Set the pitch between End Covers and wire end points.
17. Empty pipe [diameter] Length

Set the longitudinal length of empty pipe as a proportion of the height of the Note table frame.
Description of the Title Field Setup dialog box
1. Title field setting Set text strings for title fields.
2. Title name setting

Set text strings for string titles.
From the left, there are the wire symbol frame title, wire name frame title, protection pipe title and
remark title.
Electricity-381
Precautions
1. Note table text draw settings

Note table text for which Draw is unchecked is not drawn as drawing data. The drawn text cannot be
acquired by the Note Table Refer button.
To save Note table text from which the check is removed, save it as a master before quitting the
command.
2. Number of Note table text registrations

The maximum number of Note table text items that can be registered for one draw is 256.
3. Note Table Refer button

When the Note Table Refer button is used to acquire a previously drawn Wire List, the acquired
information is added to the end of the list.
Wire information that has been assigned with the Wiring command is also subject to No. of wires
searches
4. Cable Bundle Search button

The Cable Bundle Search button searches all open drawings.
This may find cable bundles that are not required, so drawings which should not be subject to the
search should be closed.
5. End Cover drawing

If “Draw End Covers” is set as “O” in the Create Wire List dialog box, End Covers are drawn even if
draw protection pipes is not set.
6. Jumping
Jumping acquires the attributes of Wire Lists and can draw a Wire List with the same style, text
height, text spacing, and draw layer.
7. Refining searches
The Refine button can be used to refine the content of a Wire List imported with a reference master
file or the Note Table Refer button, but data not covered by the refinement is deleted from the list.
To restore data that was excluded from the refinement, use the reference master file again or refer to
the Wire List.
8. Hierarchy menu
When the hierarchy menus for wire type, ground wire type, and pipe type are opened, they take the
state they had last time they were opened in the history.
However, if Jump etc. is used to import a wire text string that did Notexist within the previous history
level, all types are opened, regardless of the previous history.
9. Material counting
The Wire List and wire text are used as information for counting wiring.
If a Wire List and wire text are both defined for the same wire, the wire text has precedence.
Refer to the Material Count command for details.
10. Different-scale sheets at the same scale

When drawing Wire Lists in the same drawing, wire information about the scale sheet applied to the
Wire List for different-scale sheets at the same scale is stated in the table below.

1) Wiring part edits can be registered from the various commands that display the Wire Text Information
dialog box.
2) The number of wires and pipes that can be registered is up to 99 parts for each type displayed in the
hierarchy menu.
Table commands.
Electricity-382
Note [1] in the table indicates the number of the Wire List drawn in the scale sheet.
The same is true of Note [2] and Note [3].
Electricity-383
Operation example
1. Operation example of creating a Wire List
Command toolbar
(1) “Note table text settings”

[1] Open the Create Wire List dialog box.
The Create Wire List dialog box opens when the Correct Note
Table button on the Command toolbar is used, or when the
command is started.
[2] Make Note table text settings.
Use the Add button to open the Note Table Setup dialog box,
which can be used to set facility type, installation method,
cable bundles, wire text, and protection pipes.
Previously set Note table text can be corrected using the

Correct button.
Press the OK button to draw.
(2) “Referring to Wire Lists”

[1] Previously drawn Wire Lists can be referred to.
When a previously drawn Wire List is specified, the same
content as that of the table, with the exception of remarks, is
displayed in the Note Table Setup dialog box, and can be
added to and changed.
At this stage, the information referred to is added at the end

content of the Note Table Setup dialog box.
Electricity-384
(3) “Search cable bundles”

[1] Cable bundles can be searched for within drawings.
Cable bundles can be searched for in previously drawn
drawings.
Using cable bundle search acquires facility types, installation
methods, and cable bundles, and displays them in the Note
Table Setup dialog box.
Set wire texts and protection pipes.
2. Operation example of referring to the master file to create a Wire List
Electricity-385
(1) “Refer to master file”

[1] The Wire List master file can be referred to.
Press the button in the Create Wire List dialog box to
open the Master File Reference dialog box, then select the
master file to refer to.
(2) “Editing referenced Wire Lists”

[1] Referenced Wire Lists can be edited.
The referenced Wire List can be edited with the Add, Correct,
and Delete buttons.
(3) “Refining referenced Wire Lists”

[1] Referenced Wire Lists can be refined.
Referenced Wire Lists can be refined, by facility type and
installation method, to only the necessary items.
Also, if a cable bundle search is performed on a referenced

Wire List, Draw checks are only added for items drawn in the
drawing.
At this stage, if there are any items that are not listed in the
referenced Wire List, they are added at the end of the list, so
set the Wire List text.
(4) “Saving editing Wire Lists”

[1] Edited Wire Lists can be saved.
After editing a referenced Wire List, press the button to
open the Save Master File dialog box and save the Wire List by
overwriting the master file, or by creating a new master file.
Master files can be saved for newly created Wire Lists, not just
for referenced ones.
Electricity-386
Electricity/Drawing Symbol
Drawing Symbol
Function Overview
Draw annotations to show Drawing Symbols and numbers of units.

Input the Drawing Symbol attributes for the subject parts.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Drawing Symbols (Z)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
Commands related to Annotation can be selected.
2. Text draw angle specification

Specify the draw angle for text.

Select the base point for drawing the annotation.
Refer to the Annotation Text command for details.
4. Attribute and Shape Settings button

The Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box can be opened and used to make advanced
settings for drawing.
Refer to the Description of the Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box.
Electricity-387
Description of the Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box
1. Settings for subject items

Set items subject to text string drawing.
Draw the text strings for that item.
Do not draw the text strings for that item.
2. Part name display

Display the name of the selected part. (Display only, can't edit.)
3. Drawing Symbol display

Display the Drawing Symbol for the selected part.
Double click on the Drawing Symbol for the selected part to correct it. Refer to [13. Correct Symbol
button] for details.
4. Inside the Number. of units display frame

Display the Number of units for each selected part. (Display only, can't edit.)
5. Double formatted line settings

Set formatted lines.
Settings made here are reflected in the 8. Draw form area.
Draw a double, formatted line.
Draw a single, formatted line.
6. Double line offset distance specification

Specify the offset (on release of drawing) between two lines.
Example)
7. Additional text selection

Select to add text to the input new Drawing Symbol.
Attach additional text to the start and end of the text string.
Electricity-388
( ), [ ], < >, “ “
Draw only the text strings of new Drawing Symbols.
8. Draw shape selection

Select from two types of draw form.
9. Draw base line settings

Set only the text standard, to draw the shape with the text string as the base line.
Refer to the Annotation Text command, Note 6, for the calculation method.
10. Text correction
If the outline is selected according to the draw base line, set whether or not to perform text correction.
Correct text. If the text protrudes from the shape, the text height is made smaller so that the text
string fits.
Text height will not be smaller than the [Minimum text height].
Do not correct text. Draw using set values for shape dimensions and text style.
Text may protrude, depending on setting values.
11. Vertical offset specification

Specify the vertical part of the offset (on release of drawing) of the outside of the text string rectangle.
Refer to the Annotation Text command, Note 5., for detailed content.
12. Lateral offset specification

Specify the lateral part of the offset (on release of drawing) of the outside of the text string rectangle.
13. Correct Symbol button

Input the new Drawing Symbol for the selected part, or correct the existing Drawing Symbol.
If nothing has been input as Drawing Symbol attributes for the selected part, this is displayed blank,
so input the new Drawing Symbol.
If one has already been input, the current input Drawing Symbol is displayed by default, so input a
new Drawing Symbol to edit.
14. Collate Same Parts button

Regardless of whether the check box for the subject item is checked or unchecked, this button
collates all parts for which the part code, attribute code, shape code, part name and input new
Drawing Symbol all match as the same part, and calculates the number of units.
15. Draw Subjects button

Make all selected items subject to drawing. (Multiple selections can be made with Shift+Ctrl)
16. Cancel Draw button

Make all selected items not subject to drawing. (Multiple selections can be made with Shift+Ctrl)
17. Auto Sort

Automatically sort the items displayed in the dialog box.
Sort according to the following conditions:
[1] Part code
[2] Attribute code
[3] Shape code
[4] Part name
[5] Drawing Symbol (the Drawing Symbol displayed in the dialog box)
Electricity-389
18. Move Up button

Move the selected item up.
(Multiple selections can be made with Shift+Ctrl))
19. Move Down button

Move the selected item down.
(Multiple selections can be made with Shift+Ctrl))
1. Double frame draw settings

Set frame lines.
Draw double frame lines.
Draw single frame lines.
2. Double frame offset distance specification

Specify the offset (on release of drawing) between two frames.
Example)

Select from three types of draw form.
4. Draw base line selection

Select “Text base line” or “Outline base line”.
[1] Text base line
Draw the shape based on the text string. Use the style setup to make the reference text settings.
Refer to the Annotation Text command, Note 6., for the calculation method.
[2] Outline base line
Draw the shape based on the frame. Make settings for the reference frame, as in 7 in the
description below.
Refer to the Annotation Text command Note 7. for the calculation method.
5. Text correction
string fits.
Electricity-390



8. Length ratio specification Specify the dimensions for each selected shape (on release of drawing).
The content that can be set varies with the shape.
Refer to Precaution 9 under Annotation Text Command for details.
1. Room name setup

Set when room names should be drawn.
Input the room name or draw the room name selected from the list.
Do not draw the room name.
2. Ceiling height setting

Set ceiling height.
3. Comment field settings

Comments can be set in the Drawing Symbol table. Up to 5 rows can be set.
Electricity-391
4. Text position settings button

Select the text positions for room name, Ceiling height, Comment field, Drawing Symbol, and number
of units. All titles are fixed at centered positioning.
5. Title drawing
Set if a title should be drawn.
Draw the titles for [Room name items] and [Drawing Symbol and Number. of units items]
Do not draw the titles for [Room name items] and [Drawing Symbol and Number. of units items]

7. Draw base line selection

Select “Text base line” or “Outline base line”.
[1] Text base line
Draw the shape based on the frame.
8. Text correction
string fits.

Refer to the Annotation Text command, Note 5., for detailed description.

Refer to the Annotation Text command, Note 5., for detailed description.
11. Line height and column width specification

Specify the height of one line (on release of drawing) and the width of each column (on release of
drawing)
Electricity-392
Description of the Part Name and Drawing Symbol Display dialog box
1. Part name Drawing Symbol display

If the draw forms [trim] and [frame] are selected in the Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box,
the currently specified symbol name and Drawing Symbol are displayed.
Precautions
1. Selected element
The elements subject to this process are electrical symbol parts laid out using the Equipment/Device
command.
There can be up to 100 selectable symbol types at the frame selection stage.
2. Search conditions for same-part conditions

Parts which have the same part code, attribute code, shape code, part name, and Drawing Symbol
are judged to be the same part, and up to 1,000 units of such parts can be found by searching.
3. Other
[1] When symbols are specified in the Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box while the draw
form is [trim] or [frame], drawing is at the same distance from the specified symbol as where the
same symbol selected in the frame has been adjusted by a scale factor or angle.
[2] Refer to the Annotation Text command for details of the content of the shape settings area of the
Attribute Input and Shape Setup dialog box.
[3] If table is selected in the Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box, one table is drawn for all
subject parts.
If the selection is trim or frame, specified symbols are drawn individually.
[4] When selecting parts for which Drawing Symbols have already been drawn with trim or frames,
and re-drawing Drawing Symbols with trim and frames, the previous Drawing Symbol is deleted at
the same time as the new one is drawn.
4. Material count
If table is selected as the draw form in the Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box, and a
room name is drawn, the drawn room name is set as the room name in the attribute area for the
symbol part.
The room name set here can be used to make counts for each room, using the settings for the
Material Count command.
Refer to the Material Count command about counting for each room name.
If Drawing Symbol are drawn for equipment/devices drawn with CADEWA Evolution Ver1.1L01 or
earlier, after the drawn Drawing Symbol is deleted, select table as the draw form and then re-draw
the Drawing Symbols with the setting to draw the room name.
(However, the Material Count command cannot be used with LT products)
Electricity-393
Operation example
1. Example of inputting Drawing Symbols and drawing them with the [trim] draw form (additional text is “()”).
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Select parts to process”

[1] Select parts to be processed.
Specify range [1] [2].
The selected symbol is displayed in red.
(2) “Input attribute/ select shape”

[2] The Attribute Input and Shape Selection dialog box is
displayed.
Set new Drawing Symbol [4]
Select tab [5] for [trim].
Check the check box.
Select additional text “[ ]” [7].
Select draw form [8].
Set other items and press the [OK] button [9].
(3) “Symbol specification”->”Draw Drawing

Symbol”
[3] Specify the symbol
Specify the representative symbol [10].
The same part symbol is displayed in yellow (dimmed).
Electricity-394
(4) [4] Specify the draw position.

Specify the Drawing Symbol draw position [11].

Symbol”

2. Example of inputting Drawing Symbols and drawing them with the [frame] draw form
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
Electricity-395


displayed.
Input new Drawing Symbol [4].
Select tab [5] for [frame].

Symbol”


Symbol”
(6) Specify the Drawing Symbol draw position [11].
Electricity-396
3. Example of inputting Drawing Symbols and drawing them with the [table] draw form (room name: meeting room)
Command toolbar
Command dialog box


displayed.
Input new Drawing Symbol [4].
Select tab [5] for [table].
Check the room name check box [6] and input “meeting room”.
Check the Draw titles check box [7] [8].

Symbol”
Electricity-397
Electricity/Circuit Number
Circuit Number
Function Overview
Draw annotations to show circuit numbers.

Also, input attributes such as voltage, load type, circuit Number., panel symbol, and main line Number. for specified symbol parts
and wire parts, and in the case of lighting circuits and power circuits, calculate the load per circuit.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Circuit Numbers (K)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
2. Circuit type selection Select the circuit type.

Select from lighting, power, main line, light electrical, and power generation.
3. Text draw angle specification Specify the draw angle for text.
4. Draw base point selection Select the base point for drawing the annotation.
If the selected circuit type is lighting or power, a dialog box is displayed for checking capacity.
(The capacity of parts can be changed using the Property Annotation command. Can't edit here)
1. Total load capacity

The total of the capacities of the parts subject to processing, as stated in their attributes, is
displayed.
If luminaires are specified, the content displayed (the area which displays attributes) differs
according to the power supply type selected in the Circuit Type, Attributes and Shapes Setup
dialog box.
(Power supply type) (area displaying attributes)
Commercial power supply: General circuit
Generator circuit, storage battery circuit: Emergency circuit
Electricity-398
Description of the Circuit Type, Attributes and Shapes Setup dialog box
1. Display Selected Shape button

The currently selected shapes is displayed.
Click in this shape area to open the Shape Setup dialog box and make draw form selections and
settings. Refer to the Description of the Shape Setup dialog box presented later.
2. Type selection
- Power supply type: Select power supply type.
- Voltage type Select voltage type.
- Load type: Select load type
3. Circuit attribute input

- Panel symbol: Distribution panel symbol must Notexceed 10 one-byte characters (5 two-byte
characters).
- Main line Number.: Main line Number. must Notexceed 10 one-byte characters (5 two-byte
characters).
- Circuit Number.: Circuit Number. must Notexceed 10 one-byte characters (5 two-byte characters).
If the suffix to the input value is a numerical value, the Spin button can be used to make the
whole of that numerical portion count up or down.
The table below shows the items that require selection and input for each circuit type.
4. Refer within drawing Search for circuit numbers drawn in the drawing with the same circuit type as the circuit type
selected in the Command toolbar, and display them in a list.
However, if the circuit type is main line, the [Refer Within Drawing] button is not accessible.
When the list is displayed, they are sorted in ascending order of power supply type -> voltage type -
> load type -> panel symbol -> main line Number. -> circuit Number.
Select a text string displayed in the list, and press the [OK] button to feed all information into the
dialog box for type settings and circuit attribute settings.
The [Cancel] button closes the dialog box without action.
Electricity-399
5. Attribute initialization
Initialize the main line Number, panel symbol, and circuit Number. attribute for the selected part, for
the currently set circuit type.
Description of the Shape Setup dialog box
1. Double frame draw settings Set frame lines.

Example)
Electricity-400
3. Draw shape selection Select from nine types of draw form.
4. Draw base line selection Select “Text base line” or “Outline base line”.
[1] Text base line
description below.
Refer to the Annotation Text command Note 7. for the calculation method.
5. Text correction
string fits.


Electricity-401
Precautions
1. Selected element (Symbol types)

command.
The symbol types that can be input for each circuit type are as shown below.
Note 1) Combined switches (including wide combined switches)

When individual switch-type switches (switches which can be combined with the
Equipment/Device command) are combined, the resulting part as a whole is called a
combined switch.
Therefore, it is possible to input circuit attributes for each individual switch in a lighting
circuit.
At that stage, attributes are input for the combined switch itself.
However, the attributes that are input are updated each time they are input for single
switches.
Example)
Input the circuit Number. 101 in [1], and the following attributes can be seen
to be input (displayed) in the corresponding circuit Number. areas under
properties.
Area [1] 101
Area [2] Blank (state with nothing input)
Combined switch area 101
After that, input the circuit Number. 102 in [2], and the following attributes can be
seen to be input (displayed) in the corresponding circuit Number. areas under
properties.
Area [1] 101
Area [2] 102
Combined switch area 102 (updated attribute is input)
Note 2) Receptacle type - Residential data jack

The receptacle type “receptacle”, the data communications data jack TEL (modular jack),
and the data communications device TV (unit) are combined and the entire part is a
residential data jack.
Therefore, it is possible to input circuit attributes for the receptacle if it is in a lighting
circuit, or for the TEL (modular jack) and TV (unit) in a weak current circuit.
At that stage, attributes are input for the residential data jack itself.
However, when an attribute is input for the receptacle area, the same attribute is input for
the receptacle at the same time.
Electricity-402
Example)
In a lighting circuit, input the circuit Number. 101 in [1], and the following
attributes can be seen to be input (displayed) in the corresponding circuit
Number. areas under properties.
Area [1] 101
Area [2] Blank
Area [3] Blank
(nothing has been input for either [2] or [3])
Residential data jack area 101
After that, input the circuit Number. 102 in [2] and [3] for weak current circuits, and
the following attributes can be seen to be input (displayed) in the corresponding
circuit Number. areas under properties.
Area [1] 101
Area [2] 102
Area [3] 102
Residential data jack area 101
(Attributes as input in [1]).
Note 3) Wires connected to power generation circuits, and wire text

The power generation circuit attribute cannot be input for wires and wire text connected
to parts related to solar power generation only draw attributes for parts related to solar
power generation.
(Wire, wire text) These are wires drawn with the Wiring Command.
With wire text, the entire wire text group is selected when subject parts are selected, so when
inputting attributes, specify the wire text string within the wire text group.
2. Processing
If main line is selected as the circuit type, the circuit Number. is not input, so it is not drawn on the
drawing.

Symbol parts
Parts which have the same part code, attribute code, shape code, part name 1, part name 2, power
supply type, voltage type, load type, panel symbol, main line Number., and circuit Number. are
judged to be the same part.
Wire, wire text
There is Number same-part search for wires.
4. Material count
The Material Count command can count materials in each circuit, with input of circuit type and
attributes.
Refer to the Material Count command about material counting.
However, with Evolution Ver1.0, if material counting is performed using combined switch and
residential data jack symbols for which the circuit attribute has been input, it is necessary to input
the circuit attribute again.
(The Material Count command cannot be used with the LT product).
5. [Batch 2 UP TO HERE] Trace selection

When selecting subject parts, choosing trace selection from the selection methods on the
Command toolbar means that when one part is specified, subject parts are automatically searched
for based on linkage information for the specified part.
The following are patterns of Auto-search for each process type.
- Process type: Light

Select a symbol to continue the trace
Subject symbol types (Note 1. Symbols stated in Selected Elements (symbols)) are
automatically searched for and made into subject parts. ([1] in the figure below)
Select a symbol to stop the trace

Make wires ((3) below) connected to the subject symbol type ((4) below) into parts subject to
processing.
Switches, combined switches, grouped switches, boxes, and P boxes ((3) below) stop the
trace when found by the search.
Stop the trace without selecting a symbol

Auto-search stops when a non-subject symbol type ((2) below) is detected by the search.
Electricity-403
Symbols other than [Symbols which continue traces], such as panels, high-voltage
equipment, and light electrical devices, and [Symbols which select and stop traces], are
subject to the process.
Parts subject to special auto-search are described below.

Switches, combined switches, concentrated switches and wires
- One wire is connected to switches, combined switches, and concentrated switches
- Specify one combined switch [1]
- The specified combined switch (one) and the wire linked to it are selected subjects. (The
red parts in Figure 1-1 below)
- Specify one wire [2]
The specified wire and the combined switch linked to it are selected subjects. (The red
parts in Figure 1-2 below)
- Multiple wires are connected to switches, combined switches, and concentrated switches
- Specify one combined switch [1]
The direction in which auto-search is performed cannot be judged, so only the specified
combined switch (one) is a selected subject. (The red parts in Figure 2-1 below)
- Specify one wire [2] among multiple wires
The specified wire and the combined switch linked to it are selected subjects. (The red
parts in Figure 2-2 below)
Residential data jack and wires

- One wire is linked to one piece of equipment within a residential data jack
- Specify one piece of equipment [1] within a residential data jack
- The one piece of equipment within the specified residential data jack, and the wire linked
to that residential data jack, are selected subjects. (The red parts in Figure 3-1 below)
- Specify one wire [2]
The specified wire, and the one piece of equipment within the residential data jack linked
to that wire, are selected subjects. (The red parts in Figure 3-2 below)
- Multiple wire are linked to one piece of equipment within a residential data jack
- Specify one piece of equipment [1] within a residential data jack
Electricity-404
- The one piece of equipment within the specified residential data jack, and the multiple
wires linked to that residential data jack, are selected subjects. (The red parts in Figure 4-1
below)
- Specify one wire [2] among multiple wires
- The specified wire, the one piece of equipment within the residential data jack that is
linked to the wire, and the wires linked to the one piece of equipment within the residential
data jack, are selected subjects. (The red parts in Figure 4-2 below)
- Process type: Power, light electrical

Symbols
automatically searched for and made into subject parts. ([1] in the Figure below)
Auto-search stops when it finds a non-subject symbol ([2] in the figure below).
However, non -subject symbol are made non -subject.
Wires, wire text
Wires linked with subject symbols are made subject to processing. ([3] in the figure below)
Wire text drawn on wires that are parts subject to processing is also made subject to
processing.
Parts subject to processing are colored in red.
- Process type: Main line

Symbols
automatically searched for and made into subject parts. ([1] in the Figure below)
Auto-search stops when it finds a non-subject symbol ([2] in the figure below).
However, non -subject symbol are made non -subject.
Wires, wire text
Wires linking between subject symbols are parts subject to processing ([3] in the Figure
below), while wires linked to non -subject symbols ([2] in the Figure below) are non -subject
parts. (Figure [4] below)
Wire text drawn on wires that are parts subject to processing is also made subject to
processing.
Parts subject to processing are colored in red.
- Process type: Power generation

Symbols
Even if trace selection is chosen from the selection methods on the Command toolbar, these
will not be auto-searched.
Process type generation circuits are parts not subject to processing.
Wires, wire text
Process type generation circuits are not subject to processing.
Electricity-405
Operation example
1. Operation example of drawing circuit Number. annotations and then inputting attributes for luminaires (trough-type
FL40Wx1) and combined switches in a room
Command toolbar
(1) “Select circuit type and parts to process”

[1] Select subject parts
Select the circuit type.
Circuit type Lighting
The selected symbol and wiring are displayed in red.
(2) “Circuit type/attribute, shape settings”

[2] Set type and circuit attributes.
Power supply type Commercial power supply circuit
Voltage [V] 1φ2W 100V
Load type Lighting
Panel symbol L-1
Main line Number. 1
Circuit Number. 101
Click [4] to display the Shape Setup dialog box.

Draw form: Circle
Base line Text standard
Set vertical offset 0.5
Lateral offset 0.3
(3) “Specify circuit Number. draw position”

Specify the position [5] in which to draw the circuit Number.
Electricity-406
Electricity/Switching Circuit
Switching Circuit
Function Overview
Draw annotations to show switch circuits.

Also, input the Switching Circuit attributes of the subject parts.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Switching Circuit (N)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
Commands related to Annotation can be selected.
2. Text draw angle specification

Specify the draw angle for text.

Select the base point for drawing the annotation.
1. Selected symbol parts name display

Display the name of the specified symbol part. (Display only, can't edit.)

settings. Refer to the Description of the Shape Setup dialog box.
3. Switching Circuit input
Input symbols (text strings) that represent Switching Circuits.
4. Up/Down Button
For text strings shown in Switching Circuits, perform Up/Down processes manually.
5. Additional text selection

Select to add text to the input Switching Circuit.
Attach additional text to the start and end of the text string.
( ), [ ], < >, “ “
Draw only the text strings of switching symbols.
Electricity-407
6. Only attribute assignment

Check to assign only the Switching Circuit attribute (do not draw switching numbers)
7. Switching settings
Make switching display settings for parts which have already been assigned the Switching Circuit
attribute.
Display Switching Circuits linked to parts which have been assigned the Switching Circuit
attribute in setting colors as switching.
Do not display Switching Circuits linked to parts which have been assigned the Switching Circuit
attribute as switching.
8. Auto-numbering process [1] If the check box is checked

Automatically perform the Up process on the currently input text string each time a Switching
Circuit is drawn.
If the process is forcibly interrupted, such as by pressing the Esc key during the process, auto
Up will not be performed if kanji text has been input.
For text strings shown with switching numbers, do not perform the Up process on text strings.
1. Double formatted line settings

Set formatted lines.
2. Double line offset distance distance specification

Specify the offset distance (on release of drawing) between two lines.
Example)
Electricity-408

4. Draw base line settings

Set only the text standard, to draw the shape with the text string as the base line.
5. Text correction
string fits.


Specify the lateral part of the offset (lateral offset) (on release of drawing) of the outside of the text
string rectangle.
1. Double frame draw settings

Set frame lines.
Electricity-409
2. Double line offset distance specification Example)


Select from seven types of draw form.
4. Base line selection

Select “Text base point” or “Outline base point”.
[1] Text base line
description below.
5. Text correction
string fits.


Specify the lateral part of the offset (lateral offset) (on release of drawing) of the outside of the text
string rectangle.
8. Length ratio specification

Specify the dimensions for each selected shape (on release of drawing).
Precautions
1. Selected element
The elements subject to this process are wiring equipment (switches), receptacles (wall-mounted),
receptacles (floor-mounted), receptacles (ceiling-mounted), luminaires, ventilation fans, power loads
and parts related to solar power generation, laid out using the Equipment/Device command.
There can be up to 100 selectable symbol types at the frame selection stage.

Parts which have the same part code, attribute code, shape code, part name, and Switching Circuit
are judged to be the same part, and up to 1,000 units of such parts can be found by searching.
However, same-part search is not performed for the wiring equipment (switch) type, and each unit is
drawn individually.
(Within the wiring equipment (switch) type, same-part search is performed for concentrated switches
(including wide concentrated switches).
3. Other
[1] If scale factors or angles have been applied to symbols that are the same within a frame selection,
annotations are drawn at the same distance as from the specified representative symbol.
Electricity-410
[2] Refer to the Annotation Text command for details of the content of the Shape Setup dialog box.
[3] When selecting parts for which Switching Circuits have already been drawn, and re-drawing the
Switching Circuit, the previously drawn Switching Circuit is deleted when the new Switching Circuit is
drawn.
Operation example
1. Example of inputting switching numbers with the [trim] draw form
Command toolbar
(1) “Draw form attribute change”

[1] Set the text string and shape to draw.
Input the text string to draw.
Switching Circuit i
Auto-numbering Check
Set up the shape.
Draw form Text strings only
lateral offset 0.3

Specify process area [2] [3].
(3) “Symbol specification” -> “Draw

Switching Circuit”
Specify the symbol [5].

Specify the Switching Circuit draw position [6].
Electricity-411

The Switching Circuit numbers are automatically counted once
the above steps are completed.

Specify the range [7][8].
(5) “Symbol specification” -> “Draw

Switching Circuit”
Specify the symbol [9].


[8] Next, set the text string to draw for combined switches.
From list [11], select “i” as the text string to draw.
(7) “Select parts to process (combined

switch)”
Specify process area [12] [13].
The selected combined switch symbol is displayed in red.
(8) “Symbol specification”

Specify the switch symbol [14].
The specified symbol is displayed in yellow (dimmed).

[12] Set the text string to draw.
Click on the Spin button and input “ii”.
Proceed to use the same draw method as (8) for switches

displayed in red.
Electricity-412
Electricity/Installed Height
Installed Height
Function Overview
Draw an annotation to show the Installed Height of the specified part

Also input and change Installed Heights and mounting locations.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Installed Height (T)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
2. Setting mounting location changes

Set to change mounting locations.
Change mounting location.
Do not change mounting location.
3. Annotation draw settings

Set to draw Installed Height annotations.
Draw Installed Heights.
Do not draw Installed Heights.
4. Leader line attachment settings

Set the drawing of leader lines.
Draw leader lines.
Don't draw leader lines. The leader line angle increment cannot be set.
5. Leader line angle increment selection

If there is an attached leader line, select the leader line angle using the set angle increment.
Select the set angle from 15, 30, 45, or 90°.
6. Text angle setting method selection

Select the angle setting method for drawn text strings.
The text draw angle is fixed if there are Number leader lines.
[1] Text rotation pitch
Determine the text string layout angle according to the set angle pitch, then draw the text string.
Select the set angle from 15, 30, 45, 90 or 180°.
[2] Text draw angle
Draw with the specified angle.
7. Draw base point selection Select the base point for drawing the annotation.
Electricity-413
The following dialog box is displayed, according to the annotation draw settings in the Command toolbar.
If annotations are drawn, the subject equipment/devices are displayed after selection is finished (in the dialog box in the lower
left).
If annotations are not drawn, they are displayed after selection is finished and equipment/devices are specified (in the dialog box
in the lower right).
1. Name display for selected symbol parts

Display the names of the specified (or automatically searched) symbol parts.
If linked layout symbols are specified, their display is specified as “linked layout symbols”.
(Display only, can't edit.)

settings. Refer to the Description of the Shape Setup dialog box.
3. Current Installed Height Display the Installed Heights of the specified (or automatically searched) symbol parts.
Check the check box in order to use the displayed Installed Height to draw annotations.
If linked layout symbols are specified, the system side displays the Installed Height of the symbol
part that was found first from within the group.
The current Installed Height is for display only, and can't be edited.
New Installed Height Check the checkbox to assign a new Installed Height attribute to a specified symbol part, and to
draw the annotation with the new Installed Height.
The set value is reflected in the Installed Height.
The available input range for Installed Height is -99999~99999mm.
4. Additional text input Input the text to add to the start of the new Installed Height.
Append the additional text string to the start of the “new Installed Height” text string.
If only a value was input for the new Installed Height, it becomes “additional text” + “new
Installed Height”, while if “-” was input with the new Installed Height, it becomes “additional text”
- “new Installed Height”
Draw only “new Installed Heights”.
If only a value was input for the new Installed Height, it becomes “new Installed Height”, while if
“-” was input with the new Installed Height, “- new Installed Height”.
5. Mounting location settings Display the mounting locations of the specified (or automatically searched) symbol parts.
If linked layout symbols are specified, the system side displays the mounting location of the symbol
part that was found first from within the group.
If the change mounting location box is checked on the Command toolbar
Change is possible after symbol specification (or auto-search). To change the mounting location,
do so after specifying the symbol parts.
If the change mounting location box is unchecked on the Command toolbar
The location is displayed after symbol specification (or auto-search). (Display only, can't edit.)
Electricity-414
1. Double formatted line settings Set formatted lines.

2. Double line offset Distance specification

Specify the offset (on release of drawing) between two lines.
Example)
3. Draw form selection

Select the form, between underlined and non-underlined.
4. Draw base line settings Set only the text standard, to draw the shape with the text string as the base line.
Refer to the Annotation Text command, Note6., for the calculation method.
5. Text correction
string fits.


Electricity-415
1. Double frame draw settings Set frame lines.


Example)
3. Draw shape selection Select from three types of draw form.
4. Draw base line selection Select “Text base line” or “Outline base line”.
[1] Text base line
description below.
5. Text correction
If the outline is selected according to the draw base line, set whether or not to perform text
correction.
string fits.
Specify the vertical part of the offset (on release of drawing) of the outside of the text string
rectangle.
Electricity-416

Context menu explanation
1. Context menu The displayed content of the context menu is explained.
[1] Complete
Finish turning point selection.
Precautions
1. Selected element
command.
2. Turning point completion

Complete turning points by specifying the same point again or by using “Complete” in the context
menu.

Parts which have the same part code, attribute code, shape code, part name 1, part name 2,
mounting location, and Installed Height are judged to be the same part.
However, if linked layout symbols are specified, same-part search is not performed for other linked
layout symbols and for symbols without linked layout.
4. Linked layout parts

Linked layout symbols are handled as one group.
Therefore, if the mounting location or Installed Height is changed, it follows that the process is
performed on all symbols within that group.
Also, if annotations are drawn for linked layout parts, one text string is drawn for each group.
5. CG movement
If the Installed Height command is used on symbol parts displayed with CG, to change the mounting
location and Installed Height, the CG position is also moved.
Refer to the Equipment/Device command for details about CG.
(However, CG display cannot be used with the LT product)
Electricity-417
6. Material count
Changing the mounting location and Installed Height with this command related to the counting of
wires with material count.
(However, the Material Count command cannot be used with LT products)
7. Other
Refer to the Annotation Text command for details of the content of the Shape Setup dialog box.
- When selecting parts for which Installed Heights have already been drawn, and re-drawing the
Installed Heights, the previously drawn height is deleted when the new height is drawn.
Operation example
1. - Operation example of changing and drawing the Installed Heights of previously drawn equipment
Command toolbar

[1] Set the text string and shape to draw.
Set the Command toolbar as illustrated above.
Input the text string to draw.
Additional text Check
Additional text string H=FL
New Installed Height Check 300
Set up the shape.
Draw form Rectangle
Base line Outline
Lateral offset 0.3
Lateral length 15.0
Vertical length 6.0
(2) “Specify subject elements”

[2] Specify subject elements
Specify subject symbol parts [2].
After specification, the draw form is rubber displayed.
Electricity-418
(3) “Specify turning point”

[3] Specify the turning points.
Specify turning point [3] twice (the same point twice).
(4) “Draw”
[4] Draw annotation text.
Draw annotation text with frames.
Electricity-419
Electricity/ Size Annotation
Size Annotate
Function Overview
Draws annotations of size and attribute information on parts. Also, edits already drawn size annotation text.
1. Pulldown Menu
Click [Electricity (Q)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Size Annotation (R)].
Click [HVAC and Plumbing (T)] -> [Annotation (C)] -> [Size Annotation (S)].
2. Icon Menu
Click .
Command Toolbar Description
- When the processing type is “Draw” or “Replace.”
- When the processing type is “Move.”
- When the processing type is “Delete.”
1. Selecting a command Commands related to annotations and finishing can be selected.
2. Selecting a processing type

Enabled for all processing types: Draw, Replace, Move, and Delete.
- All processing types: Draw, Replace, Move, and Delete.
Select a processing type form “Draw”, “Replace”, “Move”, or “Delete.”
(1) Draw
Draws annotation text.
(2) Replace
Replaces already drawn annotation text.
(3) Move
Moves already drawn annotation text.
(4) Delete
Deletes already drawn annotation text.
(when indication a fitting, a valve, regardless of the setting of "the level standard position" of
the detailed setting, drawing constantly a reference level )
3. Selecting a processing method

Enabled for processing types: "Draw" and “Replace.”
- When the processing type is “Draw.”
Select a processing method from “Single, Multiple, Function Isolated, Function in Batch, Slope
Level.”
(1) Single
Specify a part to draw size annotation text.
(2) Multiple
Specify multiple parts to draw size annotation text. Size annotation text is drawn with a
leader.
(3) Function isolated
Specify a range of parts to draw size annotation text, and then specify a representative part.
Size annotation text is drawn on parts that have the same function as the representative
parts at once.
Electricity-420
(4) Function in batch

Specify a frame of parts to draw size annotation text. Size annotation text is drawn in batch.
(5) Slope level
The level of a specified position is drawn with a leader for already drawn pipes, fittings, and
valves.
- When the processing type is “Replace.”
Select a processing method from “Single, Function isolated, Function in batch.”
(1) Single
Specify an already drawn size annotation text to be replaced separately.
(2) Function isolated
Specify a frame of already drawn size annotation text to be replaced, and then specify a
representative size annotation text. Size annotation text that has the same function as the
representative one is replaced at once.
(3) Function in batch
Specify a frame of already drawn size annotation text to be replaced in batch.
4. Specifying slide Enabled only for processing type "Draw."

Draws in parallel.
(1) If checked:
Moves from a specified part in parallel to draw size annotation text.
The drawing position of size annotation text can be selected from Top, Middle, or Bottom of
a specified part using the mouse.
(2) If not checked:
Draws size annotation text in arbitrary positions.
Note) When drawing size annotation text in parallel, air diffuser boxes, vertically drawn racks,
and vertical pipes are excluded from targets.
5. Specifying leader Enabled only for processing type "Draw."

Draws a leader.
(1) If checked:
Draw a leader.
(2) If not checked:
Leaders are not drawn.
6. Selecting angle of leader

Enabled for processing types: "Draw" and “Move.”
- When the processing type is “Draw” or “Move.”
Select an angle of drawing a leader.
Select from the following angles: [15°, 30°, 45°, 90°, or no correction].
Also, when specifying the direction of text, it is also used as text rotation pitch.
Note) When a cable rack, raceway, bus duct, or metal duct is specified, if the leader position is
specified as “From center” or “From surface” in the Detail Settings, the first leader is drawn
vertically against a route part.
Note) If a rectangular duct route is specified, and leader position is specified as “From surface”
in the Detail Settings, the first leader is drawn at the vertical angle against the route part.
7. Selecting a drawing base point

Enabled only for processing type "Draw."
Select a drawing base point of size annotation text. Refer to the drawing base point section of
the “Size Annotation” command.
8. Selecting a drawing position

Enabled only for processing type "Draw."
When a processing type is “Function isolated” or “Function in batch”, select a drawing position
of size annotation text from “Route top”, “Route middle” or “Route bottom.”
Depending on which drawing position is selected, size annotation is drawn at a corresponding
position as shown below.
Electricity-421
9. Selecting multiple lines Enabled for processing types: "Draw" and “Replace.”
- When the processing type is “Draw” or “Replace.”
Select whether drawing in multiple lines or not.
(1) If checked:
Selected items are drawn in multiple lines.
(2) If not checked:
Selected items are drawn in one line.
10. Complete Selection button Enabled for processing types: "Draw" and “2-lines.”
Complete the choice of the target material.
11. Selecting a move method Enabled only for processing type "Move."
Select a move method from “Absolute move”, or “Relative move.”
Only size annotation text drawn in parallel is used.
(1) Absolute move
Specify already drawn size annotation text, and then specify the destination of annotation
text.
(2) Relative move
Specify already drawn size annotation text, and then specify the base point and then specify
the destination of annotation text.
12. Selecting move direction Enabled only for processing type "Move."
Select the move direction from “Horizontal” or “Vertical.”
Only size annotation text drawn in parallel is used.
(1) Horizontal
Moves already drawn annotation text horizontally.
(2) Vertical
Moves already drawn annotation text vertically.
13. Detail settings Enabled for processing types: Only "Draw."

Set details.
(1) Detail settings on parts: duct, pipe, steel parts, sleeve, air diffuser BOX, rack, raceway, bus
duct, metal duct, ventilation pipe.
Electricity-422
- Settings for drawing

A: Drawing a diacritic
Settings for only “Duct” and “Pipe.”
Diacritic text set in the “Drawing Settings” command is drawn.
([HVAC and Plumbing] – [Settings for Materials] – [Settings for Rectangular Duct
Materials] ~ [Settings for Pipe Materials])
B: Draw additional symbol in front of size
Settings for only “Duct” and “Pipe.”
If checked, an additional symbol is drawn before size.
C： Drawing length to chamber size.

It is the setting only for "duct".
Drawing length in the chamber when you perform a check to being turned on.
D: Drawing length to sleeves size.

It is the setting only for "sleeves".
Drawing length in the sleeves
when you perform a check to being turned on.
E: Add parentheses to level text

Add parentheses to level text.
- Level drawing base

A： Giving priority to level standard information(center,bottom,top) when drawing it and
adopt it.
It is setting only for "pipe" and "duct".
Drawing "option" mode it with a route drawing command, a chamber command, a
canvas command, when check to being turned on. Using the information of the level
drawing standard position that setting with context menu, drawing a center, a bottom, a
level of the top.
It drew it with a route drawing command, a chamber command, a canvas command, the
arbitrary mode of the that setting was available, it is only a 2-lines duct (riser duct is
excluded), a 2-lines pipe (riser pipe is excluded), a chamber, a 2-lines canvas.
About the material without level standard information, drawing the level of a level
standard position setting in "B".
B: Level drawing base

- Center
Draws the center level of a part.
- Bottom
Draws the bottom level of a part.
・Top
Drawing the top level of the material.
Note)About flex of the duct material, I draw a "reference line" level regardless of the
setting of the level drawing standard.
Electricity-423
- Setting FL,SL,GL.
A: Fixed / Input
- Fixed
Select the level base from FL, SL, or GL.
- Input
Specify the level base.
Input range: up to 20 characters.
- Setting of the text symbol representing the level drawing standard

A: Drawing check
When check it turned on, drawing the text appointed in "B".
B: Text symbol
Appointing the text symbol representing the level standard position.
An input range: up to 10 characters.
C: Drawing position of the text symbol
The drawing position of the text symbol before a level value or select whether you leave
it.
- Settings leader position

Select the leader extracting position from Center, Surface, or Specified Point.
- Draw outer frame

A: Check drawing
- If checked:
Draws annotation text with an outer frame.
- If not checked:
Draws annotation text without an outer frame.
Note) If the "Leader" check box on the command toolbar is checked:

Underlined annotation text is drawn.
Note) If the “Leader” check box on the command toolbar is checked:

If the “Draw in multiple lines” check box on the command toolbar is checked.
Draws annotation text with a divider.
B. Select outer frame shape

Select a shape of the outer frame. Selected shape is displayed in yellow.
C: Specify ratio
- Outer frame shape 1
Specify the ratio of vertical length against R length.

Specify the ratio of vertical length against horizontal length.

notused.
-When processing method “Function isolated” or “Function in batch” , drawing annotation is

selected Determine whether drawing size annotation text or not.
Electricity-424
A: Check minimum length

- If checked:
The route minimum length is checked.
Checks the minimum length of the specified route to determine whether drawing
size annotation text or not.
* If the length is the specified minimum length, size annotation text is drawn.
- If not checked:
The route minimum length is not checked.
B: Drawing minimum length (actual length)
Specify the route minimum length.
- Set refrigerant size symbol
This setting is for only “Pipe.”
A: If there is size symbol information, draw a symbol
- If checked:
If the target refrigerant pipe has size symbol information provided by the
“Refrigerant size table” command, a size symbol is drawn as a size item.
(Even the check box is ON, if there is no size symbol information, sizes such
as ”9.52θ，12.70θ” are drawn instead of symbols.)
- If not checked:
Sizes such as ”9.52θ，12.70θ” are drawn.
B: Add specified margin before and after size symbol text
- If checked:
Size symbol text is drawn adding a specified margin before and after the text.
- If not checked:
Size symbol text is drawn without margin.
C: Number of blanks
Select the number of blanks.
(2) Detail settings on drawing shapes (others)
- Specify offset
A: Right / left, up/down offsets (when output)
Specify right / left and up/down offsets (when output).
- Dot of leader
A: Diameter of leader dot (when output)
Specify the diameter of leader dot (when output).
- Size annotation drawing layer

A: Same layer as a specified part
Size annotation text is drawn on the same layer as the specified part.
Electricity-425
B. Specified layer
Drawn in the specified layer. The specified layer is shown.
Click the “Reference” button to select the drawing layer. Refer to the “Layer” command.
- Set up real time size annotation

A: Set plot target
Size annotation set to “Yes” is plotted.
Size annotation set to “No” is not plotted.
Whether plotting size annotation or not can be changed from the “Editing area to plot”
command.
B: Fill text
If checked, the background is filled when drawing real time size annotation.
14. operation panel

“Drawing order of the Annotation text ・ Drawing or not“ change indication/non-indication
dialogue
Drawing order of the Annotation text・Drawing or not dialogue
Description of the Command dialog
1. Selecting a target part

Select a target part to which size annotation text is set.
Select a target from “Route”, “Steel material”, “Sleeve”, “Air diffuser BOX”, “Rack/Raceway", “Bus
duct / Metal duct” or “Ventilation pipe.”
2. Enable/disable drawing of annotation text

Select whether drawing size annotation text or not.
- If checked:
Size annotation text shown below is drawn.
Size annotation text items.
- If not checked:
Size annotation text is not drawn.
3. Drawing order of annotation text

Select size annotation text items and set the drawing order using arrow buttons.
4. Precautions
When target parts are not provided with sizes, airflow, flow rate, load unit, etc. even if
drawing annotation text is “Enabled” (check box ON), size annotation text is not drawn.
Electricity-426
Precautions
1. Parts Annotation can be drawn on the following parts.

(1) When the processing type is set to “Single” on the command toolbar:
- Steel
- HVAC/Plumbing parts
Ducts, pipes, air diffuser boxes, sleeves
- Electrical parts
Cable racks, raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts, ventilation pipes, sleeves
(2) When the processing type is set to “Multiple” on the command toolbar:
- Steel
Ducts and pipes
- Electrical parts
Cable racks, raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts, ventilation pipes, sleeves
(3) When the processing type is set to “Function isolated” or “Function in batch” on the command
toolbar:
Ducts and pipes
- Electrical parts
Cable racks, raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts, ventilation pipes
(4) When the processing type is set to “Slope level” on the command toolbar:
Pipes, pipe fittings, valves
2. Correction angle of leader and text

Refer to the precautions on the “Annotation Text” command.
3. Slide and leader

Settings of slide and leaders on the command toolbar are shown below.
○: Check box ON
×: Check box OFF
-: Disabled
4. 2-lines duct fitting (HVAC/Plumbing)

When drawing annotation by specifying 2-lines duct fittings, sizes and levels are drawn based
on the information of the target connection face.
Also, when drawing annotation for connection faces of rectangular/circular hoppers and convex’s
round size side, additional symbols are drawn based on the settings from “Drawing Settings”
command (“HVAC / Plumbing” - “Settings for materials” - “Settings for rectangular duct materials -
Settings for pipe materials”). These settings for materials are as follows.
Electricity-427
5. Slope level (HVAC/Plumbing)

When a pipe is specified as the target part for drawing annotation, the drawing level
is the target pipe level and specified level base position.
When a fitting or valve is specified as the target for drawing annotation, the drawing level is the
placement level, and the leader is drawn based on the placement level.
The slope level cannot be set for electrical parts.

Electricity-428
6. Refrigerant pipe (HVAC/Plumbing)

Refrigerant pipe sizes are drawn based on the settings in the “Detail Settings” dialog. If size
symbol information provided by the “Refrigerant size table” command is drawn instead of sizes,
and margins are provided before and after the size symbol, it is processed as follows.
(In the following example, assume the size symbol is 「A」and specified number of blanks is 2.
- If there is no drawing item before or after the size symbol:
The size symbol is drawn adding 2 blanks before and after it. (Ex1)
Ex1 □□a□□
- If there is any drawing item before or after the size symbol:
The size symbol is drawn adding 2 blanks (□) before and 2 + 1 blanks (■) after it. (Ex2) Even
if no blank is set, if there is another drawing item before or after the size symbol, there is
always one blank. (Ex3)
Ex２ □□a□□■ (FL+3000)
Ex３ a■ (FL+3000)
7. Duct flex of the duct material(HVAC/SAN）

When drawing a level for duct flex of the duct material. The level draws the level that acquired at the
time of the following operation.
- Arbitrary processing（"Slide" of the command tool bar, "Leader" are checkoff）
Drawing instructions position level when I ordered target duct flex.
- Withdrawal processing.(checkoff, " Leader" check it, and "Slide" of the command tool bar is turned
on.)
Drawing a level of nearest duct flex from the drawer in size annotation position.
The size annotation drawing in duct flex is the outside targeted for processing at the time of
processing classification "substitution" and "movement".
8. About the state of the annotation in the route editing

When you edit a route material drawing a size annotation, maintain the position of the size annotation
and the number.
(When processing duct flex of a duct material drawing a size annotation by an edit command and a
fabricating attribute command, the size annotation drawing by duct flex is deleted.)
As for the move route, a position changes with the move of the route.
9. About the inversion of the annotation
Can reverse the size annotation which has been drawn.
Change command of the text style. Change dialog reference text style.
Electricity-429
Usage Example
The following shows usage examples for HVAC/Plumbing parts. Operations are the same for electrical parts.
1. Example of drawing size annotation text in parallel with pipe
- Select size annotation text drawing items.

“Pipe”
- Function: OFF
- Size: ON
- Level: ON
- Flow rate: OFF
- Load unit: OFF
- Thermal insulation material: OFF
- Installation place: OFF
- Installation position: OFF
(1) Specifying a target pipe

(1) Specify a part to draw size.
Specify the pipe (1).
A rubber band line of size annotation text is displayed.
(2) Specifying a drawing position ->

Drawing size annotation
(2) Specify the position of drawing size annotation text.
Specify the position (2) of drawing size annotation text.

Return to (1) after drawing size annotation text.
Electricity-430
2. Example of drawing size annotation text of rectangular duct with leader

“Duct”
- Function: ON
- Size: ON
- Level: ON
- Airflow: OFF
(1) Specifying a target duct

Specify a rectangular duct (1).
(2) Specifying the leader position -> Drawing

size annotation
(2) Specify the position to extract size.
Specify the position (2) of extracting size annotation
text.
(3)
Specify the drawing direction.
Specify the drawing direction (3).
(4)
Specify a part to draw size.
Return to (1) after drawing size annotation text.
3. Example of changing drawing items of already drawn size annotation text

“Pipe”
- Function: OFF
- Size: ON
- Level: OFF
- Flow rate: OFF
- Installation place: OFF
(1) Specifying target size annotation text

(1) Specify the size annotation to be replaced.
Specify the size annotation text (1) to be replaced.
Electricity-431
(2) Replacing size annotation text

(2) Specify the size annotation to be replaced.
Return to (1) after replacing size annotation text.
4. Example of moving size annotation text horizontally
(1) Specifying target size annotation text

(1) Specify the size annotation to be moved.
Specify the size annotation text (1) to be moved.
(2) Specifying the destination ->

Moving size annotation text
(2) Specify the move destination.
Specify the destination position (2).
(3) Specify the size annotation to be moved.

Return to (1) after moving size annotation text.
5. Example of deleting already drawn size annotation texts in batch
(1) Specifying the range of target size

annotation texts
(1) Specify the size annotations to be deleted.
Specify the diagonal points (1) and (2) of the range to be
deleted.
Target size annotation texts are displayed in red.
Click the “Complete selection” button (3).
(2) Deleting size annotation texts

(2) Specify the size annotations to be deleted.
Return to (1) after deleting size annotation texts.
Electricity-432
Let’s finishing a drawing
Material Count
1 Change Ceiling height
2 Wire Length
3 Add Luminaire Accessory
4 Set Pick Up Subjects
5 Wire Info Check
6 Attribute Check
7 Material Count
Electrical/Change celling height
Change celling height

Function Overview
Change the attributes for positioned equipment/device parts, and the ceiling height, floor height, and room name attributes of
turned up/down symbols.
１．Pull-down menu
Click [Electrical (Q)] -> [Material count (Z)] -> [Change ceiling height (T)]
２．Icon Menu
Click on
1.Command selection
Commands related to material count can be selected.
2. Selection method specification

Specify how to select parts to change the ceiling height for.
(1) Part selection:
Select this option to select drawn parts to change their ceiling heights.
(2) Room specification:

Select this option to specify drawn room information, then select the wiring equipment (switches)
subject to the process, and the other process subject parts within the room area, and then
change the ceiling height.
Description of the Ceiling H settings dialog box
1.Input room name

Input the room name or select history from the list.
Alternatively, use the Reference button to refer to the room name.
If the room name has not been input, it is not reflected in the attributes.
If you do not want to change the room name, press the OK button without inputting a room name.
2. Input floor height
Input the floor height to change, or select history from the list.
3. Input ceiling height
Electrical-434
Input the ceiling height to change, or select history from the list.
Precautions
1.Subject parts
The only subject parts for this command are equipment/device parts placed with the Equipment/
Device Layout command, and turned up/down symbols placed with the Turned Up/Down command.
This attribute is used as height information for the Material Count command.
2. Attributes which can be changed

The attributes which can be changed with this command are as follows:
Equipment/device parts: Ceiling height, floor height, room name
Turned up/down symbols: Ceiling height, floor height
3 Linked layout symbol

The attributes of individual equipment/device parts placed in linked layout with the Equipment/ Device
Layout command are changed.
Linked layout symbols cannot be selected individually at the part selection stage.
4. Relationship between floor height and ceiling height

The inter-relation between input values of floor height and ceiling height is as follows:
Floor height >= ceiling height
For a direct ceiling height, input the value for “floor height = ceiling height”.
The values input as floor height and ceiling height must each be more than 0.
Operation example
1. Usage example of changing the room name, floor height, and ceiling height of a placed luminaire
Command Toolbar
Command dialog
(1) “Select equipment/devices” -> “Set

range”
(1) Select subject parts to be processed.
Specify the range of luminaires subject to change of room
name, floor height, and ceiling height, as a range between
diagonal points (1) and (2), then press the End Selection
button (3).
Parts which will have the room name, floor height, and ceiling
height changed are displayed in the No.1 detection color.
(2) Set necessary items.

Use the Command dialog to set the changed room name, floor
height, and ceiling height, then press the OK button.
Electrical-435
(2) “Change room name, floor height,

ceiling height”
After changing the room name, floor height, and ceiling height,
go back to screen (1).
Changed content can be checked with the Properties

command.
Electrical-436
Electrical/Wire length
Wire length
Function Overview
Draw annotations that express lengths for drawn wires and turned up/down symbols.
Also input horizontal and vertical extra lengths for wires and for turned up/down symbols.
Click [HVAC/sanitary (T)] -> [Material count (Z)] -> [Wire length (L)].
２．Icon Menu
Click on .
1.Command selection
2. Process type selection

Select the process type.
(1) Input extra length
Also input horizontal and vertical extra lengths for wires.
Input vertical extra length turned up/down elements.
(2) Draw wire length
Draw lengths of wires, up/down elements, and CG wiring on the drawing.
The drawing wire length is rounded to 3DP, and then to 2DP. The unit is meters.
(3) Delete wire length
Delete only drawn wire length text.

Make advanced settings for drawing wire lengths.
Refer to “Description of the Text Position Detail Settings dialog box”
Electrical-437
Description of the Additional length dialog box
1.Horizontal extra length

Select this to set a horizontal extra length.
The range of horizontal extra length settings is -9999.99 to 9999.99, inclusive.
The unit is meters.
(1) If the check box is checked
The set horizontal extra length is set for wiring elements that are subject to it.
(2) If the check box is unchecked
The horizontal extra length is not set.
2. Vertical extra length

Select this to set a vertical extra length.
The range of vertical extra length settings is -9999.99 to 9999.99, inclusive.
The unit is meters.
Only vertical extra length is input for up/down elements.
The set vertical extra length is set for wiring elements and up/down elements that are subject to
it.
The vertical extra length is not set.
Description of the Text position detail settings dialog box
1.Set text position

Set the position of the wire length text string to use when drawing wiring.
(1) Fixed
Batch draw wire length text strings at the positions set by the text angle reference, offset, and
draw image portion.
If batch draw is used, the position is the midpoint of the longest wiring element in one wiring
group.
(2) Free
Draw the wire length text string at the angle by specified by the text angle reference, and at a
specified free position.
Electrical-438
2. Set text angle reference

Set the reference for the wire length text string angle to use when drawing wiring.
The reference wire is the longest wiring element in one wiring group.
(1) Horizontal standard
Always draw the wire that refers to the wire length text string as horizontal.
(2) Wiring criteria
Draw parallel to the wire that refers to the wire length text string.
3. Specify offset
Specify the offset (on release of drawing) of the wire length text string.
The input range for offset is 0.0~99.9, inclusive.
4. Draw image
Set the position of the wire length text string if the text position is “Fixed”.
The position of the wire length text string can only be set in one direction. The draw image is updated
by settings.
[Text position for horizontal wire]

(1) Set the draw direction to use if the angle of the wire for which the wire length text string is drawn
is in the hatched ranges shown below (including on boundary lines)
(2) The categories shown below are applied according to the wire angle and the text angle setting.
[Text position for vertical wire]

(1) Set the draw direction to use if the angle of the wire for which the wire length text string is drawn
is in the hatched ranges shown below (including on boundary lines)
Electrical-439
(2) The categories shown below are applied according to the wire angle and the text angle setting.
1.Set text position

Set the position of the wire length text string to use when drawing turned up/down symbols.
(1) Fixed
Batch draw wire length text strings at the positions set by the text angle reference (fixed as
horizontal reference) and offset.
The positions of batch drawn text strings are as follows:

For up/down. and penetrating, always the right side of the circle
If up/down elements are lined up laterally or longitudinally, determine according to the arrow
direction (angle).
The arrow direction (angle) is the portion shown in red in the diagram below.
Electrical-440
- The left side of the circle if the arrow direction angle is between 90° and 270°
- The right side of the circle if the arrow direction is anything other than the above
Note) It may overlap with the up/down element, depending on the offset distance setting.
(2) Free
Specify a free position to draw the wire length text string.
2. Set text angle reference

The setting is fixed to horizontal reference.
3. Specify offset
Specify the offset (on release of drawing) of the wire length text string from the up/down element.
The input range for offset is 0.0~99.9, inclusive.
Precautions
1.Selection elements
The subject parts are the wires and CG wires drawn with the Wiring command, and turned up/down
symbols drawn with the Turned Up/Down command.
The subject selection conditions differ according to the process type.
Process type: The wiring element unit when inputting extra length
Process type: Wiring group unit when drawing wire length
The following is an example of targeting the magenta line on the left side for each process type.
2. Draw text
Only text strings are drawn with wire length drawing.
The vertical length portion is drawn with ( ).
However, if the vertical length of the wire is 0, only the horizontal length portion is drawn.
The diagram below shows a sample.
For a wiring group, a wire length text string is drawn for each installation method within a group.
(1 installation methods within 1 group) (2 installation methods with drawn within 1 group)
For an up/down group
(Base point) The text base point after drawing is as follows:

Text position: Fixed
This is the base point shown by (2) in “4. Drawn image” within “Description of the Text
Position Detail Settings dialog box”.
Text position: Free

Fixed to the center left.
3. Wire length calculation method

Refer to calculation method for Material Count Commands.
Electrical-441
The wire length for turned up/down symbols is drawn on the basis of the following specification.
- If the group type of turned up/down symbols is turned up symbol, turned down symbol, or element
serial symbol
Wire length text is drawn for each of the wires that connect to the turned up symbol, turned down
symbol, or element serial symbol.
- If the turned up/down symbol group type is same floor symbol

If the number of wires linked to the same floor symbol is 2, the total value for wire length text is drawn
in only 1 place.
If the number of wires linked to the same floor symbol is anything other than 2, the following message
is displayed, and the drawn wire length text is the same value as the floor height of the same floor
symbol.
4. Other
(1) If the wire with drawn wire length has been moved with the Move Wire command, the drawn wire
length and the length of the actual wire will differ.
If this command is used in this kind of situation to draw the wire length again, the wire length that has
already been drawn is cleared, calculation is performed again, and drawing can be repeated
according to the advanced settings for text position.
Usage Example
1. Example of setting horizontal extra length and vertical extra length of subject wiring
Command Toolbar
(1) “Process subject part selection”

Select extra length input (1) as the process type.
Specify process range (2) (3).
Selected wires are displayed in red.
Press the End Selection button (4).
(2) “Set extra length”

(1) Set extra length.
Check horizontal extra length.
Set horizontal extra length.
Horizontal extra length 1.0
Check vertical extra length.
Set vertical extra length.
Vertical extra length 0.5
Press the OK button.
Electrical-442
2. Example of batch drawing wire length text strings for subject wiring
＜Command Toolbar＞
(1) [Set text position]

(1) Make advanced settings for text position.
Select draw wire length (1) as the process type.
Press the Advanced Settings button (2).
Make settings in the Text Position Detail Settings dialog box.
Text position Fixed
Text angle reference Horizontal standard
Offset distance 1.0
Draw image Select top as the text position for horizontal
wires, and left for vertical wires.
Press the OK button.
(2) “Process subject part selection”

(2) Select parts to be processed
Specify the process range (3)(4).
Selected wires are displayed in red.
Press the [End Selection] button (5).
(3) “Draw wire length text strings”

(3) Draw wire length text strings.
Electrical-443
Electrical/Add luminaire accessory
Add luminaire accessory

Function Overview
Assign the accessory attribute to luminaire parts.
Click [Electrical (Q)] -> [Material count (Z)] -> [Add Luminaire Accessory (F)].
２．Icon Menu
Click on .
Command dialog Description
1.Display part names

Display the part names of selected parts.
2. Select shade type

Select the shade type from the list.
3. Select lifting tackle type

Select the lifting tackle type from the list.
4. Select frame type

Select the frame type from the list.
5. Select ballast type

Select the ballast type from the list.
Electrical-444
Electrical/Add luminaire accessory
Precautions
1.Subject parts
The only subject parts for this command are HID lights, fluorescent lights, emergency lights, guide
lights, stair and hallway guide lights, and LED lights among the luminaires placed with the Equipment/
Device Layout command.
2. Attributes which can be assigned
The attributes which can be assigned with this command are as follows:
Even among luminaire parts, incandescent lights, flame-proof enclosure lights, enhanced-safety
flame-proof enclosure lights, and aircraft warning lights are non-subject parts.
This attribute can be used with the Material Count command.
Usage Example
1 Usage example of assigning the luminaire attribute to a placed fluorescent light (trough-type FL40W x1)
Command Toolbar
Command dialog
(1) “diagonal point 1 specification” ->

“diagonal point 2 specification”
Specify diagonal point 1 (1) and diagonal point 2 (2) for parts to
assigned the luminaire accessory attribute to, then press End
Selection (3).
(2) Specify the symbol.

Specify the part (4) to assign the luminaire accessory attribute
to.
When a part is specified, all matching parts change to the No.2
detection color.
If multiple parts are selected, they are specified sequentially.
(3) Set luminaire accessory parts.
After specifying parts, the Luminaire accessory Settings dialog
box opens, so select the accessory parts to assign from the list
and press the OK button . If multiple parts are selected, they
are specified sequentially.

Go back to the screen (1) after assigning attributes.
Electrical-445
Electrical/Set Pick up Subjects
Set Pick up Subjects

Function Overview
Set materials to exclude or include in material counts for each construction type of device, equipment, and route part.
Click [Electrical (Q)] -> [Material count (Z)] -> [Set pick up subjects (S)].
２．Icon Menu
Click on .
1. Command selection
2. Select subject parts

Select subject parts, from [Electricity, HVAC/sanitary].
1. Construction type
Select the construction type, from [Normal, Customer-supplied, Separate work, Removal, Remove & re-
install, Use existing].
Change to the selected construction type.

Do not change the construction type.
2. Material count subjects

Select material count subject types, from [Material count target, Not material count target].
Change to the selected material count subject type.

Do not change the material count subject type.
Electrical-446
Precautions
1. Subject parts
The subject parts are as follows:
- Equipment/devices
- Wires
- CG wiring
- Up/down
- Cable trays
- Raceways
- Bus ducts
- Metal ducts
- Floor ducts
- Ventilation pipes
- Sleeves
- Inserts
- Full-thread bolts
- Steel parts
- Steel plate
- Metal support parts
2. Range specification of parts

Parts can be specified with a range in both plan views and section views.
However, equipment/devices. floor ducts, and ventilation pipes are not displayed in section views.
Usage Example
1. Usage example of making drawn equipment/devices excluded from material count
Command Toolbar
(1) “Style Settings”

(1) Make style settings.
Command Toolbar： Press the Style button (1).
- The [Selection Condition (style)] dialog box is displayed.

Element: Select “equipment/device” and
press the OK button (3).
(2) “Set Range”

(2) Specify the range frame to process.
Specify the range of parts to set as subject to pick-up (4)
(5).
Selected parts (equipment/devices) are displayed in red.
Command Toolbar： Press the [End Selection] button (6).
Electrical-447
(3) “Set Pick-up Subjects”

(3) Set subjects for pick-up.
- The Set Pick-up Subjects dialog box is displayed.
Uncheck the [Construction type] check box (7).
Material count subject type: Select “Exclude from material
count” (8).
Press the [OK] button (9).
(4) “Set Pick-up Subjects Complete”

(4) Specify the range frame to process.
Go back to screen (2) after performing Set Pick-up
Subjects.
Electrical-448
Electrical/Wiring Info Check
Wiring Info Check

Function Overview
Check wire definitions necessary for material counting. This is linked to wire text and the Wiring Note Table command, so
undefined wires can be defined without switching the command.
Click [Electrical (Q)] -> [Material count (Z)] -> [Wiring Info Check (H)].
２．Icon Menu
Click on .
1.Save Setting values

Specify the method for saving setting values.
2. Search conditions
Set search conditions.
Search for wires defined by checked conditions.
3. Batch search within drawing

Batch searches can be performed within the active drawing.
1.Definition type
Display the wire definition method.
2. Layer
Displays the drawing layers of wires.
3. Installation method
Display the wiring installation method.
4. Number of cable cores

Display the number of cable cores assigned to the wire.
Nothing is displayed if the number of cable cores is not assigned.
5. Ground wires
Electrical-449
Display the number of ground wires assigned to the wire.

Nothing is displayed if no ground wires are assigned.
6. Remarks
Display the remark text for the number of cable cores assigned to the wire.
Nothing is displayed if the number of cable cores is not assigned, or if no remark text is set.
7. Wire text
Display wire text that defines wires.
Nothing is displayed if no wire text is defined.
8. Horizontal length
Displays the horizontal length of the wire.
9. Vertical length
Displays the vertical length of the wire.
10. Coordinates
Display the center point coordinates of the longest straight portion of the searched wiring route.
11. Color Settings button

Make color settings for flashing displays.
12. Flashing Display button

Display the wiring route to be checked, with a flashing display.
13. Flash Off button

Undo flashing display.
14. Wire Text button

The Wire Text command starts. Wire text can be defined for undefined wires.
This button is only enabled when an undefined wire is selected.
15. Wiring Note Table button

The Wiring Note Table command starts. Wire text can be defined in the Wiring Note Table for
undefined wires.
16. CSV Output button

Wiring information in the list can be output to a CSV file.
17. Reset Frame button

The range for frame specification can be re-specified.
18. Re-search button

Search again, with the range of the frame specification unchanged.
Contextual Menu Description
1.Context
This section explains the content displayed in the context menu.
(1) Batch specify within drawing

Process as a batch within the drawing.
Electrical-450
Precautions
1.Definition types
The definition type expresses the method for defining the type of wiring.
Multiple wire text strings can be defined for one route of wiring, so all the definitions are displayed in
a list. However, if there are multiple definitions for one wire, the order of priority for their display is
wire text > Wiring Note Table > wiring information.
2. Layer view
Layer view displays wires in drawing layers.
3. Horizontal and vertical lengths
The calculation method for horizontal and vertical lengths is the same as in material counting. Refer
to Material Count Commands for details.
4. Coordinate display
The calculation method for coordinates is to display the coordinates of the midpoint of the longest
linear element within the elements that make up the same wiring route as that for the material count.
Refer to Material Count Commands for details.
5. Wire text
When commands are started with the Wire Text button, the subject wires are displayed flashing and
in closeup.
When wire text is drawn for the subject wire, display goes back to the list.
If any operation other than new drawing is performed, the display does not automatically go back to
the list.
If drawing is stopped before completion, use “Back to previous operation” in the context menu, or
press the Esc key, to go back to list display.
6. Wiring Note Tables
The Wiring Note Table button starts the Wiring Note Table command with all undefined wires
displayed in the list acquired. If multiple Wiring Note Tables are drawn in a drawing, specify the one
to refer to. After the wire text is set, press the OK button to rewrite the referenced wiring note table
and go back to the list display.
If drawing is stopped before completion, use “Back to previous operation” in the context menu, or
press the Esc key, to go back to list display.
Usage Example
1. Usage example of checking the wiring definition and drawing wire text (independent) for undefined wires
Command Toolbar
(1) “Get drawing information”

(1) Set the start point of the range frame to
process.
Specify the range frame start point (1) for
confirmation of wire definitions.
(2) Set end point of range frame to process

Specify the range frame end point (2) for checking
wire definitions.
(2) “Attribute Check Dialog Box Display”

(3) Specify undefined wires.
(4) Select processing.

Press the Wire Text (Single) button.
The display zooms in on the subject wire, and it is
displayed blinking.
(5) Specify the wire or turned up/down symbol.

Set wire text and specify the blinking wire.
Draw the wire text, then go back to list display.
Electrical-451
Electrical/Attribute checks
Attribute checks
Function Overview
Check the attributes necessary for auto calculation of material count, panel diagrams and panel tables, and number of cable
cores.
Click [Electrical (Q)] -> [Material count (Z)] -> [Attribute check (Q)].
２．Icon Menu
Click on .
1.Save setting values

Specify the method for saving settings
2. Confirmation category
Set confirmation categories.
If the confirmation category is changed, the Command dialog can be changed.
The confirmation categories are as follows:
- Electricity Material count (by equipment)
- Electricity Material count (by circuit)
- Electricity Material count (by room)
- Electricity panel diagram/panel table (distribution board)
- Electricity Panel diagram/ panel table (power feeder panel)
- Electricity Number of cable cores (Auto-calculate)
- Electricity All parts
3. Selection condition settings

Set selection conditions.
If the Set Selection Conditions button is pressed, the Set Selection Conditions dialog box is displayed.
4. Batch Search within drawing

Batch process within the active drawing.
Electrical-452
If a part has been selected, different Command dialog boxes are displayed, according to the confirmation category settings in the
Command toolbar.
(1) Electricity
Material count (by equipment)
1.Reset Frame button

Re-specify the range frame for checking attributes.
2. Dialog Box Size Switch button

Enlarge or shrink the dialog box.
3. Equipment type
Equipment types are displayed.
4. Number of detections
The number of detected parts applicable to each item is displayed.
5. Display color check

If the check box is checked, parts applicable to each item are displayed flashing in the confirmed
color.
6. Confirmed Color button

Select the confirmed display color. Also, the following are set as default states:
- The background color is set if excluded.
- If the third layer and below for equipment types (layer names) such as “Power equipment -
Lighting system” were the same, the same confirmed color is set.
7. Confirm Details button

Attributes of parts applicable to each item can be confirmed.
(2) Electricity
Material count (by circuit)


3. Equipment type
Electrical-453
4. Panel symbols
Panel symbols are displayed.
5. Main line No.

The main line number is displayed.
6. Circuit No.
The circuit number is displayed.

color.

- If the third layer and below for equipment types (layer names) such as “Power equipment -
Lighting system” were the same, the same confirmed color is set.

(3) Electricity
Material count (by room)


3. Equipment type
4. Room name
The room name is displayed.

color.


Electrical-454
(4) Electricity
Panel diagram/ panel table (distribution board)


3. Power supply type

The power supply type is displayed.
4. Voltage type
The voltage type is displayed.
5. Load type
The load type is displayed.
6. Main line No.

7. Panel symbols
8. Circuit No.
9. General capacity
The general capacity is displayed.
10. Emergency capacity

The emergency capacity is displayed.


If the check box is checked, parts applicable to each item are displayed blinking in the confirmed
color.


Electrical-455
(5) Electricity
Panel diagram/ panel table (power feeder panel)


3. Power supply type

The power supply type is displayed.
4. Voltage type
The voltage type is displayed.
5. Load type
The load type is displayed.
6. Main line No.

7. Panel symbols
8. Circuit No
9. Drawing symbols
Drawing symbols are displayed.
10. Control method type

The control method type is displayed
11. Seasonal load type

The seasonal load type is displayed.
12. General capacity

The general capacity is displayed.
13. Emergency capacity

The emergency capacity is displayed.


If the check box is checked, parts applicable to each item are displayed blinking in the confirmed
color.


Electrical-456
(6) Electricity
Number of cable cores (Auto-calculate)


3. Switching circuit
Switching circuits are displayed

If the check box is checked, parts applicable to each item are displayed flashing in the
confirmed color.


(7) Electricity
All parts

The number of detected parts is displayed.

color.

Select the confirmed display color.

Electrical-457
Description of the Confirm Details dialog box
1.Confirmation category
The current confirmation category is displayed.
2. Element category
Parts are categorized into element categories.
If there are no applicable parts, “Not applicable” is displayed after the element category.
3. List display
The element type, layer, and attributes of parts in each element category are displayed.
If the displayed parts have no applicable attribute items, “▲” is displayed for attributes.

Select the confirmed display color when one parts is displayed blinking.
5. Single Part Blinking Display button

Select one part from the list display and press the Single Part Blinking Display button to make that
part blink in the confirmation color.
However, if there is a part that was set to blinking display from the Command dialog, the blinking
display of that part is canceled.
To display parts blinking at the same time, check the display color check box of the Command dialog
again.
6. Single Part Non-blinking Display button

Undo blinking display for one part.
7. CSV Output button

Output all parts under confirmation of details to a CSV file, regardless of element categories.
8. Close button
Close detail confirmation.
Electrical-458
Description of the Set Selection Conditions dialog box
[Set layer or property attribute to refine]

1.Equipment type refined check
Use this to specify an equipment type (layer) and select parts.
- Equipment types can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts of the specified equipment type are subject parts for selection.
- If this is turned off, all parts become subject parts for selection.
2. Set equipment type

Set the equipment type (layer).
3. Set Equipment Type button

Open the Set layer Information dialog box.
4. Get Layer button

Get layers of parts drawn in the drawing.
5. Material Count Subject Flag Refined Check

Use this to specify a material count subject flag and select parts.
- Material count subject flags can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts with the specified material count subject flag are subject parts for selection.
6. Set material count subject flag

Set the material count subject flag attribute.
7. Get Material Count Subject Flag Attribute button

Get the material count subject flag attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
8. Construction type refined check

Use this to specify a construction type and select parts.
- Construction types can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts of the specified construction type are subject parts for selection.
9. Set construction type

Set the construction type attribute.
10. Get Construction Type Attribute button

Electrical-459
Get the construction type attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
11. Box refined check

Use this to specify boxes and select parts.
- Boxes can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only specified boxes are subject parts for selection.
12 Set boxes
Set box attributes.
13. Get Box Attribute button

Get the box attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
14. Drawing symbol refined check

Use this to specify drawing symbols and select parts.
- Drawing symbols can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts with the specified drawing symbol are subject parts for selection.
15 Set drawing symbols

Set the drawing symbol attribute.
16. Get Drawing Symbol Attribute button

Get the drawing symbol attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
17. Room name refined check

Use this to specify room names and select parts.
- Room names can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts with the specified room name are subject parts for selection.
18 Set room name

Set the room name attribute.
19. Get Room Name Attribute button

Get the room name attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
20. Power supply type refined check

Use this to specify a power supply type and select parts.
- Power supply types can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts of the specified power supply type are subject parts for selection.
21. Set power supply type

Set the power supply type attribute.
22. Get Power Supply Type Attribute button

Get the power supply type attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
23. Voltage type refined check

Use this to specify a voltage type and select parts.
- Voltage types can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts of the specified voltage type are subject parts for selection.
24. Set voltage type

Set the voltage type attribute.
25. Get Voltage Type Attribute button

Get the voltage type attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
26. Load type refined check

Use this to specify a load type and select parts.
- Load types can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts of the specified load type are subject parts for selection.
Electrical-460
27. Set load type

Set the load type attribute.
28. Get Load Type Attribute button

Get the load type attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
29. Panel symbol refined check

Use this to specify panel symbols and select parts.
- Panel symbols can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts with the specified panel symbol are subject parts for selection.
30. Set panel symbols

Set the panel symbol attribute.
31. Get Panel Symbol Attribute button

Get the panel symbol attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
32. Main line number refined check

Use this to specify main line numbers and select parts.
- Main line numbers can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts with the specified main line number are subject parts for selection.
33. Set main line number

Set the main line number attribute.
34. Get Main Line Number Attribute button

Get the main line number attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
35. Circuit number refined check

Use this to specify circuit numbers and select parts.
- Circuit numbers can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts with the specified circuit number are subject parts for selection.
36. Set circuit number

Set the circuit number attribute.
37. Get Circuit Number Attribute button

Get the circuit number attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
38. Control method refined check

Use this to specify control methods and select parts.
- Control methods can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only specified control methods are subject parts for selection.
39 Set control method

Set the control method attribute.
40. Get Control Method Attribute button

Get the control method attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
41. Load seasonal type refined check

Use this to specify a load seasonal type and select parts.
- Load seasonal types can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts of the specified load seasonal type are subject parts for selection.
42. Set load seasonal type

Set the load seasonal type attribute.
43. Get Load Seasonal Type Attribute button

Get the load seasonal type attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
Electrical-461
44. Switching circuit refined check

Use this to specify switching circuits and select parts.
- Switching circuits can be specified if the function is turned on.
Only parts of the specified switching circuit are subject parts for selection.
45. Set switching circuit

Set the switching circuit attribute.
46. Get Switching Circuit Attribute button

Get the switching circuit attributes of parts drawn in the drawing.
[Set refining check]

47. By Equipment button
Click to refine parts with specific attributes using electrical - material count (by equipment).
Refining check is turned on for the following: Refining check is turned off, other than for the following:
- By equipment type
- Material count subject flag
48. By Circuit button

Click to refine parts with specific attributes using electrical - material count (by circuit).
- By equipment type
- Circuit number
49. By Room button

Click to refine parts with specific attributes using electrical - material count (by room).
- By equipment type
- Room name
50. Distribution Board button

Click to refine parts with specific attributes using electrical - panel diagram/ panel table (distribution
board).
- Power supply type
- Voltage type
- Load type
- Panel symbol
- Main line number:
- Circuit number
51. Power Feeder Panel button

Click to refine parts with specific attributes using electrical - panel diagram/ panel table (power feeder
panel).
- Drawing symbol
- Power supply type
- Voltage type
- Load type
- Panel symbol
- Main line number:
- Circuit number
- Control method
- Load seasonal type
52. Auto Calculate button

Click to refine parts with specific attributes using electrical - Number of cable cores (auto-cal).
- Switching circuit
53. All On button

Press this button to check all refine check boxes.
54 All Off Button

Electrical-462
Press this button to uncheck all refine check boxes.
55. Invert
Press this button to invert the checked/unchecked states of all refine check boxes.
[Set refined elements]

56. Equipment/device check
Use this to select equipment/devices.
- If this is turned on, equipment/devices become subject parts for selection.
- If this is turned off, equipment/devices become parts excluded from selection.
57. Wire/turned up/down check

Use this to select turning a wire up or down.
- If this is turned on, wires and up/down elements become subject parts for selection.
- If this is turned off, wires and up/down elements become parts excluded from selection.
58. Cable tray check

Use this to select cable trays etc.
- If this is turned on, cable trays become subject parts for selection.
- If this is turned off, cable trays become parts excluded from selection.
59. Sleeve/insert check

- If this is turned on, sleeves, inserts, full-thread bolts, steel parts, and metal support parts become
subject parts for selection.
- If this is turned off, sleeves, inserts, full-thread bolts, steel parts, and metal support parts become
parts excluded from selection.


Contextual Menu Description
1.Context
This section explains the content displayed in the context menu.
Batch Search within drawing

Batch process within the active drawing.
Precautions
1.Subject parts
Parts that are subject to this command are those shown below.
Parts that have “excluded” as their element category cannot be selected.
Electrical-463
2.Parts excluded from each confirmation category

The excluded parts are different for each confirmation category set in the Command Toolbar.
Judge excluded parts based on the following conditions.
(1) Parts excluded from [ Electricity Material count (by equipment)]

Electrical-464
- Parts for which the element category is “Annotation/Finishing”

- Parts for which the element type is “[insert] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[full-thread bolt] group”.
- Parts for which the “material count subject flag” attribute is “excluded from material count”.
(2) Parts excluded from [ Electricity Material count (by circuit)]

(3) Parts excluded from [ Electricity Material count (by room)]

- Parts for which the element category is “wire turned up/down”
- Parts for which the element category is “cable tray”
- Parts for which the element category is “Other”
(4) Parts which are “excluded [Electricity panel diagram/ panel table (distribution board)]”
- Parts for which the element category is “sleeve/ insert”
- Parts for which the element type is “[combined switch] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[power receptacle] group”
- Parts for which the element type is “[data jack] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[panel] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[data communications device] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[automatic fire alarm/ smoke control equipment] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[fire/crime prevention device] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[gas leak detector] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[emergency alarm equipment] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[lightning rod device] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[high-voltage device] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[generator device] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[storage battery] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[CVCF] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[sunlight-related] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[other materials] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[architectural symbol (electrical)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wiring annotation text]”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wire text] (independent)”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wire text] (multiple)”.
- Parts for which the element type is “equipment/device legend text”.
- Parts for which the “power supply type” attribute is not “commercial power supply circuit (1
phase), “generator circuit (1 phase)”, or storage battery circuits (1 phase)
(5) Parts which are “excluded [Electricity panel diagram/ panel table (power feeder panel)]”
- Parts for which the element type is “[grouped switch] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[switch] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[receptacle] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (HID)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (fluorescent)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (emergency light)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (incandescent)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (flame-proof enclosure)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (increased safety ignition-proof type)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (aircraft warning light)] group”.
Electrical-465
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (guide light)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[luminaire (stair and hallway guide light)] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wiring annotation text]”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wire text] (independent)”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wire text] (multiple)”.
- Parts for which the element type is “equipment/device legend text”.
- Parts for which the “power supply type” attribute is not “commercial power supply circuit (3
phase) or “generator circuit (3 phase)”
(6) Parts which are “Excluded [Electricity Number of cable cores (auto-cal)]”
- Parts for which the element type is “[power receptacle] group”
- Parts for which the element type is “[box] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[pull box] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[circuit breaker] group”.
The following parts have multiple element types for a single part.
Even if only one part is selected, there will be multiple detections.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wiring] group”.
- Parts for which the element type is “[wiring (arc)] group”.
4. Confirmation categories
Part attributes can be checked for each confirmation category, but this does not guarantee the output
results for each command.
Refer to Material Count Commands, Panel Diagram/ Panel Table Commands, and Number of Cable
Cores Commands for details.
Electrical-466
Usage Example
1. Usage example of checking attributes with Electricity - Material count (by equipment type)
Command Toolbar
“Range Frame Specification”

(1)
(1) Set the start point of the range frame to process.
Specify the range frame start point (1) for confirmation of
picked-up attributes.
(2) Set end point of range frame to process

Specify the range frame end point (2) for confirmation of
picked-up attributes.
(3) Parts selected as subject to pick-up are displayed in

red.
(4)
A Confirmation dialog box is displayed.
(2) “Attribute Check Dialog Box Display”

(5) The Check Picked-up Attributes dialog box is
displayed.
(6)
Check attributes.
Check the display color check boxes (3).
(7)
Parts applicable to each item are displayed flashing in
(8) the confirmed color.
Check attributes.
Press the Confirm Details button (4).
(3) “Confirm Details dialog box”
(9) The element type, layer, and attributes of parts fitting
under each item are listed for each element category.
Electrical-467
Electrical/Material Count
Material Count
Function Overview
This function picks up equipment, devices, wires, pipes, etc. based on drawing data, and outputs count lists.
1.Pull-down menu
Click [Electrical (Q)] -> [Material count (Z)] -> [Material count (Z)].
2.Icon Menu
Click on .
Description of the Process Selection dialog box
1.Create pick-up data

Run the picked up data creation process.
2. Re-calculate previously created pick-up data
Use previously created pick-up data to repeat the count process.
3. List output
Run the list output process for created pick-up data.
Make settings related to the creation of pick-up data.
Electrical-468
Make settings used for material count, wiring information check, and Wiring Note Table functions.
1.Set the count method for protection pipe. [FROM HERE]
2. Set the installation method name and the vertical length installation method.
Set the name that will be output for the combination of element type and installation method
(horizontal) when pick-up data is created, and set the vertical installation method.
Up/down elements are only picked up for vertical installation methods, so only the output name is set.
3. Set the order of priority for applying the Wiring Note Table.
If multiple installation methods become mixed, such as through the drawing of end covers within one
wiring group, one installation method is regarded as having higher priority and the Wiring Note Table
is applied.
The same applies when the Wiring Note Table command is used to refer to elements within a
drawing.
If the wires in the drawing below were drawn with the above settings, the Wiring Note Table
command would refer to the ceiling void.
Electrical-469
4. Wire text application method for multiple sections divided by end covers
Set the application method for wire texts for each section.
If the Wiring Note Table is also drawn, apply the Wiring Note Table after the wire text is applied.
The following is an example of a case in which only wire text is defined.
5. Wire text in pipe, in PF pipe, or on same pipe

Set the application method for wire texts for each section.
The following is an example of a case in which the wire text is defined inside the PF pipe.
Electrical-470
Description of the File Selection dialog box
1.File selection
When “Recalculate created pick-up data” is selected under Process Selection, the File Selection
dialog box opens.
Select the pick-up data file to recalculate pick-up data for.
When saving, the same dialog box is used for overwriting or saving under a changed name, for new
creation or re-calculation.
The extension for pick-up data is EPR.
Description of the Input Property Name/Person in Charge/Remarks dialog box
1.Pick-up data File name

Display the data file name and path name of the pick-up data file.
2. Input property name

Input the property name with up to 40 1-byte or 20 2-byte characters.
List selection can also be used with history.
3. Input name of person in charge

The name of the person in charge can be input with up to 20 1-byte or 10 2-byte characters.
4. Input remarks
Remarks can be written with up to 40 1-byte or 20 2-byte characters.
Electrical-471
If the property name, person in charge, and remarks are opened from “Create new pick-up data”,
they are blank, but if they are opened from “Re-calculate existing pick-up data”, they display the
setting content they had before.
Description of the Pickup Subject Drawing File Selection dialog box
1.Drawing file selection

Select the drawing files from which to create pick-up data
2. Add button
Add the selected drawing file to the subjects for pick-up data creation.
Drawing files can also be added from different folders.
3. Exclude button
Remove the specified drawing file from the subjects for pick-up data creation.
4. Clear button
Clear all drawing files from the subjects for pick-up data creation.
5. Display drawings subject to pick-up data creation

Display the drawing files from which to create or re-calculate the selected pick-up data.
Electrical-472
Description of the Status of creating picked up data dialog box
1.Progress display
Display the drawing file name being processed, and the state of progress.
2. Warning display
Display status during pick-up data creation.
Also, display a message if an error occurs.
3. Rename Save button

This enables saving under a different name when “Recalculate Created Pick-up Data” is used.
It is disabled when “Create new pick-up data” is used.
4. Save button
This enables overwrite saving when “Recalculate Created Pick-up Data” is used.
Save As can be used when “Create new pick-up data” is used.
5. Cancel button
Press the Cancel button to stop the pick-up process and go back to the Pickup Subject Drawing File
Selection dialog box.
6. Print Warning button

Output warning messages from a printer.
7. Save Warning button

Save warning messages to a file.
Electrical-473
1.File selection
Select the pick-up data files for list output.
When saving, the same dialog box is used for overwriting or saving under a changed name.
The extensions for pick-up data are EPU and EPR.
Description of the List Output Type Selection dialog box
Electrical-474
1. Pick-up data file name display

Display the pick-up data file name, property name, name of person in charge, and remarks, and
creation date for list output.
2. Select output style
Select the style for list output.
- Sheet output :
Output the count list to a printer.
- EXCEL output :
Output in EXCEL format.
- CSV output :
Output in CSV format.
If the box for wire length 0.0 output is checked, wires and pipes shorter than 0.1m are also output
to the list.
3. Select output type
Select the style for list output.
- Equipment type :
Count and output by equipment type.
- Wiring basis output :
When the count method is by equipment type or by circuit, count and output wiring parts by
route.
4. Select output items
Select the items to output.
- Equipment / devices :
Output parts placed with Equipment/ Device Layout, as well as cable trays, raceways, and
floor ducts.
- Wiring :
Output wiring and pipe parts.
- Sleeves (fire protection zones) :
Output sleeves and fire protection zones.
- Inserts :
Output inserts.
- Full-thread bolts :
Output full-thread bolts.
- Steel parts :
Output steel parts.
- Metal support parts :
Output metal support parts.
- Auto generate boxes :
If “Yes” is checked, boxes and ceiling switches are automatically generated where desired.
Before performing material counting, set auto generated box parts with the box judgment flag
attribute as “yes”.
This can be changed with the Properties command.
5. Scale summary method
Select Counting condition
-Only standart scale
-Pickup in standard scale
Electrical-475
6. Set Subject Equipment button

Select equipment to output, change output equipment names, and set output sequence.
1: Select subject equipment and change output equipment names

Equipment with check boxes checked is output as subject equipment.
Equipment names can be also changed at the time of output. If the name is not changed, the
displayed equipment name is used as the output name.
2: Invert Selections button
Invert selection checks of subject equipment.
3: Select All button
Make all equipment subject to output.
4: Deselect All button
Make all equipment not subject to output.
5: Output Sequence button
When the Output Sequence button is pressed, the Equipment Type Output Sequence Settings
dialog box opens and the output sequence for equipment can be set.
Use the buttons to move the selected system equipment up or down.
Electrical-476
7. Set Subject Drawing button

Select drawings to output, change output drawing names, and set output sequence.
1:Select subject drawings and change output drawing names

Drawings with check boxes checked are output as subject drawings.
Drawing names can be also changed at the time of output.
If the name is not changed, the displayed drawing file name is used as the output name.
2:Invert Selections button

Invert all selection check marks for drawings subject to output.
3:Select All button

Make all drawings subject to output.
4:Deselect All button

Make all drawings not subject to output.
5:Output Sequence button

When the Output Sequence button is pressed, the Drawing Output Sequence Settings
dialog box opens and the output sequence for drawings can be set.
The drawing selected with the button moves up or down.
Electrical-477
8. Other Settings button

Output settings and output units for wire names can be set.
1: Set names of wiring parts for output

-“Output by combining wire, cable, and conduit names”
Output by combining wire, cable, and conduit names.
Picked-up text strings are output unchanged, so even if they have been edited with the
base command, text strings are output as drawn in the drawing.
-“Output by separating wire, cable, and conduit names”

Output wire, cable, and conduit names separately.
Picked-up text strings are output separately, so if they have been edited with the base
command, text strings are not output as drawn in the drawing.
2: Set unit of conduit for output

Set the unit to use for conduit in sheet output.
If the unit is “m”, the picked-up length is output as the total for each part type and size.
If the unit is “Peace”, the value calculated by dividing the total quantity by the standard
length (rounding up) is output.
The standard length can be set for each part group.
3: Set output unit of cable tray

Set the unit to use for cable trays in sheet output.
The standard length can be set.
4: Set unit of output of raceway

Set the unit to use for raceways in sheet output.
Electrical-478
The standard length can be set.
5: Set the output unit for full-thread bolts

Set the unit to use for full-thread bolts in sheet output.
If the unit is “Peace”, set the output units for part type, size, and drawn standard length
(rounded up) to pieces and output accordingly.
6: Set unit of output for steel parts

Set the unit to use for raceways in sheet output.
If the unit is “Peace”, set the output units for part type, size, and drawn standard length
(rounded up) to pieces and output accordingly.
9. Box auto-generation master selection

The box auto-generation master can be selected.
10. Edit Master button

Box auto-generation masters can be edited and registered as new masters.
- “Edit box auto-generation master”

The box types to automatically generate, and their quantities, can be set for each part.
Electrical-479
1: Edit button
Edit the selected box auto-generation master.
(1): Display selection

Refine the parts subject to generation in the master list display, to make selection easier.
(2): Generates Parts Settings button

Set box types to automatically generate, for parts subject to generation.
(3): Generated Number Settings button

Set the number of boxes to automatically generate.
2: Copy button
Copy the selected box auto-generation master, to create a new master.
The “box auto-generation master (provided by the system)” cannot be copied.
3: Delete button
Delete selected box auto-generation master.
The “box auto-generation master (provided by the system)” cannot be deleted.
4: Rename button
Rename selected box auto-generation master.
The “box auto-generation master (provided by the system)” cannot be renamed.
Electrical-480
Precautions
1.Subject parts for material count

The parts subject to counting in an electrical material count are parts positioned with electrical
Equipment/ Device Layout, wires drawn in electrical routes (including wires with CG display), cable
trays, raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts, ventilation pipes, floor ducts, inserts, full-thread bolts, steel
parts, and metal support parts.
Building parts, HVAC/sanitary parts, and building parts which can be positioned with electrical
Equipment/ Device Layout, are excluded from material count.
*If the Properties command pickup subject settings are used to set material count subject flags within
an attribute to exclude from material count, the affected parts are excluded from material count.
2. Output sheets
Sheet output by equipment type
Sheet output by equipment type is output as shown below.
-The equipment type is displayed in the upper left of each page, and a page break is added to the
output list each time the equipment type changes.
-The part name is displayed within the product name.

Drawing symbols are displayed if there is “equipment/device” next to the product name.
However, plate types are only displayed for wiring equipment.
The plate type can be changed with the Properties command.
For a wire, the installation method is displayed.
-Construction categories such as separate work, removal, and normal are displayed as the
construction type.
Nothing is displayed for normally picked-up parts.
The overall total for one line (across) is displayed as the total.
If there are many drawings for pick-up, on two or more pages, the totals are displayed on the
first page, and not on the second and subsequent pages.
-Display part-specific units as the units.
-To the right of the units, the drawing name is displayed on the upper level, with the quantities
picked up for each drawing.
Wiring basis output

Wiring basis output is output as shown below.
The wiring portions for wiring basis output only differ with output by equipment type.
-The equipment type, drawing name, panel symbol, main line number, and circuit number are is
displayed in the upper left of each page, and a page break is added to the output list each time
the equipment type, drawing name, panel symbol, main line number, or circuit number changes.
Panel symbols, main line numbers, and circuit numbers are not displayed if they are not
assigned to attributes.
With the same equipment type and drawing name, parts with no assigned panel symbol, main
line number, and circuit number are counted as parts.
-The part name is displayed as the wire type.

The installation method for the wire is displayed as the installation method.
-Construction categories such as separate work and removal are displayed as the construction
type.
Nothing is displayed for normally picked-up parts.
The overall total for one line (across) is displayed as the total.
If there are many wiring routes, on multiple rows, the totals are displayed on the first line, and
not on the second and subsequent lines.
-The display unit for wires is meters (m).

Nothing is displayed to the right of the units, and the horizontal lengths and vertical lengths are
displayed for wiring in each route.
Electrical-481
3. Output sequence
The output sequence for parts is as stated below, with parts being sorted into that sequence for
output.
Output sequence
4. Sheet output of combined switches and grouped switches

Combined switches and grouped switches are displayed as stated below, with the switch types and
quantities that were set when they were positioned.
5. Sheet output of hand hole steel covers

If a hand hole has a steel cover judgment flag set within its attributes, it is displayed as follows:
This can be set with the Properties command.
6. Sheet output of terminal board breakdown

The names of Pr equipment and their numbers can be set as the breakdown of terminal boards.
If the names of Pr equipment and their numbers are set in the attributes for terminal boards, they are
displayed as follows:
This can be set with the Properties command.
The only two types of subject parts within panels are terminal boards and protector panels.
7. Sheet output of luminaire accessories

A luminaire accessory is displayed as follows if it has a shade type, lifting tackle type, frame type, or
ballast type set in its attributes.
This can be set with the Add Luminaire Accessory command.
The items that can be set are as follows:

Electrical-482
There are no setting items for incandescent lights, flame-proof enclosure lights, enhanced-safety
flame-proof enclosure lights, and aircraft warning lights.
8. Auto generation of TV devices

The breakdown of TV panels can be set by the types of TV device and their numbers.
the names of TV device types and their numbers are set in the attributes for TV panels: This can be
set with the Properties command.
The equipment type for auto-generated TV devices is fixed as “equipment/device - TV collaborative
viewing system”.
The only four types of subject parts within panels are TV device housing cases, splitter housing
cases, terminal boards, and protector panels.
9 Combined parts
Some of the parts which can be placed with Equipment/ Device Layout are combined parts.
Combined switches, residential data jacks, and linked layout symbols are combined parts.
A combined part is one in which individual symbols are combined to make a different symbol.
Combined parts are handled as follows in material counts:
- Combined switches, residential data jacks
Combined switches and residential data jacks are picked up as one part per combined part.
They are not separated and picked up individually.
In sheet output by circuit number or room name, output is based on attributes that all combined parts
have.
For combined switches, the circuit number assigned at the end is an attribute for the whole part. For
residential data jacks, the circuit number assigned to the receptacle portion is assigned to the whole
part.
Refer to Circuit Number command for details.
- Linked layout symbols
Linked layout symbols are symbols which enable symbols linked in Equipment/ Device Layout to be
handled as a single part.
Linked layout symbols do not pick up combined parts as one part, but pick up individual parts as one
part.
In sheet output by circuit number or room name, output is based on attributes that each combined
part has.
Equipment plates drawn with a linkage frame cannot be picked up.
10. Box auto-generation

Position boxes such as those for luminaires, receptacles, and switches, and other boxes and ceiling
switches that are not drawn in drawings, are automatically generated and picked up.
There are the following two conditions for automatically generating parts.
1. Box generation must be set to “Yes” in the part attributes.

(Normally the default for parts to pick up boxes is set to “Yes”).
2. Box auto-generation must be set to “Yes” in the List Output Type Selection dialog box.
Boxes to pick up, and ceiling switches, are set in masters.
The table below shows the parts that are generated for parts subject to pick-up.
(Combined switches and grouped switches are not in the table below).
Electrical-483
11. Box auto-generation for combined switches and grouped switches

Under the above system-provided master, boxes are not auto-generated for combined switches and
grouped switches.
Boxes are judged automatically, according to the number of combined switches, and the generated
boxes are picked up. The table below shows the relationship between the number of switches and
the boxes generated.
12. Picking up cable trays, raceways, and floor ducts

Cable trays, raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts, ventilation pipes, and floor ducts have the lengths of
their linear portions measured (unit = m) and picked up.
Branches in cable trays, bus ducts, metal ducts, and ventilation pipes, and boxes in raceways and
floor ducts, are picked up according to their number.
Length measurement takes the distance between the start point and end point, so measurement is
accurate even in drawings drawn vertical or inclined.
Electrical-484
13. Picking up sleeves and fire protection zones

Sleeves and fire protection zones are picked up with their quantities for each size or each installation
place (wall, beam, floor).
14. Handling odd quantities

Branches in equipment/device parts and cable trays, and boxes in raceways, bus ducts, metal ducts,
and floor ducts, are picked up according to their number, so their number of significant figures is
integer only.
The unit is the meter “m” for parts measured by length, such as cable trays, raceways, bus ducts,
metal ducts, ventilation pipes, and floor ducts. Their lengths are counted by rounding to 2SF, and
then to 1DP.
(This complies with the 2007 edition of the Building Construction Estimation Standards by the
Ministry of Construction).
15. Count files and drawings subject to material count

Drawings subject to material count are those drawn with Real.
DXF files and other Drawings imported from CAD systems are excluded.
Material count files created with Evolution and having the EPZ extension cannot be used.
Only the extensions EPU and EPR are covered.
16 Scales
Material count subjects are parts drawn at the standard scale, or at another scale the same as the
standard scale.
Different scales not matching the standard scale are not picked up.
17. Recommended paper sizes

The recommended paper sizes for sheet output are A4 landscape, A3 landscape, and B4 landscape.
Output is still possible on non-recommended paper sizes, but the character font sizes and number of
cells that can fit on one page cannot be guaranteed.
Electrical-485
Wiring pick-up concepts
Summary of wiring
(1) What are wires?
“Wire” is a general term for wiring groups and wiring elements.
A wiring group is a collection of wiring elements drawn by the Wiring command.
A wiring element is an individual wire or arc that is a component within a wiring group.
Wiring group A group combining ABC

Wiring element The individual elements ABC
(2) Wiring attributes

Wires have the attributes shown below.
Attributes can be checked with the Properties command.
Electrical-486
Wire length calculation method

What is wire length?
Wire length includes horizontal length and vertical length.
Wire lengths picked up by material count are calculated from the horizontal length and vertical
length by the following method:
(1) Horizontal length

Horizontal length includes horizontal element length and horizontal extra length.
Horizontal element length is the actual length of the wiring element as drawn in the plan view.
Horizontal extra length is the horizontal extra length retained as an attribute of the wiring
element.
The horizontal length of a wiring group is produced by the following formula.
Horizontal length = Total horizontal element length + total horizontal extra length
Example of calculating the horizontal length of a wire
In a situation as illustrated below, the horizontal length of a whole wiring group is calculated
as follows:
Horizontal length = Total horizontal element length + total horizontal extra length
= (element lengths A + B + C) + (horizontal extra lengths X + Y + Z)
Wiring portions that cannot be seen in drawings, because they have been hidden with the
Hidden Line command or omitted with the Elision Symbol command, are also calculated as
horizontal element lengths.
Electrical-487
(2) Vertical length

The calculation method for vertical length differs between wires and turned up/down symbols.
- Vertical lengths of wires

Vertical length includes vertical calculated length and vertical extra length.
Vertical calculated length is the wire length calculated from the ceiling height, floor height, and Z
coordinate that equipment/devices have in their attributes, and from the installation method of the
wiring connected to those equipment/devices. Therefore, it is not held as a wiring element
attribute.
Vertical extra length is the vertical extra length retained as an attribute of the wiring element.
The vertical length of a wiring group is produced by the following formula.
Vertical length = total vertical calculated length + total vertical extra length
Example of calculating the vertical length of a wire

In a situation as illustrated below, the vertical length of a whole wiring group is calculated as
follows:
Vertical length = total vertical calculated length + total vertical extra length
= (vertical calculated length V + W) + (vertical extra length L + M + N)
The calculation method for vertical calculated length is described below.

Vertical calculated length is calculated using the ceiling height and floor height that the
equipment/device has in its attributes, the Z coordinate of the equipment/device, and the installation
method of the wiring connected to the equipment/device.
The calculation method for vertical calculated length differs as shown below, according to the wiring
installation method.
The sectional drawing in the illustration is provided for explanatory purposes, but in Real Electrical,
equipment/devices and wires are not displayed.
Attributes of equipment/devices can be checked with the Properties command.
Electrical-488
- If the wiring installation method is in-ceiling, exposed, or cable tray
Total vertical calculated length = vertical calculated length (V) + vertical calculated length (W)
= |[floor height (K) - Z coordinate (D)]| + |[floor height (K) - Z coordinate (E)]|
(Illustration)
Electrical-489
- If the wiring installation method is ceiling void
= |[ceiling height (T) - Z coordinate (D)]| + |[ceiling height (T) - Z coordinate (E)]|
(Illustration)
Electrical-490
- If the wiring installation method is in-floor, exposed on floor, double floor, or trough/pit
= |[Z coordinate (D)]| + |[Z coordinate (E)]|
(Illustration)
Electrical-491
- If the wiring installation method is underground
Total vertical calculated length = vertical calculated length (V)

= |[Z coordinate (D)] - [Z coordinate (E)]|
(Illustration)
3. Method for determining wire and pipe part names

If wiring information is assigned and drawn, the material count is based on that wiring information. If
wiring information is not assigned, and the Wiring command is used for drawing, it is not possible to
judge at the material count stage what wiring part names and pipe part names to use for pick-up.
Therefore, one of the following processes must be performed to judge part names.
If wiring information, Wiring Note Table, or wire text is defined for the same wire,the Priority order is
wire text > Wiring Note Table > wiring information.
- Draw a Wiring Note Table.
- Draw wire text.
Electrical-492
- Wiring Note Tables

Wiring Note Tables are drawn with the Wiring Note Table command.
Refer to Wiring Note Table command for details.
At least one Wiring Note Table is required within a drawing. Even when multiple drawings are picked
up at the same time, the Wiring Note Table drawn within each one is used for picking up parts, so
one is still required for each drawing.
The items shown in the screen image below are set within the Wiring Note Table command.
This makes it possible to draw a Wiring Note Table as shown below.
For example, if the following wiring is drawn in the drawing, the equipment type, installation method,
and number of cable cores attribute in the note table are compared against the corresponding
attributes of the wires and, if they match, the defined wire text is counter by VVF1.6-3C.
Electrical-493
- Wiring Note Tables and wires
(1) and (2) below are specific examples of different situations in which wires drawn in a drawing are picked up.
(1) Example of drawing a Wiring Note Table which will be counted normally
(2) Example of drawing a Wiring Note Table which will not be counted normally
(1) Example of drawing a Wiring Note Table which will be counted normally
(Note table drawn on the drawing)
(*) The above note tables are both drawn with end cover symbols and protection pipe names, but even if those are not
drawn, the following note table has the same meaning, provided it has the protection pipe attribute. The Wiring Note Table
command is used to set whether or not to draw.
(Parts counted by the above note table)
If the protection pipe attribute is assigned to the note table, the wire lengths of the vertical parts are all picked up with
protection pipes attached.
Electrical-494

When draw settings are made with the Wiring Note Table command, the installation method for the protection pipe portion (the
red line portion above) cannot be selected. This is fixed as a solid line.
Therefore, the protection pipe portions of the wiring elements drawn in the drawing (the ends with open end cover symbols)
are always counter with protection pipes, regardless of the installation method.
In the example of the diagram below, the protection pipe portion of the note table has a solid line, but the drawn wiring
element is a dotted line, as an in-floor element.
Electrical-495
(*) This note table does not have the protection pipe attribute.

There is no protection pipe attribute in the note table.
In this case, the horizontal and vertical portions of wires are both counted with the note table text defined in the note table.
However, the condition for picking up with note table text is that there must not be any end cover symbols drawn in the
wiring groups.
If there are end cover symbols in the wiring group, they picked up as undefined wires.
Electrical-496
(2) Example of drawing a Wiring Note Table which will not be counted normally
If the wiring has end cover symbols, and no protection pipes are set in the note table
(*) This note table does not have the protection pipe attribute.

There is no protection pipe attribute in the note table.
In this case, when there are end cover symbols in the wiring group, they are picked up as undefined wires.
If there are end cover symbols in the wiring group, be sure to define the protection pipes in the note table.
Electrical-497
If both pipes and protection pipes are defined in the note table

If both pipes and protection pipes are set in the note table, they are picked up as undefined wires.
Electrical-498
If the note table definitions for the same wire within one drawing do not overlap

If the note table definitions for the same wire within one drawing do overlap, the wire is picked up as a duplicate definition
wire.
The following warning message is displayed when pick-up data is created.
- Definitions in the Wiring Note Table (***) overlap
Electrical-499
- Wire text
Wire text is drawn with the Wire Text command.
Refer to Wire Text command for details.
***********************************************************************
**** Wire text and wires ********************************************
***********************************************************************
(1) and (2) below are specific examples of different situations in which wires drawn in a drawing are picked up.
(1) Example of drawing wire text which will be counted normally
(2) Example of drawing wire text which will not be counted normally
(3) Other constraints
(1) Example of drawing wire text which will be counted normally
If there are no end cover symbols drawn on the wires
(Wire text drawn on the drawing)
(Parts counted by the above wire text)

All wires are picked up by their drawn wire text.
Electrical-500
If there are end cover symbols drawn on the wires: 1

The in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group with assigned wire text is picked up under the drawn wire text IV1.6(C19).
The wiring element group for the ceiling void (dash-dot line) the name of only the wire portion of wire text IV1.6(C19) is
acquired from the wire text attribute, and picked up under IV1.6.
Electrical-501

The wiring element group for the ceiling void to which the wire text is assigned (dash-dot line) the name of only the wire
portion of wire text IV1.6(C19) is acquired from the wire text attribute, and picked up under IV1.6.
The in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group is picked up under the name IV1.6(C19).
Electrical-502

The in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group with assigned wire text is picked up under the drawn wire text IV1.6(C19).
Furthermore, the in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group without assigned wire text is also picked up under IV1.6(C19).
acquired from the wire text attribute, and picked up under IV1.6.
Electrical-503
(2) Example of drawing wire text which will not be counted normally

Only the ceiling void (dash-dot line) wiring element group with assigned wire text is picked up under the drawn wire text
IV1.6.
The in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group is picked up under the name IV1.6 (undefined pipe), as an undefined pipe
portion.
- Can't identify pipe from wire.
Electrical-504

The wire text IV1.6 assigned to the in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group does not have a defined pipe. Therefore it is
picked up under the name IV1.6 (undefined pipe), as an undefined pipe portion.
The ceiling void (dash-dot line) wiring element group is picked up under IV1.6.
If the open end of the end cover symbol is assigned wire text, be sure to assign wire text with a defined pipe.
Electrical-505
(3) Other constraints
Pay attention to the following if multiple wire texts are assigned to the same wiring group.
As a general rule, wires are counted in duplicate for as many times as they have assigned wire text character count.
However, if multiple wire texts are assigned, and the [material count subject flag] within the wire text attributes is excluded from
the count, that wire text will not be picked up. The material count subject flag can be changed using the Properties command
and the Set Pick-up Subjects command.
[If multiple wire texts are assigned to one wiring element group.]

Picked twice under wire text IV1.6.
Electrical-506
If a wiring element group has no assigned wire text

It is picked up once each, under wire text IV1.6 and under wire text IV1.6(C19).
First, it is picked up as follows under wire text IV1.6.

The ceiling void (dash-dot line) wiring element group is picked up under IV1.6.
The pipes in the two wiring element groups of in-ceiling (solid line) wiring cannot be judged from wire text IV1.6 alone, so
they are picked up under IV1.6 (undefined pipe). (See the red text illustrated below).
First, it is picked up as follows under wire text IV1.6(C19).

The two in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element groups are picked up under IV1.6(C19).
acquired from the wire text attribute, and picked up in IV1.6. (See the green text illustrated below).
Electrical-507
If a wiring element group has assigned wire text

If all wiring element groups separated by end covers have their own wire text assigned, they are not picked up as
duplicates. Only the wiring element group with assigned wire text is picked up under its wire text.

First, it is picked up as follows under wire text IV1.6(C19) on the left side.
The in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group on the left side is picked up under IV1.6(C19).
(See the blue and red text illustrated below).
Next, it is picked up as follows under wire text IV1.6.

The ceiling void (dash-dot line) wiring element group in the exact center is picked up under IV1.6.
(See the green text illustrated below).
Finally, it is picked up as follows under wire text IV1.6(C19) on the right side.
The in-ceiling (solid line) wiring element group on the right side is picked up under IV1.6(C19).
(See the green text illustrated below).
Electrical-508
Up/down pick-up concepts
1. Summary of up/down elements (What is up/down)

Up/down elements is the collective term for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, element
serial symbol, and same floor symbol.
The calculation method for vertical length differs between turned up symbol, turned down
symbol, element serial symbol, and same floor symbol.
Therefore, they have the attribute “group type” to judge the type of symbol.
Turned up symbols and turned down symbols are automatically decided by the arrow lead angle
when drawn.
- Turned up symbol
If the arrow lead angle is in the range 0~180°, it is assigned the group type attribute for
a turned up symbol.
- Turned down symbol

If the arrow lead angle is in the range 180°~360°, it is assigned the group type attribute
for a turned down symbol.
(2) Up/down attributes

Up/down elements have the attributes shown in the table below.
Electrical-509
2. Wire length calculation method for up/down elements

(1) What is wire length?
Vertical length is the only wire length picked up from turned up/down symbols.
Up/down wire lengths picked up by material count calculate the vertical length by the following
method:
(2) Vertical length

Vertical length includes vertical calculated length and vertical extra length.
Vertical calculated length is the wire length calculated from the floor height and ceiling height
stored in the attributes of the turned up/down symbol, or from the equipment/device floor height,
ceiling height, and Z coordinate specified for the equipment/device when the turned up/down
symbol is drawn. Therefore, it is not held as a turned up/down symbol attribute.
Vertical extra length is the vertical extra length retained as an attribute of the turned up/down
symbol.
Example of calculating the vertical length of a turned up/down symbol

The vertical length of a turned up/down symbol is calculated as follows:
Vertical length = vertical calculated length (V) + total vertical extra length (L)
The calculation method for vertical calculated length is described below.

Calculation methods are classified into the following three methods.
(1) If wiring is connected to a turned up/down symbol.
(2) If no wiring is connected to a turned up/down symbol,

and if an equipment/device was specified when the turned up/down symbol was drawn.
(3) If no wiring is connected to a turned up/down symbol

and an equipment/device was not specified when the turned up/down symbol was
drawn.
This section explains (1)(2)(3) above.

The sectional drawing in the illustration is provided for explanatory purposes, but in
CADEWA_Real Electrical, equipment/devices, wires, and turned up/down symbols are not
displayed.
(1) If wiring is connected to a turned up/down symbol.
The floor height and ceiling height held in the attributes of the turned up/down symbol
are used in the calculation.
The calculation method differs according to the group type (turned up, turned down,
element serial, and same floor symbols are judged) and the installation method in the
attributes of the wiring element.
Electrical-510
(Illustration)
- [Turned up symbol]
[Wiring installation method: For in-ceiling, exposed, or cable tray]
Vertical calculated length (V) = 0 (zero)
[Wiring installation method: For ceiling void
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Floor height (K)] - [ceiling height (T)]
Electrical-511
[Wiring installation method: In the case of in-floor, underground, exposed on floor, trough/pit, or double floor]
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Floor height (K)]
For wiring installation methods that pass through the floor, the vertical calculated length of the turned up symbol is the
floor height.
- [Turned down symbol]

[Wiring installation method: For in-ceiling, exposed, or cable tray]

[Wiring installation method: For ceiling void
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Ceiling height (T)]
Electrical-512

[Wiring installation method: In the case of in-floor, underground, exposed on floor, trough/pit, or double floor]
For wiring installation methods that pass through the floor, the vertical calculated length of the turned down symbol is
the zero.
- [Element serial symbol]

[Wiring installation method: For all installation methods]
For all wiring installation methods, the vertical calculated length of the element serial symbol is the floor height.
Electrical-513
- [Same floor symbol]

[If there are two connected wires]
[Wiring installation method: In the case of combination between any one of in-ceiling, exposed, or cable tray, with any
one of in-floor, underground, exposed on floor, trough/pit, or double floor.

[Wiring installation method: In the case of combination between ceiling void and any in-floor, underground, exposed
on floor, trough/pit, or double floor.
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Ceiling height (T)]

[Wiring installation method: In the case of combination between ceiling void and any one of in-ceiling, exposed, or
cable tray
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Floor height (K)] - [ceiling height (T)]
Electrical-514

[Wiring installation method: In the case of combination between any one of in-ceiling, exposed, or cable tray, and any
one of in-ceiling, exposed, or cable tray

[Wiring installation method: In case of combination between ceiling void and ceiling void

[Wiring installation method: In the case of combination between any one of in-floor, underground, exposed on floor,
trough/pit, or double floor, and any one of in-floor, underground, exposed on floor, trough/pit, or double floor.
Electrical-515
(2) If a wire is not connected to a turned up/down symbol, and an equipment/device was
specified when the turned up/down symbol was drawn.
Use the floor height, ceiling height, and equipment/device Z coordinate in the
equipment/device attributes for the calculation.
element serial, and same floor are judged) in the attributes of the turned up/down
symbol.
(Illustration)
- [For a turned up symbol]
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Floor height (K)] - [Z coordinate (D)]
- [For a turned down symbol]
Vertical calculated length (V) = |[Z coordinate (D)]|
Electrical-516
- [For an element serial symbol]
- [For a same floor symbol]
(3) If a wire is not connected to a turned up/down symbol, and no equipment/device was
specified when the turned up/down symbol was drawn.
The floor height held in the attributes of the turned up/down symbol is used in the
calculation.
element serial, and same floor are judged) in the attributes of the turned up/down
symbol.
Electrical-517
(Illustration)
- [For a turned up symbol]
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Floor height (K)]/2
- [For a turned down symbol]
Vertical calculated length (V) = [Floor height (K)]/2
- [For an element serial symbol]
Electrical-518
- [For a same floor symbol]
3. Method for determining the wire and pipe part names of turned up/down symbols
If only the Up/Down command is used for drawing, it is not possible to judge at the material count
stage what wiring part names and pipe part names to use for pick-up.
Therefore, one of the following processes must be performed to judge part names.
- Draw wire text for a turned up/down symbol.
-Connect a wire to the turned up/down symbol and define wire text or note table for that wire.
If the above processes are performed at the same time, the wire text of the turned up/down symbol has the highest priority.
- Drawing wire text for a turned up/down symbol.

Wire text is drawn with the Wire Text command.
Refer to Wire Text command for details.
Wire text assigned to turned up/down symbols is picked up without change.
-Wires connected to turned up/down symbols

Even if wire text is not drawn directly on turned up/down symbols, if a wire connected to a
turned up/down symbol has wire text or a note table defined, that information can be used to
determine the part name.
The installation method for a turned up/down symbol can be set when the symbol is drawn.
The four usable installation methods are embedded and hidden, exposed, cable tray, and void,
and the count method differs with the installation method.
Electrical-519
************************************************************************
**** Wires and turned up/down symbols **************************
************************************************************************
(1) and (2) below are specific examples of different situations in which turned up/down symbols drawn in a drawing are picked up.
(1) Example of drawing a turned up/down symbol which will be counted normally
- If the group type is turned up symbol, turned down symbol, or element serial symbol
- If the group type is same floor symbol
(2) Example of drawing a turned up/down symbol which will not be counted normally
The group type for a drawn turned up/down symbol can be checked with the Properties command.
(1) Example of drawing a turned up/down symbol which will be counted normally
[Installation method for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, and element serial symbol: For all installation methods]
(Drawn plan view)
(Part name for counted turned up symbols, turned down symbols, and element serial symbols)
Regardless of the installation method for turned up symbols, turned down symbols, and element serial symbols,
they are picked up under the wire text drawn with them.
IV1.6(E19)
If multiple definitions have been applied at the same time, their Priority order is (1) -> (2) -> (3).
Therefore, in the case of the diagram below, turned up symbols, turned down symbols, and element serial symbols
are picked up under the wire text (1) drawn directly on them.
IV1.6(E19)
[Installation method for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, and element serial symbol: For embedded, hidden, or
exposed: 1]
(Drawn plan view)
Electrical-520
The installation method for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, and element serial symbol is embedded/
hidden or exposed, so it picks up parts including pipes.
VVF2.0-2C(C19)
exposed: 2]
(Drawn plan view)
(Part name for counted turned up/down symbols)

VVF2.0-2C(C19)
[Installation method for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, and element serial symbol: If embedded, hidden, or
exposed: 3]
(Drawn plan view)
VVF2.0-2C(C19)
[Installation method for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, and element serial symbol: If embedded, hidden, or
exposed: 4]
(Drawn plan view)
VVF2.0-2C(C19)
[Installation method for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, and element serial symbol: For cable trays and voids: 1]
(Drawn plan view)
Electrical-521
The installation method for turned up symbol, turned down symbol, and element serial symbol is cable tray or void,
so it picks up everything other than pipes.
In the diagram above, the wire text does not have a pipe attribute, so it is picked up with the unchanged wire text
attribute.
VVF2.0-2C
(Drawn plan view)
In the diagram above, the wire text has a pipe attribute, so it is picked up with (C19) removed.
VVF2.0-2C
(Drawn plan view)
VVF2.0-2C
(Drawn plan view)
In the diagram above, the note table text has a pipe attribute, so it is picked up with (C19) removed.
VVF2.0-2C
Electrical-522
[Installation method for turned up/down symbols: For cable trays and voids: 5]
(Drawn plan view)
In the diagram above, the note table text has a pipe attribute, so it is picked up with (C19) removed.
VVF2.0-2C
[Installation method for same floor symbol: For all installation methods]
(Drawn plan view)
(Part name for counted same floor symbol)

Regardless of the installation method for a same floor symbol, it is picked up under the wire text drawn on it.
IV1.6(E19)
If multiple definitions have been applied at the same time, their Priority order is (1) -> (2) -> (3).
Therefore, in the case of the diagram below, the same floor symbol is picked up under the wire text (1) drawn
directly on it.
IV1.6(E19)
[Installation method for same floor symbol: For embedded, hidden, or exposed: 1]
(Drawn plan view)
Electrical-523
(Part name for counted same floor)

The installation method for same floor symbol is embedded/ hidden or exposed, so it is picked up under the wire
text on the side which has pipe.
VVF2.0-2C(C25)
[Installation method for same floor symbol: For embedded, hidden, or exposed: 2]
(Drawn plan view)

The installation method for same floor symbol is embedded/ hidden or exposed, so it is to be picked up under the
wire text on the side which has pipe.
However, both of the wire text attributes have pipe, so there is no way to judge which of the wire texts to pick up
with.
Therefore, the vertical length of the same floor symbol is assigned as half to each part name and picked up.
VVF2.0-2C(C19)
VVF2.0-2C(C25)
[Installation method for same floor symbol: If embedded, hidden, or exposed: 3]
(Drawn plan view)
Or,

The installation method for same floor symbol is embedded/ hidden or exposed, so it is picked up under the wire
text on the side which has pipe.
The wiring element group for the ceiling void (dot-and-dash line) connected to the same floor symbol acquires the
name of only the wire portion of wire text VVF2.0-2C(C25) from the wire text attribute, so it is picked up under
VVF2.0-2C.
Therefore, the part name for the same floor symbol is picked up under VVF2.0-2C(C19), which is the same as the
wiring element group for in-floor (broken line) with pipe.
VVF2.0-2C(C19)
[Installation method for same floor symbol: If embedded, hidden, or exposed: 4]
(Drawn plan view)

Electrical-524

The installation method for same floor symbol is embedded/ hidden or exposed, so it is picked up under the note
table text on the side which has pipe.
VVF2.0-2C(C19)
[Installation method for same floor symbol: For cable trays and voids: 1]
(Drawn plan view)

The installation method for same floor symbol is cable tray or void, so it is picked up under the wire text on the side
which has no pipe.
VVF2.0-2C
(Drawn plan view)

The installation method for same floor symbol is cable tray or void, so it is to be picked up under the wire text
attribute on the side which has no pipe.
However, both of the wire text attributes has pipe, so there is no way to judge which of the wire text attributes to
pick up with.
Therefore, the vertical length of the same floor symbol is assigned as half to each part and picked up.
At this time the names of just the wire portions of both wire texts are acquired from the wire text attribute, and each
is picked up under VVF2.0-2C.
VVF2.0-2C
VVF2.0-2C
(Drawn plan view)
Electrical-525
The installation method for same floor symbol is cable tray or void, so it is to be picked up under the wire text
attribute on the side which has no pipe.
However, neither of the wire text attributes has pipe, so there is no way to judge which of the wire texts to pick up
with.
VVF2.0-2C
VVF2.0-2C
(Drawn plan view)
Or,

The installation method for same floor symbol is cable tray or void, so it is to be picked up under the wire text on
the side which has no pipe.
The wire portion in the ceiling void (dot-and-dash line) connected to the same floor symbol acquires the name of
only the wire portion of wire text VVF2.0-2C(C25) from the wire text attribute, so it is picked up under VVF2.0-2C.
Therefore, the part name for the same floor symbol is picked up under VVF2.0-2C, which is the same as the wiring
element group for ceiling void (dot-and-dash line) without pipe.
VVF2.0-2C
(Drawn plan view)

The installation method for same floor symbol is embedded/ hidden or exposed, so it is picked up under the note
table text attribute on the side which has no pipe.
VVF2.0-2C
(2) Example of drawing a turned up/down symbol which will not be counted normally
exposed: 1]
(Drawn plan view)
Electrical-526
hidden or exposed, so it will pick up parts including pipes.
However, in the diagram above, the wire text has no pipe attribute, so it is picked up as undefined pipe.
- There is a turned up/down symbol for which the pipe type can't be set
VVF2.0-2C (Pipe undefined)
exposed: 2]
(Drawn plan view)
hidden or exposed, so it will pick up parts including pipes.
However, in the diagram above, the note table text has no pipe attribute, so it is picked up as undefined pipe.
[Installation method for same floor symbol: For embedded, hidden, or exposed]
(Drawn plan view)

The installation method for same floor symbol is embedded/ hidden or exposed, so it is to be picked up under the
wire text attribute on the side which has pipe.
However, neither of the wire text attributes has pipe, so there is no way to judge which of the wire text attributes to
pick up with.
At this stage, the wire text has no pipe attribute, so it is picked up as undefined pipe.

However, if wire text is drawn directly for the same floor symbol, as follows, the area of the same floor symbol can
be used to perform material count normally, to pick up drawn wire text.
Electrical-527
[Installation method for same floor symbol: For all installation methods: 1]
(Drawn plan view)
Or,

Multiple wires are connected to the same floor symbol, so it is not possible to limit the part names for the pipe and
wire parts of the same floor symbol.
Also, if a same floor symbol has a connected wire in calculation of vertical length, the installation method of that
wire is used, but it is not possible to limit the two wires used to get the installation method, so the floor height in the
attributes of the same floor symbol is used as the vertical calculated length.
- Multiple wires are connected to the same floor symbol of the turned up/down symbol, so it is picked up as an
undefined same floor symbol.
Or,
(Drawn plan view)

Multiple wire texts are attached to the same wire that is connected to the floor symbol, so it is not possible to
confirm the part names for the pipe and wire parts of the same floor symbol.
Electrical-528
That is the case because it is not possible to judge what kind of combination, with the same floor symbol at the
boundary, there is between the wire texts attached to the two wires connected to the same floor symbol.
- Multiple wire texts are assigned to the wire connected to the same floor symbol of the turned up/down symbol,
so it is picked up as an undefined same floor symbol.
(Drawn plan view)

Multiple wire texts are attached to the same wire that is connected to the floor symbol, so it is not possible to
confirm the part names for the pipe and wire parts of the same floor symbol.
That is the case because it is not possible to judge what kind of combination, with the same floor symbol at the
boundary, there is between the wire texts attached to the two wires connected to the same floor symbol.
- Multiple wire texts are assigned to the wire connected to the same floor symbol of the turned up/down symbol,
so it is picked up as an undefined same floor symbol.
4. Installation method name for list output of wires and up/down elements
On material counting, the installation method names of wires and turned up/down symbols are output as
abbreviated names.
The table shows the names and their abbreviations. List output names can't be changed by the user.
Electrical-529
However, if protection pipe is set in the Wiring Note Table, the installation method name for the
vertical length portion at the output stage is changed as shown in the table below. The diagram
below presents an example.
Electrical-530
Usage Example
1. Usage example of new creation of a material count
(1) “Process Selection”

(1) Open the Process Selection dialog box.
Select Create Pick-Up Data and press the OK button.
If list output is selected, sheet output or CSV output can be
used.
(2) “Input Property Name/Person in

Charge/Remarks”
(2) Input property name, person in charge, remarks.
Input property name, person in charge, and remarks.
Press the OK button to advance without inputting anything.
(3) “Select Drawing File to Process”

(3) Select the drawing file to process.
Select drawing files that are subject to processing, and press
the Add button.
If a file is added in a different location, it is possible to count
only once with a drawing file in a different location.
(4) “Status of Picked-Up Data Creation

Process”
(4) The status of the pick-up data creation process.
This dialog box is displayed while pick-up data is being
created.
When the pick-up data creation process finishes, the Save
button is enabled, so press the Save button.
Electrical-531
(5) “Select File to Output”

(5) Select the output file.
Save the created pick-up data file using Save As.
Press the Save button to go back to (1) process selection.
(6) “List Output Type Selection”

(6) The list output type can be selected.
Set as follows:
Output style: EXCEL output
List type
Count method: Set equipment type
Item to output
Parts to output: Check equipment/devices, wires
Auto generate box: Yes
Press the OK button like this to automatically generate
boxes for each equipment type and output
equipment/devices and wires.
(7) “List Output Process Status”

(7) List output process status.
This dialog box is displayed during the list output process.
When the list output process finishes, the Output button is
enabled, so
press it.
Press the Output button to go back to (6) process
selection.
Electrical-532
Let’s use the handy function
Elec Extention Function
1 Detailed view
2 Calculate illuminance
3 Convert Electric Parts
Electric／Detailed view
Detailed view
Function Overview
Draw a detailed view.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electric] -> [Elec Extention Function (E)] -> [Detailed View (T)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Draw method selection

Select the draw method for detailed view, from [New] or [Add].
[1] New
Draw a new detailed view.
[2] Add
Add a previously drawn detailed view.
2. Set ceiling height

Specify the ceiling height.
The ceiling height set here is the spacing between the floor line and the ceiling line in the detailed
view.
3. Viewpoint direction
Select the viewpoint for frame selecting the area to enlarge on the plan view.
(Drawing example)
Electric-534
4. Draw object selection

Select draw elements to add to a previously drawn detailed view.
[1] Batch select
Use a frame to batch select elements to draw in the detailed view.
However, the elements that can be acquired are limited to those which were drawn by Real and
have building, electric, or HVAC/sanitary attributes assigned to them.
[2] Column
Select columns on the plan view that were not drawn with the Real Column command, if they
are to be drawn in the detailed view.
[3] Door/ window

Select doors and windows on the plan view that were not drawn with the Real Fixtures
command, if they are to be drawn in the detailed view.
- Longitudinal: Specify the longitudinal dimension.

- Mounting height: Specify mounting height.
- With casing: Check to draw casing.
- Get width by specifying 2 points
When changing types of fixture to draw, pick the fixture picture area in the upper Command
dialog box, and the fixture is displayed in the lower dialog box.
1. Fixture group selection:

Select the fixture group to draw.
2. Fixture selection:
Select the fixture to draw.
3. Illustration display:
The shape selected in [2. Fixture selection] is displayed.
4. Size settings:
Set fixture sizes.
At this stage, set the items with reference to [3. Illustration display].
[4] Beams
Select to draw beams in the detailed view.
Electric-535
- Beam configuration 1:
Specify beam configuration 1.
- Beam configuration 2:
Specify beam configuration 2.
- With longitudinal lines:

Check to draw longitudinal lines.
[5] Baseboard
Select to draw baseboards in the detailed view.
- Baseboard height:
Specify baseboard height.
[6] Square/Circle
Select to draw squares and circles in the detailed view.
- Shape:
Select the shape (square or circle) to draw.
- Longitudinal:
Set the longitudinal dimension.
- Mounting height:
Specify mounting height.
- Base point:
Select a base point.
- Acquire square width or circle diameter by specifying 2 points.

5. Detail settings button
Open the Advanced Settings dialog box to set advanced settings, such as ceiling and floor lines
and figure styles in detailed views.
Refer to “Description of the Advanced Settings dialog box” below
Electric-536
This dialog is displayed when the Detail button on the Command toolbar is pressed.
Refer to “5. The Advanced Settings Button” above
1. Ceiling and floor line settings

Set items related to the ceiling line and floor line.
A. Illustration of ceiling and floor lines

Display illustrations of ceiling and floor lines.
B. Ceiling/floor line [1] length settings

Set the lengths of the ceiling and floor line [1] (mm, on release of drawing).
C. Ceiling and floor line [1] figure style settings

Set ceiling and floor line [1] figure styles.
D. Ceiling and floor line [2] figure style settings

Set ceiling and floor line [2] figure styles.
E. ▽ symbol illustration
Display an illustration of the ▽ symbol.
F. ▽ symbol height setting

Set the ▽ symbol height (mm on release of drawing).
G. ▽ symbol figure style settings

Set the figure style for ▽ symbols.
H. Text string illustration

Display illustrations of text strings.
I. String [1] settings

Set text string [1].
J. String [2] settings

Electric-537
Set text string [2].
K. Ceiling height dimension draw settings

Set whether or not to draw ceiling height dimensions.
L. Text string text style settings

Set the text style for text strings.
2. Reference line settings

Set items related to axes.
[1] Reference line illustration

Display a drawn illustration of axes in detailed views.
[2] Reference line length settings

Set the ceiling and floor lines and the distance to the axis symbol (mm, on release of drawing).
[3] Symbol draw position settings

Select the draw position of the axis symbol (top, top/bottom, bottom).
Electric-538
3. Figure style
Set the figure style for each element.
[1] Figure style settings for equipment/devices
Set the figure style for equipment/devices.
However, if “Follow selected element” is checked, those items only are drawn in the detailed
view, in the same style as the selected element.
[2] Column figure style settings

Set the figure style for columns.
view in the same style as the selected element.
[3] Wall figure style settings

Set the figure style for walls.
[4] Door/ window figure style settings

Set the figure styles for doors and windows.
[5] Beam figure style settings

Set the figure style for beams.
[6] Baseboard figure style settings

Set the figure style for baseboards.
[7] Square and circle figure style settings

Set figure styles for squares and circles.
Electric-539
Description of the Draw Settings dialog box
Use the Draw Settings dialog box to make settings for drawing dimensions etc. for elements drawn
in detailed views.
This dialog box is displayed when a frame is used to batch select elements to draw in the detailed
view.
However, it is not displayed if there are no elements in the frame with Real facility attributes
assigned, and elements to make draw settings for could not be acquired.
For HVAC/SAN elements settings can only be made for subject items and mounting height items.
1. Subjects
Set whether or not to draw to the detailed view.
Draw elements for which the check box is checked in the detailed view.
2. Invert
Batch invert which items are subject to drawing in the detailed view.
3. Part names
Display the part names of selected elements.
4. Display method for same parts

Check the check box to display all same parts together and draw them all with the same settings.
Content that is the same includes items that are settable in the previously mentioned Draw Settings
dialog box, and setting items for which the Detail button is enabled.
(Conditions for identical parts)
- Electric elements: If part code, attribute code, shape code, part name, and Drawing Symbol are
the same.
- Building elements: If part codes are the same.
- HVAC/sanitary elements If part code, attribute code, shape code, and part name are the same.
The dimensions of HVAC/sanitary symbols are not changed, other than mounting height.
5.Symbol
Display the Drawing Symbol if the selected element has been assigned a Drawing Symbol attribute.
However, the display is limited to symbols for electrical facilities.
6. Shape
Select shapes to draw in detailed views.
- Square: Draw in a square on the detailed view.
Specify dimensions in “7. Longitudinal” and “8. Lateral”, as below.
- Circle: Draw in a circle on the detailed view.
Specify dimensions in “9. Diameter”, as below.
Electric-540
7. Vertical (mm)
Specify the longitudinal dimension of squares to draw in detailed views.
For electrical elements and building elements, the following values are set automatically.
For HVAC/ sanitary elements, nothing is displayed.
- For an electric element
For a standard symbol, the system automatically sets general values.
Variable symbols are set from the attributes of specified dimensions when the equipment/device
is placed. Whatever the layout angle of the symbol relative to the viewpoint, set the value as
seen from the front.
Refer to “1. Draw subjects when making frame selections” under “Precautions” below about
angles relative to the viewpoint.
- For building elements:
The dimensions that were specified when building parts were laid out are acquired from
attributes and set.
8. Height (mm)
Specify the lateral dimension of squares to draw in detailed views.
For electrical elements, the following values are set automatically:
For building elements and HVAC/ sanitary elements, nothing is displayed.
is placed. Whatever the layout angle of the symbol relative to the viewpoint, set the value as seen
from the front.
9. Diameter (mm)
Specify the diameter of circles to draw in detailed views.
For electrical elements, the following values are set automatically.
For building elements and HVAC/ sanitary elements, nothing is displayed.
is placed. Whatever the layout angle of the symbol relative to the viewpoint, set the value as seen
from the front.
10. Mount height (mm)

Specify the mounting height (elevation).
Mounting heights (elevations) are acquired from selected element attributes and set automatically.
For mounting heights, set all floors to the standard value 0.
11. Mark
Select a base point.
There are three types of base point: Top, center, and bottom.
Display the illustration when drawing detailed views as in the figures below.
Electric-541
12. Details Set details.

The Details button is only enabled for elements which have setting items other than 7.~9.
The Advanced Settings dialog box for a door is shown below as an example.
Context explanation
1. Context menu The displayed content of the context menu is explained.

The base angle set here means the rotation angle of the frame when making a frame selection.
[1] Specify the standard line to acquire the angle.

[2] Specify the angle by manual input.
[3] Initialize the base angle to 0 degrees.
Electric-542
Precautions
1. Draw subjects when using frame selection

When selecting all elements to acquire as draw subjects, when selecting with a frame.
There are many references in the explanations that follow to angles relative to the viewpoint, and that
approach is based on the diagram below.
[1] For building elements

- Column: It varies with the type of column.
- Square column: Columns drawn at 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees to the viewpoint are subject.
The figure below shows examples of processes with different viewpoint
relative to the column.
- Circular column: Not subject in any case, regardless of the viewpoint.
- Fixture: Fixtures (doors and windows, etc.) drawn at 0 or 180 degrees to viewpoint are subject.
The figure below shows examples of processes with different viewpoint relative
to the door.
- Axis: Axes drawn at 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees to the viewpoint are subject.
- Finishing line: These are groups of columns or walls, so when a column or wall is selected, the
line is acquired at the same time. However, the Draw Settings dialog box
mentioned above is not displayed.
- Casing: These are groups of doors or windows, so when a door or window is selected, the
casing is acquired at the same time. However, the Draw Settings dialog box
mentioned above is not displayed.
- Wall: It varies with the type of wall. However, arc walls are not subject.
Electric-543
- Outside wall: Walls drawn at 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees to the viewpoint direction are
subject.
If an outside wall is drawn at 0 or 180 degrees, the wall is not drawn at all
in the detailed view unless an end point of the wall is included within the
selection frame.
- Partition wall: Walls drawn at 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees to the line of sight direction are
subject.
- Smoke barrier: Walls drawn at 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees to the line of sight direction are
subject.
The figure below illustrates how walls drawn at 0 or 180 degrees to the viewpoint are drawn
in a detailed view. The hatching is included for the purpose of this explanation and is not
drawn in the actual detailed view.
In the example in which no end point of the wall is included within the selection frame,
nothing is drawn for an outside wall, but the top edge of the wall in the case of a partition, or
the bottom edge of the wall in the case of a smoke barrier, is drawn as a line in the detailed
view.
[2] For an electric element

Elements which satisfy all of the following conditions are subject.
Cable trays, raceways, and floor ducts are not subject.
User-registered symbols registered by the user are set with the default value of 100 for
longitudinal, lateral and radial dimensions, so input real dimensions to replace those figures.
- Conditions for draw subjects in new drawing

1. Symbols drawn with the Equipment/Device command
2. Symbols drawn at 180 degrees to the viewpoint.
However, the following symbols are subject at all angles.
Dimmers, attenuators, and automatically-closed devices
The figure below shows examples of processes with different viewpoints relative to
receptacles.
Electric-544
- Conditions for draw subjects in added drawings

If the symbols were drawn with the Equipment/Device command, all are subject, regardless
of the angle to the viewpoint.
The figure below shows examples of processes with different viewpoints relative to
receptacles.
[3] For HVAC/sanitary elements

- Conditions for draw subjects in new and added drawings
1. Symbols drawn with the Equipment/Device command (other than stem symbols)
2. Symbols drawn at 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees to the viewpoint.
2. Results when viewing devices from the side

The Detailed View command considers the images of wall-mounted devices seen from the front on the
basis of their enlargement to detailed views.
Therefore, if the viewpoint is set so as to see the device from the side, the drawing result may not be
what the user expects.
Also, the longitudinal and lateral dimensions drawn in detailed views are automatically set with default
dimensions based on the front view, even if the device is seen from the side.
The figure below shows examples of drawing electric part devices in detailed views from various
viewpoints.
The enlargement is based on the layout point O, so the detailed view seen from the side makes the
device appear embedded in the wall.
Electric-545
3. Fixture mounting height errors When the basic move or copy commands are used to perform processes that change the
height (elevation) of building element fixtures in sections other than plan (front, back, left, or right
elevations), their attribute information will not be updated correctly, so it will not be possible to acquire
mounting heights correctly using frame selection with the Detailed View command.
Use the Edit Building Parts command for processes that change heights (elevations).
4. Frames for fixtures If the mounting height of a fixture is 0, it is automatically processed to make sure its casing is not drawn
lower than the floor line.
Usage example
1. Operation example of batch drawing of detailed views from plan views drawn by Real.
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
(1) “Enlargement range selection”

[1] Use a frame to select the range to enlarge.
Specify frame start point [1].
Specify frame end point [2].
(2) “Draw settings” [2] The Draw Settings dialog box is displayed.
Make draw settings.
Make settings for the dimensions of equipment/devices and
fixtures drawn in detailed views.
Click the [OK] button [3] to leave settings unchanged.
Electric-546

[3] Specify the position to draw the detailed view.
Specify the position [4] to draw the detailed view.
(4) “Addition confirmation message”

[4] Are there any elements to add to the detailed view?
If there are no elements to add to the detailed view, click the
[No] button.
2. Operation example of drawing of a detailed view from plan views not drawn by Real (DXF import data, etc.)
Command toolbar
(1) “Enlargement range selection”

[1] Use a frame to select the range to enlarge.
If none of the selected elements were drawn with
Real (DXF import data, etc.), the Draw Settings
dialog box described in the previous operation
example 1 will not be displayed.

[2] Specify the position to draw the detailed view.
Specify the position [3] to draw the detailed view.
At this stage, only the ceiling line and floor line are
drawn.
(3) “Addition confirmation message”

[3] Are there any elements to add to the detailed
view?
Click the [Yes] button [4] if there are any elements
to add to the detailed view.
(4) “Draw element settings: Column”

[4] Set elements to add.
Use the draw element [5] item on the Command
toolbar to set elements to add to a previously
drawn detailed view.
Drawing will start from columns, so set “Columns”.
Electric-547
(5) “Column position specification”

[5] Specify column position in the plan view.
Specify column positions [6][7] in the plan view.
(6) “Column drawing”
[6] Draw a column.

The column is drawn in the previously drawn
detailed view.
(7) “Draw element settings: Door/ window”

[7] Set the elements to add.
Use the draw element [8] item on the Command
toolbar to set elements to add to a previously
drawn detailed view.
Drawing will start from doors and windows, so set

“Door/ window”.
(8) “Fixture settings”
[8] Set types and dimensions for fixtures to draw.
Specify the illustration [9].
When that is done, Fixture Shape Selection dialog
box is displayed.
Select the fixture group [10] to draw.

This time, select all the doors group.
Select the type of fixture [11] to draw.

This time, select a single-swinging door.
Set longitudinal, mounting height, and casing items

[12].
Press the [OK] button [13].
Electric-548
(9) “Door position (width) specification_1”

[9] Get fixture width by specifying 2 points.
Specify the 1st point on plan view.
Specify the door position [14] in the plan view.
At this stage, do not including the casing part in the width of
the door.
Also, specify the fixed side of the door with the first point.
(10) “Door position (width) specification_2”

[10] Get fixture width by specifying 2 points
Specify the 2nd point on plan view.
Specify the door position [15] in the plan view.
At this stage, do not including the casing part in the width of
the door.
Also, specify the opening side of the door with the second
point.
(11) “Door drawing”

[11] Draw a door.
The door is drawn in the previously drawn detailed view.
3. Operation example of adding receptacles drawn in Real to previously drawn detailed views
Command toolbar
Command dialog box
Electric-549
( “Detailed view specification”

1
)
[1] Set ceiling line or floor line for the detailed view to add.
Specify the ceiling line for the detailed view to add.
( “Positional relationship check between the

2 detailed view and the plan view”
)
[2] Is this position OK for the plan view associated with the
detailed view?
The enlargement range is temporarily shown by two red lines
on the plan view.
Use the Y key or the left mouse button to specify if correct.
The N key or the right mouse button can be used to align
positions.
( “Select element to add”

3
)
[3] Frame select elements to add to the previously drawn
detailed view.
Surround the receptacle with a frame.
( “Draw settings”
4
)
[4] The Draw Settings dialog box is displayed.
Make draw settings.
Make settings for the dimensions of receptacles drawn in
detailed views.
Click the [OK] button [4] to leave settings unchanged.
( “Draw”
5
)
[5] Draw a receptacle in the detailed view.
Draw a receptacle in the detailed view and go back to (1).
Electric-550
Electric／Calculate illuminance
Calculate illuminance
Function Overview
Calculate illuminance and the necessary number of lamps, and output the calculation sheet.
1. Pull-down menu
Click [Electric (Q)] -> [Elec Extention Function (E)] -> [Calculate Illuminance (S)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
Description of the Process Selection dialog box
1. Process selection
Select the process.
[1] Create illuminance calculation data
- Create illuminance calculation data.
[2] Correct illuminance calculation data

- Correct the illuminance calculation data.
[3] Output Illuminance calculation sheet

- Output the illuminance calculation sheet.
Create the illuminance calculation sheet and save it as a ZDX (drawing) file.
Alternatively, convert it to a CSV file for output.
Electric-551
1. New file creation

Existing file selection select the process in the Process Selection dialog box, the click on [OK] to
open the File Selection dialog box.
- Illuminance calculation files can be newly created, or existing files can be selected.
- The same dialog box can be used to save files.
- The file format for saving illuminance calculation data is LXT.
- When [Output illuminance calculation sheet] is selected, only existing files can be selected,
and new files cannot be created.
- Illuminance calculation sheet data for up to 999 rooms can be stored under one file name (one
property).
Electric-552
Description of the Illuminance Calculation dialog box
1. illuminance calculation data

This screen can be used to run simulations of necessary numbers of units, by modifying data.
Click the Add button for new input.
[1] Property name

- Input the property name.
[2] Name of person in charge
- Input the name of the person in charge.
[3] Floor number input
- Modify the number of floors.
[4] Input room names
- Modify room names.
[5] Input luminaire types
- Input luminaire types and modify names.
[6] Input lamp luminous flux
- Luminous flux per lamp can be modified and acquired from symbol attributes.
[7] Lamp number input
- The number of lamps can be modified and acquired from symbol attributes.
[8] Necessary illuminance input
- Modify the necessary illuminance.
[9] Mounting height input
- Modify mounting height.
[10] Work plane height.
- Modify work plane height.
[11] Equipment down length input
- Modify down length of equipment.
[12] Coefficient of utilization input
- The coefficient of utilization can be modified and acquired from the coefficient of utilization
master.
[13] Maintenance factor input
- The maintenance factor can be modified and acquired from symbol attributes.
[14] Necessary number of units display
- Display the necessary number of units produced by the illuminance calculation.
(Round to 3 decimal places)
[15] Design illuminance display
- Display the design illuminance calculated from the design number of units.
(Round to 1 decimal place)
[16] Design number of units input
Electric-553
- Modify the design number of units and display the layout number of units found from the
necessary number of units.
2. Data edit
[1]Add button
- Add button: The Data Input dialog box opens for data input.
Refer to the description of the Data Input dialog box
- Newly added data is entered immediately below the selected line.
[2]Copy (same room) button
- Specify data from the data list, and the Copy (same room) button Data Input dialog box opens,
displaying existing information.
Refer to the description of the Data Entry dialog box
- Displayed data can be partially modified and copied (additional registration).
- Even if data is modified, the room is judged to be the same if all room information is the same,
and the illuminances calculated for each individual luminaire name are totaled together.
Room info: Floor number, room name, frontage, depth, ceiling height，work plane height,
ceiling reflectance, wall reflectance, floor reflectance
If two or more luminaire types exist in the same room
[3]Modify button
- Specify data from the data list, and the Modify button Data Input dialog box opens, so that
existing information can be modified.
Refer to the description of the Data Entry dialog box
[4]elete button
- Specify data from the data list, and the Delete button can be used to delete data.
[5] button
- Specify data from the data list, and the [↑] button can be used to move data upward.
[6] Button
- Specify data from the data list, and the [↓] button can be used to move data downward.
3. Luminaire selection [1] Equipment Select button

- When one entire line edited for data is selected, the Equipment Select button
Equipment/device Selection dialog box opens and can be used to select luminaires.
Refer to The Equipment/Device command - Equipment/device Selection dialog box
4. Luminaire layout [1] Layout button

- When one entire line edited for data is selected, the Layout button Equipment/Device
command - multiple - ratio can be used to lay out the layout number of luminaires.
Refer to the Equipment/Device command - multiple - ratio Command toolbar
5. Reflectance at adding data

[1] Ceiling
- If illuminance calculation data is added using the Batch Add Room Info in Drawing button and
the Add button, input the values to set under Room information: Ceiling reflectance.
[2] Wall
the Add button, input the values to set under Room information: Wall reflectance.
[3] Floor
the Add button, input the values to set under Room information: Floor reflectance.
6. Reflect the necessary number of units in the design number of units

- Round up the necessary number of units, as calculated from the necessary illuminance, to a
whole number and reflect the result in the design number of units.
- Do not reflect the necessary number of units, as calculated from the necessary illuminance, in
the design number of units.
7. Save as [1] The Save As button

- The file name can be changed to save under a different one.
Refer to the description of the File Selection dialog box
Electric-554
Description of the Data Input dialog box
List of dialog box titles, according to startup status
1. Room data input

[1] Floor number input
- Input the number of floors, or select from the list.
[2] Room name input
- Input the room name, or select from the list.
[3] Frontage input
- Input the frontage length.
[4] Depth input
- Input the depth length.
[5] Measurement button
- The frontage depth length can be measured from the drawing.
[6] Area display
- Display the calculation result for frontage x depth.
[7] Ceiling height input
- Input the height of the ceiling.
[8] Work plane height input
- Input the work plane height.
[9] Equipment down length input
- Input the down length of the equipment.
[10]Light source height display
- Display the calculation result for ceiling height - (work plane height + equipment down length)
[11]Room index display
- Display the results calculated from frontage, depth, and ceiling height information.
Refer to Appendix/ Calculation formulae and values (electrical/ HVAC/sanitary) for
illuminance calculation for the calculation method.
[12] Room index symbol display
- Display the room index symbol.
[13]Ceiling reflectance selection
- Select or input ceiling reflectance.
[14] Wall reflectance selection
- Select or input wall reflectance.
[15] Floor reflectance selection
Electric-555
- Select or input floor reflectance.

2. Luminaire data input [1] Luminaire name input
- Input luminaire names.
[2] Luminaire Selection button
- [Select] button: The Equipment/device Selection dialog box opens and can be used to select
luminaires.
Refer to The Equipment/Device command - Equipment/device Selection dialog box
[3] Luminaire Specification button
- Specification button: Specify symbols from the drawing to acquire attributes.
- Only one symbol can be specified, and the number of units cannot be acquired.
[4] Lamp number input
- Acquire the number of lamps from the attributes of the selected luminaire.
- Hide if there is no attribute.
- Changes can also be made manually.
[4] Lamp luminous flux input
- Acquire the lamp luminous flux from the attributes of the selected luminaire.
[6] Total luminous flux display
- The result of the calculation of luminous flux per lamp x number of lamps is displayed.
[7] Maintenance factor input
- Acquire the maintenance factor from the attributes of the selected luminaire.
[8] Coefficient of utilization input
- Acquire the coefficient of utilization from the coefficient of utilization master, based on the
selected luminaire, reflectance, and room index.
[9] Number of units input
- Input the number of units to actually lay out on the drawing. - Display the number of units
produced from the layout number of units.
- When the number of units is changed, the illuminance display result also changes.
- The necessary illuminance and necessary number of units do not change.
[10] Illuminance display
- Display the illuminance calculated from the number of units to actually lay out on the drawing.
[11] Necessary illuminance input
- Input the necessary illuminance.
- If the necessary illuminance has been changed, the necessary number of units, number of
units, and illuminance are recalculated and displayed.
[12] Necessary Illuminance Refer button
[6] Refer button: Display the Illuminance Data dialog box.
- The necessary illuminance value for each building function is available for reference.
This is only display of reference data.
- The necessary illuminance can be input.
[13] Necessary number of units display

- The number of units calculated from necessary illuminance is displayed without modification.
(Round to 3 decimal places)
Electric-556
Description of the Create Illuminance Calculation Sheet dialog box
1.Output format selection

At the illuminance calculation sheet output stage, inputting an existing file in the File Selection
dialog box opens the Create Illuminance Calculation Sheet dialog box.
- Creating illuminance calculation data creates an LXT file, which is the basis for illuminance
calculation sheet output.
[1] Create illuminance calculation sheet
- The illuminance calculation sheet is created as a ZDX file (drawing).
- Output file name: (input file name)(page No.). ZDX
- Usage method: [File (F)] - [Open (O)] command
[2] CSV output
- Create the illuminance calculation sheet as a CSV file.
[3] Constraints on layout number of units
- When laying out luminaires using the Layout button, the layout cannot be processed if the
layout number of units exceeds 30 units across and 30 units along.
2. File name and property information check

[1] File name
- The selected file name is displayed.
[2] Property name
- Display the property name.
[3] Name of person in charge
- Display the name of the person in charge.
[4] No. of data
- Display the number of data points.
Precautions
1. Data Input dialog box

[1] Luminaire data input.
- If a luminaire is selected for which there is data in the default value data file from input of the
number of lamps, lamp luminous flux, total luminous flux, maintenance factor, and
coefficient of utilization, those default values are displayed.
[2] Recalculate
- The illuminance calculation is recalculated when the input data is changed. However,
reflection of the change in the design number of units follows the [Reflect necessary number
of units in design number of units] check on the Data Input screen.
- Recalculation is not performed in the following cases:
- When coefficient of utilization was input manually. (When values other than 80/70/50 for
ceiling reflectance, 70/50/30 for wall reflectance, and 30/10 for floor reflectance were input).
- When the name of the luminaire type was input manually, rather than being set from a
selection or specification button.
(Even if the luminaire is set from a specification button, it may be impossible to acquire
the coefficient of utilization in some cases).
[3] Constraints on layout number of units
- When laying out luminaires using the Layout button, the layout cannot be processed if the
layout number of units exceeds 30 units across and 30 units along.
Electric-557
2. Process flow [1] [Illuminance Calculation Output] process flow
[2] [Create illuminance calculation data] process flow
Unless stated otherwise, canceling reverts to the previous process.
Electric-558
Usage example
1. Operation example of new illuminance calculation data creation
(1) “Illuminance calculation data creation”

[1] [2] Select the [Create illuminance calculation data] process
Select the [Create illuminance calculation data] process and
click on the OK button.
(2) “Data input”
[2] Input new data.

Press the Add button in the Illuminance Calculation dialog
box to open the Data Input dialog box and input data.
(3) [3] Input all items, then press OK to add to the Illuminance
Calculation dialog box.
(4)
[4] Save the data
Press the Save As button to save from the dialog box
illustrated below.
Electric-559
(5) “Illuminance calculation sheet output”
[5] Select the format to output the file name for the
illuminance calculation sheet into, and output it.
(6) “Illuminance calculation sheet output”
[6] Save the data

Press the Save As button to save from the dialog box
illustrated below.
Electric-560
Electric／Convert Electric Parts
Convert Electric Parts

Function Overview
Convert general-purpose element (lines, circles, etc.) to electric parts called equipment/devices.
1. Pull-down menu
Click on [Electric (Q)] -> [Elec Extention Function (E)] -> [Convert Electric Parts (S)].
2. Icon menu
Click on .
1. Saving setting values Specify the method for saving setting values.
2. Command selection Select related commands.
3. Process selection
Select the process.
- Conversion to equipment/device (independent)
Select the subject elements, and draw one equipment/device based on the minimum
rectangle calculated from the selected subject element.
- Conversion to equipment/device (batch)
Select the subject elements, categorize the selected subject elements as a same-shape
group, then batch draw equipment/devices based on the minimum rectangle calculated for
each subject element.
When converting to equipment/devices, the draw style can be set in the Part Style Settings dialog
box that is displayed by clicking on the Style button.
- Conversion to wires (independent)

Detect the subject elements by a trace and draw the wires for one route.
- Conversion to wires (batch)
Select subject elements and draw the wires in multiple routes.
When converting to wires, the draw style can be set in the Installation Method Style Settings dialog
box that is displayed by clicking on the Style button.
The following conversions are performed at the same time as conversion to wires.
(Conversion to Number of Cable Cores)
Detect subject elements drawn on the wire within a rectangular selection frame, and draw one
Number of Cable Core.
It is drawn in the style set for the Number of Cable Core command.
(Conversion to hidden line symbols)
Electric-561
Draw hidden line symbols with subject elements adjoining both ends of the hidden line part of the
wire.
When converting to hidden line symbols, the lines are drawn in the style set for the Hidden Line
command.
(Conversion to End Covers)

Draw End Covers with the subject elements detected at the connection points with wire component
elements.
When converting to End Covers, the covers are drawn in the style set for the End Cover command.
(Conversion to Elision Symbols)

Detect subject elements drawn on the wire within a rectangular selection frame, and draw one
Elision Symbol
It is drawn in the style set for the Elision Symbol command.
4. Delete
Check to delete the elements which preceded conversion once the conversion is complete.
However, polylines and splines are not deleted.
5. Details
Make advanced settings for wire conversion.
“3. Process Selection” on the Command toolbar is displayed in case of independent conversion to equipment or batch conversion
to equipment.
Set equipment/devices after conversion.
1. Part name display Select the attributes of equipment/devices to lay out.

Same parts with different attributes can be selected.
2. Part shape display Display the shapes of equipment/devices to lay out.
Electric-562
Layout points for equipment/devices are displayed in yellow.
3. Layout point positions Taking the minimum rectangle calculated from the element subject to conversion as the reference,
specify which minimum rectangle to lay out the Equipment/Device point on. When this check is
changed, the angle input value is automatically updated. Left center: 270, right center: 90, top
center: 180, others than the above: 0
4. Equipment/device selection Select the parts to lay out.

(Refer to the Equipment/Device command for details).
5.Layout parts specification Specify laid out equipment/devices, and place the same part as the specified symbol.
This command cannot be used.
6. Layout part search Search in the drawing for placed equipment/devices, and display them in a list.
7. Placement history Display a list of previously placed equipment/devices.

8. Dimension setting If the selected equipment/device is a variable symbol, its dimensions can be specified and it can
be laid out.
9. Angle input Set the layout angle in the range -359~359.
10. Angle setting Set the method for determining the layout angle.
- Longest line priority: Determine the layout angle, prioritizing the angle of the longest line in the
element subject to conversion. If the element subject to conversion does not
include any lines, the input value is used.
- Shortest line priority: Determine the layout angle, prioritizing the angle of the shortest line in the
element subject to conversion. If the element subject to conversion does not
include any lines, the input value is used.
- Input value priority: The input value becomes the layout angle.
11. Scale factor input Set the Equipment/Device scale factor in the range 0.01~99.99.
12. Height settings Select whether or not to lay out, while specifying floor height, ceiling height, mounting height, and
mounting location.
13. Wire connection Check to connect equipment/devices after conversion to adjoining wires.
14. Auto-selection-complete Check to transition immediately to a finished (selection complete) state after selecting
conversion elements.
Electric-563
1. Line type conversion list

When independent or batch converting to wiring, display the converted (right) installation method,
draw color, draw line type, and draw line width corresponding to the line type before conversion
(left).
Select one line and double click, or click on the Style Change button under “2. Selected items” to
display the Style Settings for One-Line Selection dialog box.
Select multiple lines and click on the Style Change button under “2. Selected items” to display the
Style Settings for Multiple-Line Selection dialog box.
2. Style change
Set the installation method, draw color, draw line type, and draw line width corresponding to the
selected line type.
Layout points for equipment/devices are displayed in yellow.
3. Minimum length
Set the minimum element length (mm) to start the trace process to convert wire component
elements when batch converting to wires.
Independent conversion to wires, targeting elements selected for batch conversion, is processed as
a batch.
4. Stop length
Set the minimum length (mm) for continuing the trace process to convert wire component elements
when independent or batch converting to wires.
5.Number of cable core text length

Set the length (mm) of one side of the offset square in order to select the text box from the layout
point of the Number of Cable Core that was converted to a Number of Cable Core by independent
or batch wire conversion.
6. Number of Cable core length

When independent or batch converting to wires, set the maximum length (mm) for converting
subject elements on the converted wire to Number of Cable Cores.
Electric-564
7. Hidden line symbol length

subject elements adjoining both ends of the hidden line of the converted wire to hidden line symbols.
8. End length
subject elements on the ends of wire component elements to End Covers.
9.Symbol length
subject elements adjoining both ends of the converted wire to Elision Symbols.
10. Hidden line adjustment

Specify the spacing (mm) between lines to convert to hidden lines, in the range 0.1~9999.9.
11. Cable bundle text conversion settings

Set the text conditions for text strings to convert to cable bundle text when independent or batch
converting to wires.
- No cable bundle text Do not convert to cable bundle text.
- Only numerals and symbols Text will only be converted to cable bundle text if it includes 2-byte
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
‘ ‘ (space), +, -, *, /, ., (, ).
- Only alphanumeric and symbols Text will be converted to cable bundle text if it includes only
the above symbols and all 1-byte upper and lower case characters a~z.
- Not subject if hiragana and katakana phonetic characters are included Text including such
characters will not be converted to cable bundle text.
- All cable bundle text Convert all subject text strings to cable bundle text.
Precautions
1. Subject parts
The elements subject to conversion by the processes under this command are as follows:
[1] For conversion to equipment/devices (independent)
Points, lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, ellipse arcs, characters, general-purpose groups
[2] For conversion to equipment/devices (batch)
Circular, general-purpose group
[3] For conversion to wires (independent)
Lines (including polylines and splines), arcs, ellipse arcs
[4] For conversion to wires (batch)
Lines (including polylines and splines), arcs, ellipse arcs
[5] For conversion to Number of Cable Cores (independent)
Line, arc, text
[6]For conversion to Number of Cable Cores (batch)
Line, arc, text
[7] For conversion to hidden line symbols
Line
[8] For conversion to End Covers
Line, arc, ellipse arc
[9] For conversion to Elision Symbols
Drawn in the same layers as wiring.
2. Draw layers
The draw layer differs between conversion to equipment/devices (independent) and conversion to
equipment/devices (batch).
[1] For conversion to equipment/devices (independent)
Draw in the layer displayed in the Layers toolbar (the current layer).
[2] For conversion to equipment/devices (batch)
Draw in the layer displayed in the Layers toolbar (the current layer).
[3] For conversion to wiring (independent)
Drawn in the same layer as the element subject to conversion.
[4] For conversion to wiring (batch)
Drawn in the same layers as the converted elements.
[5] For conversion to Number of Cable Cores (individual)
[6]For conversion to Number of Cable Cores (batch)
[7] For conversion to hidden line symbols
Electric-565

For conversion to End Covers
[9] For conversion to Elision Symbols
3. Additional processing of conversion to wires (independent)

The following processes are carried out immediately after conversion to wires:
- Conversion to hidden line symbols at both ends of hidden lines.

- End Covering is performed, taking the specification points of the selection rectangle as the line
type change points.
4. Processing of conversion to wires (batch)

The following processes are carried out immediately after conversion to wires:
- Conversion to hidden line symbols at both ends of hidden lines.

- End Covering is performed, taking the specification points of the selection rectangle as the line
type change points.
However, in the case of batch processing, the processing sequence among elements subject to
conversion is determined automatically, so the above processes will not be performed if wire
conversion happens first.
Also, wire conversion is performed when lines and text such as Number of Cable Cores are
selected as elements subject to conversion. Conversion to Number of Cable Cores will never be
performed automatically.
5.Traces for wire conversion

Under the following conditions, trace the subject elements and make them one route of wiring.
- The scale is the same as the currently displayed scale.

- The layer is the same as that of the trace start element.
- Only one end point of the subject element is in contact. Alternatively, only one end point of a
subject element spanning a hidden line adjustment is in contact.
6. The installation method for conversion to wires

The wires are drawn with the installation method for the line type set in the Installation Method Style
Settings dialog box, which is displayed for conversion to wires (independent) or conversion to wires
(batch).
However, lines are drawn by another installation method in the following cases:
- If the same line type as the element subject to conversion is set for multiple installation methods
in the Installation Method Style Settings dialog box, drawing uses the line type setting that
was set above.
- If the same line type as the element subject to conversion is not set in the Installation Method
Style Settings dialog box, drawing uses the line type that has the topmost setting.
7. Same-shape groups
On conversion to equipment/devices (batch), conversion can be made to different parts for each
same shape.
Even if the style is different, parts are processed as a same-shape group if their shapes are
absolutely identical. There are cases in which shapes appear to be the same, but do not become
same-shape groups, and cases in which they are judged to be the same shape even if they appear
different.
Examples in which shapes appear the same but do not become same-shape groups:
- The angle of the longest line is different.
- The angle of the shortest line is different.
- The member element composition of the group differs.
Examples in which shapes are judged to be the same, even though they appear different:
- The shape is a named figure.
- The member element composition of the group is the same.
Electric-566
Usage example
1. Operation example of drawing equipment/devices by independently converting to equipment
Command toolbar
Command toolbar
(1) “Subject element selection” -> “Draw

equipment/device”
[1] “Specify elements to convert to equipment/devices”
In the Command dialog box, set the equipment/devices to
draw.

subject element selection range to draw equipment/devices.
If the box for Auto-Finish is checked in the Command dialog

box, selection is finished with the selection of diagonally-
opposite point [2], and the equipment/device corresponding to
the settings is drawn.
The draw position for equipment/devices is determined

according to the layout point positions, based on the minimum
rectangle calculated for the selected element.
If the box for wire connection is checked, the equipment/device

is connected to wires adjoining its layout position.
2. Operation example of wire conversion by independent conversion to wiring

Command toolbar
(1) “Subject element selection” -> “Draw wire”

[1] “Specify elements for wiring conversion”
The subject elements are traced and the wires are drawn.
They are drawn with the same settings as the line type for the
subject elements.
Also, if an equipment/device is drawn at an end point, wire
conversion and cable bundle conversion proceed while
connecting equipment/devices, so converting to equipment
first raises the conversion precision.
The relationship between line type, attributes and styles can

be set in the Advanced Settings dialog box.
Electric-567

05 Electric

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

05 Electric

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Let’s calculation , positioning and modify Equipment / Device

Explanattion of the Command toolbar

[2.] Multiple - ratio

gitudinal (Equ ipment-Equipm

The following are examples of each

1. Draw w Equipment frrame

3. Recta anguler layoutt

5. Input each dimensiion.

The figu ape from 4. and the dimensioons from 5.

Example) A: Number of units: 2. la

Example) A: Number of units: 2. llateral, 2. long

Example) A: Number of units: 2. la teral, 2. longittudinal

7 Scale factor specification

1.0. Detail Setttings button

Value] button:: Reset to the draw scale faactor values fo

[2.] Text Anggle Setup dial og box

[3.] Symbol Text Scale Fa actor Processiing dialog box

[4.] Wiring Connection

“For independent”” “For batch”

The connection prrocess

The same appliess if a turn lump

- If itt is placed on an arc within one

Descriptiion of the Command

1. Display the shapes of Equ

[2.] Display diagrams sho owing dimensio

[3.] Choose from system d dimensions, user

[6.] Specify x-axis inversioon and y-axis inversion.

9 Text position specification

13.Enlarge/shrrink the dialog box in the lon

9. base points Check to lay out using g nine base points

Descriptiion of the Part

Partt Selection dia

Parrt Selection dia

1.Parts Selection menu

2. Saving the selection menu

3. Deleting the selection menu

4. Switching process mode

7. Input layer change

1.1. Actual size

1.4. Plane view

1.6. Right side

1.7. Left side

- Depress (in pink) to shoow only symbo

Descriptiion of the Edit

1.Parts Selection menu

The top hierarchical folde

- Save the Parts

- Delete thee Parts Selectiion menu

7. Intermediatte hierarchical folders

Left click to rename the h

- Save the Parts

- Delete thee Parts Selectiion menu

Ctrl + left click to make m

12. Reset the sub-folder layyer

14. Layer setting

19. Get part h

- A symbol registered to any one Parts

- If a symbol imported byy the utility is

1. Context The displayed content

[1.] Change rotation angle e

Example n units of 4.5.°° from the standard line.

Symbols are at sizes (standard dimensio